1000 INTRODUCTION PURPOSE The Electronic Dictionary provides detailed information on the terms, variables and geography of the 1991 Census of Canada, that was conducted on June 4, 1991. It will enable all users, the frequent and casual ones as well as newcomers, to better understand census data. The Electronic Dictionary is part of the general reference series of census products designed to inform users of the availability of products and services from the 1991 Census, as well as to assist them in using census data. ORGANIZATION OF THE PRODUCT The Electronic Dictionary can be searched by keyword. The Table of Contents (* key) divides census terms into five sections, referred to as "universes". Terms and variables are listed alphabetically within each of the five major sections. For information pertaining to each section enter the keyword "universes" in the search mode. SECTION DESCRIPTIONS POPULATION UNIVERSE. This section provides information on the characteristics of Canada's population. FAMILY UNIVERSE. This section pertains to the characteristics of families: both census and economic families. HOUSEHOLD UNIVERSE. The entries within this section cover the characteristics of a person or group of persons who occupy a household. DWELLING UNIVERSE. This section pertains to characteristics of dwelling units in Canada. GEOGRAPHY UNIVERSE. This section covers various geographic terms associated with the census of Canada. A comprehensive description of each section can be accessed by entering "universes" in the search mode or by scrolling the Table of Contents (* key). HOW TO USE THE 1991 CENSUS ELECTRONIC DICTIONARY If the user is familiar with census terminology and knows which universe/section contains the variable(s) or term(s) of interest, the Table of Contents (* key) provides an alphabetical listing of each term and variable within each major section. Users can scroll this list and select the terms that they require definitions of by pressing the F1 key. Users who are not familiar with census terminology should enter keywords in the search mode or scroll the Table of Contents (* key). The software includes a list of synonymous terms that will assist the user in keyword searches. Each entry listed within the 1991 Census Electronic Dictionary is generally presented using the format outlined below: Variable/Term Definitions: A comprehensive definition follows the name of the term or variable. Census(es): Indicates the censuses in which the term or variable was included and whether the data were collected from the entire population or from a sample and, if so, an indication of the sample size. Geography terms are measured for the entire census sample. Reported for: Gives information on the population or subpopulation for which the data are provided. This heading is not applicable to the geography terms. Question No(s).: Indicates the census question number(s) to which a variable is associated. This heading is not applicable to the geography terms. The Electronic Dictionary users are advised to consult Appendices J and K of the 1991 Census Dictionary for the questionnaires. Responses: Shows the response categories or classifications of the variable. This heading is not applicable to the geography terms. Remarks: Provides any additional information, namely on the comparability with previous censuses, which may help users to better understand the data. Rules and Operational Procedures and Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Under these headings - reserved for geography terms - users will find additional information required to effectively interpret and use the data. Appendices and Figures: Where possible, appendices and figures are included with the terms that they refer to. All figures can be found in their original format in the User Documentation or in the 1991 Census Dictionary (Publication 92-301E). ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS In addition to those reinstated from previous censuses, the 1991 Census of Canada includes new terms and new variables. Some items in the 1986 edition may also have been dropped from the 1991 version. The information below summarizes those changes: ADDITIONS Population Universe: * Aboriginal: Member of an Indian Band or First Nation Registered Indian Common-law Status Employment Equity Fertility Immigration: Landed Immigrant Status Non-permanent Resident Income: Composition of Income Constant Dollars Income Government Transfer Payments * Comparisons With Previous Censuses Comparisons of the 1991 Census with earlier censuses are affected by a change in the definition of the 1991 Census population universe. Persons in Canada on student authorizations, employment authorizations, Minister's permits, and as refugee claimants were enumerated in the 1991 Census but not in previous censuses. For further information, enter the keyword "universe" and view the Population Universe and enter the keywords "non-permanent residents" to view the definition. Users can also scroll the Table of Contents (* key) to the required terms. Labour: Employment/Population Ratio Occupation (Based on 1990 National Occupational Classification) Place of Work Language: First Official Language Spoken Knowledge of Non-official Languages Mobility 1: Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility Status - Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5: Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago Religion Schooling: School Attendance Secondary School Graduation Certificate Total Years of Schooling Visible Minorities Family Universe: Income: Incidence of Low Income Low Income Cut-offs (LICOs) Household Universe: Condominium Fees Number of Household Maintainers Primary Household Maintainer Dwelling Universe: Bedrooms Condition of Dwelling Geography Universe: Agricultural Region Area Master File (AMF) CARTLIB (Cartographic Library) Ecumene (Population) Geographic Reference Date Geographical Names Map Projection Place Names Subprovincial Region (SPR) Territory Thematic Map Township, Range and Meridian DELETIONS Population Universe: Rural Non-farm Population Rural Population Urban Population Family Universe: Aboriginal Census Family Status Household Universe: Aboriginal Private Household Type Person Responsible for Household Payments Dwelling Universe: Heating Equipment, Central Main type of Principal Heating Fuel Unoccupied Dwelling, Reason for Geography Universe: Indian Reserve Indian Settlement DEFINITIONS FROM PREVIOUS CENSUSES Users wishing to review definitions which correspond to terms and variables included in previous censuses are encouraged to consult the 1986 Census Dictionary (Publication 99-101), the 1981 Census Dictionary (Publication 99-901) or other printed reports from relevant census years. 1001 LIST OF FRENCH EQUIVALENT TERMS 1000 INTRODUCTION 1000 Introduction 2000 POPULATION UNIVERSE 2000 Univers de la population 2001 ABORIGINAL: ABORIGINAL POPULATION 2004 Autochtone : Population autochtone 2002 ABORIGINAL: MEMBER OF AN INDIAN BAND OR FIRST NATION 2003 Autochtone : Personne appartenant … une bande indienne ou … une premiŠre nation 2003 ABORIGINAL: REGISTERED INDIAN 2002 Autochtone : Indien(ne) inscrit(e) 2004 AGE 2001 Age 2005 CITIZENSHIP 2005 Citoyennet‚ 2006 COMMON-LAW STATUS 2106 Union libre 2007 DATE OF BIRTH 2006 Date de naissance 2008 DISABILITY 2018 Incapacit‚ 2009 EMPLOYMENT EQUITY 2007 quit‚ en matiŠre d'emploi 2010 ETHNIC ORIGIN 2040 Origine ethnique 2011 FARM OPERATORS 2009 Exploitants agricoles 2012 FERTILITY 2010 F‚condit‚ 2013 IMMIGRATION: AGE AT IMMIGRATION 2011 Immigration : Age … l'immigration 2014 IMMIGRATION: IMMIGRANT POPULATION 2015 Immigration : Population des immigrants 2015 IMMIGRATION: LANDED IMMIGRANT STATUS 2013 Immigration : Immigrant re‡u 2016 IMMIGRATION: NON-IMMIGRANT POPULATION 2016 Immigration : Population des non-immigrants 2017 IMMIGRATION: NON-PERMANENT RESIDENT 2017 Immigration : R‚sidents non permanents 2018 IMMIGRATION: PERIOD OF IMMIGRATION 2014 Immigration : P‚riode d'immigration 2019 IMMIGRATION: YEAR OF IMMIGRATION 2012 Immigration : Ann‚e d'immigration 2020 INCOME: AVERAGE INCOME OF INDIVIDUALS 2059 Revenu : Revenu moyen des particuliers 2021 INCOME: BENEFITS FROM CANADA OR QUEBEC PENSION PLAN 2054 Revenu : Prestations du R‚gime de rentes du Qu‚bec ou du R‚gime de pensions du Canada 2022 INCOME: BENEFITS FROM UNEMPLOYMENT INSURANCE 2053 Revenu : Prestations d'assurance-ch“mage 2023 INCOME: COMPOSITION OF INCOME 2047 Revenu : Composition du revenu 2024 INCOME: CONSTANT DOLLARS INCOME 2057 Revenu : Revenu en dollars constants 2025 INCOME: DIVIDENDS AND INTEREST ON BONDS, DEPOSITS AND SAVINGS CERTIFICATES, AND OTHER INVESTMENT INCOME 2049 Revenu : Dividendes et int‚rˆts d'obligations, de d‚p“ts et de certificats d'‚pargne et autre revenu de placements 2026 INCOME: EMPLOYMENT INCOME 2056 Revenu : Revenu d'emploi 2027 INCOME: FAMILY ALLOWANCES 2044 Revenu : Allocations familiales 2028 INCOME: FEDERAL CHILD TAX CREDITS 2048 Revenu : Cr‚dits d'imp“t f‚d‚ral pour enfants 2029 INCOME: GOVERNMENT TRANSFER PAYMENTS 2064 Revenu : Transferts gouvernementaux 2030 INCOME: MAJOR SOURCE OF INCOME 2055 Revenu : Principale source de revenu 2031 INCOME: MEDIAN INCOME OF INDIVIDUALS 2058 Revenu : Revenu m‚dian des particuliers 2032 INCOME: NET FARM SELF-EMPLOYMENT INCOME 2061 Revenu : Revenu net provenant d'un travail autonome agricole 2033 INCOME: NET INCOME FROM UNINCORPORATED NON-FARM BUSINESS AND/OR PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE 2060 Revenu : Revenu net dans une entreprise non agricole non constitu‚e en soci‚t‚ et/ou dans l'exercice d'une profession 2034 INCOME: OLD AGE SECURITY PENSION AND GUARANTEED INCOME SUPPLEMENT 2051 Revenu : Pension de s‚curit‚ de la vieillesse et suppl‚ment de revenu garanti 2035 INCOME: OTHER INCOME FROM GOVERNMENT SOURCES 2046 Revenu : Autre revenu provenant de sources publiques 2036 INCOME: OTHER MONEY INCOME 2045 Revenu : Autre revenu en espŠces 2037 INCOME: RETIREMENT PENSIONS, SUPERANNUATION AND ANNUITIES 2052 Revenu : Pensions de retraite et rentes 2038 INCOME: STANDARD ERROR OF AVERAGE INCOME 2050 Revenu : Erreur type de revenu moyen 2039 INCOME: TOTAL INCOME 2062 Revenu : Revenu total 2040 INCOME: WAGES AND SALARIES 2063 Revenu : Salaires et traitements 2041 INSTITUTIONAL RESIDENT 2041 Pensionnaire d'un ‚tablissement institutionnel 2042 LABOUR: CLASS OF WORKER (DERIVED) 2079 Travail : Cat‚gorie de travailleurs (variable d‚riv‚e) 2043 LABOUR: CLASS OF WORKER (DIRECT) 2080 Travail : Cat‚gorie de travailleurs (variable directe) 2044 LABOUR: EMPLOYED 2091 Travail : Personnes occup‚es 2045 LABOUR: EMPLOYMENT/POPULATION RATIO 2099 Travail : Rapport emploi/population 2046 LABOUR: EXPERIENCED LABOUR FORCE 2092 Travail : Population active exp‚riment‚e 2047 LABOUR: FULL-TIME OR PART-TIME WEEKS WORKED IN 1990 2101 Travail : Semaines travaill‚es, … plein temps ou … temps partiel, en 1990 2048 LABOUR: HOURS WORKED IN REFERENCE WEEK 2085 Travail : Heures travaill‚es pendant la semaine de r‚f‚rence 2049 LABOUR: INCORPORATION STATUS 2084 Travail : Forme juridique 2050 LABOUR: INDUSTRY (BASED ON 1980 STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATION) 2087 Travail : Industrie (selon la Classification type des industries de 1980) 2051 LABOUR: INDUSTRY (BASED ON 1970 STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATION) 2088 Travail : Industrie (selon la Classification des activit‚s ‚conomiques de 1970) 2052 LABOUR: INEXPERIENCED LABOUR FORCE 2093 Travail : Population active inexp‚riment‚e 2053 LABOUR: LABOUR FORCE ACTIVITY 2078 Travail : Activit‚ 2054 LABOUR: LOOKED FOR WORK IN PAST FOUR WEEKS (FULL- OR PART-TIME) 2100 Travail : Recherche d'un emploi (… plein temps ou … temps partiel) au cours des quatre semaines ayant pr‚c‚d‚ le recensement 2055 LABOUR: NEW JOB TO START IN FOUR WEEKS OR LESS (FROM REFERENCE WEEK) 2083 Travail : D‚but d'un nouvel emploi dans les quatre semaines suivant la semaine de r‚f‚rence 2056 LABOUR: NOT IN LABOUR FORCE 2086 Travail : Inactifs 2057 LABOUR: OCCUPATION (BASED ON 1971 OCCUPATIONAL CLASSIFICATION MANUAL) 2095 Travail : Profession (selon la Classification des professions de 1971) 2058 LABOUR: OCCUPATION (BASED ON 1980 STANDARD OCCUPATIONAL CLASSIFICATION) 2096 Travail : Profession (selon la Classification type des professions de 1980) 2059 LABOUR: OCCUPATION (BASED ON 1990 NATIONAL OCCUPATIONAL CLASSIFICATION) 2097 Travail : Profession (selon la Classification nationale des professions de 1990) 2060 LABOUR: ON TEMPORARY LAY-OFF OR ABSENT FROM JOB OR BUSINESS (IN REFERENCE WEEK) 2090 Travail : Mise … pied temporaire ou absence du travail ou de l'entreprise (pendant la semaine de r‚f‚rence) 2061 LABOUR: PARTICIPATION RATE 2103 Travail : Taux d'activit‚ 2062 LABOUR: PLACE OF WORK 2089 Travail : Lieu de travail 2063 LABOUR: REASONS UNABLE TO START WORK (IN REFERENCE WEEK) 2098 Travail : Raisons de l'impossibilit‚ de commencer … travailler (au cours de la semaine de r‚f‚rence) 2064 LABOUR: TOTAL LABOUR FORCE (IN REFERENCE WEEK) 2094 Travail : Population active totale (pendant la semaine de r‚f‚rence) 2065 LABOUR: UNEMPLOYED 2081 Travail : Ch“meurs 2066 LABOUR: UNEMPLOYMENT RATE 2104 Travail : Taux de ch“mage 2067 LABOUR: WEEKS WORKED IN 1990 2102 Travail : Semaines travaill‚es en 1990 2068 LABOUR: WHEN LAST WORKED 2082 Travail : Date du dernier travail 2069 LABOUR: WORK ACTIVITY IN 1990 2105 Travail : Travail en 1990 2070 LANGUAGE: FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE SPOKEN 2023 Langue: PremiŠre langue officielle parl‚e 2071 LANGUAGE: HOME LANGUAGE 2022 Langue: Langue parl‚e … la maison 2072 LANGUAGE: KNOWLEDGE OF NON-OFFICIAL LANGUAGES 2019 Langue: Connaissance des langues non officielles 2073 LANGUAGE: KNOWLEDGE OF OFFICIAL LANGUAGES 2020 Langue: Connaissance des langues officielles 2074 LANGUAGE: MOTHER TONGUE 2021 Langue: Langue maternelle 2075 MARITAL STATUS (LEGAL) 2008 tat matrimonial (l‚gal) 2076 MOBILITY 1: COUNTRY OF RESIDENCE 1 YEAR AGO 2028 Mobilit‚ 1 : Pays de r‚sidence 1 an auparavant 2077 MOBILITY 1: MOBILITY STATUS - PLACE OF RESIDENCE 1 YEAR AGO 2027 Mobilit‚ 1 : Mobilit‚ - Lieu de r‚sidence 1 an auparavant 2078 MOBILITY 1: PROVINCE/TERRITORY OF RESIDENCE 1 YEAR AGO 2029 Mobilit‚ 1 : Province ou territoire de r‚sidence 1 an auparavant 2079 MOBILITY 5: CENSUS DIVISION OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2031 Mobilit‚ 5 : Division de recensement de r‚sidence 5 ans auparavant 2080 MOBILITY 5: CENSUS METROPOLITAN AREA OR CENSUS AGGLOMERATION OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2036 Mobilit‚ 5 : R‚gion m‚tropolitaine de recensement ou agglom‚ration de recensement de r‚sidence 5 ans auparavant 2081 MOBILITY 5: CENSUS SUBDIVISION OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2037 Mobilit‚ 5 : Subdivision de recensement de r‚sidence 5 ans auparavant 2082 MOBILITY 5: CENSUS SUBDIVISION TYPE OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2032 Mobilit‚ 5 : Genre de subdivision de recensement de r‚sidence 5 ans auparavant 2083 MOBILITY 5: COUNTRY OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2034 Mobilit‚ 5 : Pays de r‚sidence 5 ans auparavant 2084 MOBILITY 5: MOBILITY STATUS - PLACE OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2033 Mobilit‚ 5 : Mobilit‚ - Lieu de r‚sidence 5 ans auparavant 2085 MOBILITY 5: POPULATION SIZE OF CENSUS SUBDIVISION OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2039 Mobilit‚ 5 : Taille de la population de la subdivision de recensement de r‚sidence 5 ans auparavant 2086 MOBILITY 5: POPULATION SIZE OF CURRENT CENSUS SUBDIVISION OF RESIDENCE 2038 Mobilit‚ 5 : Taille de la population de la subdivision de recensement de r‚sidence actuelle 2087 MOBILITY 5: PROVINCE/TERRITORY OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2035 Mobilit‚ 5 : Province ou territoire de r‚sidence 5 ans auparavant 2088 MOBILITY 5: RURAL/URBAN CLASSIFICATION OF PLACE OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO 2030 Mobilit‚ 5 : Classification du lieu de r‚sidence (milieu rural ou urbain) 5 ans auparavant 2089 PLACE OF BIRTH 2025 Lieu de naissance 2090 RELATIONSHIP TO HOUSEHOLD REFERENCE PERSON (PERSON 1) 2024 Lien avec la personne repŠre (Personne 1) 2091 RELIGION 2043 Religion 2092 RURAL FARM POPULATION 2042 Population rurale agricole 2093 SCHOOLING: DEGREE IN MEDICINE, DENTISTRY, VETERINARY MEDICINE OR OPTOMETRY 2068 Scolarit‚ : Dipl“me en m‚decine, en art dentaire, en m‚decine v‚t‚rinaire ou en optom‚trie 2094 SCHOOLING: HIGHEST DEGREE, CERTIFICATE OR DIPLOMA 2073 Scolarit‚ : Plus haut grade, certificat ou dipl“me 2095 SCHOOLING: HIGHEST GRADE OF ELEMENTARY OR SECONDARY 2075 Scolarit‚ : Plus haut niveau atteint … l'‚cole primaire ou secondaire 2096 SCHOOLING: HIGHEST LEVEL OF 2074 Scolarit‚ : Plus haut niveau atteint 2097 SCHOOLING: MAJOR FIELD OF STUDY (MFS) 2076 Scolarit‚ : Principal domaine d'‚tudes (PD) 2098 SCHOOLING: SCHOOL ATTENDANCE 2069 Scolarit‚ : Fr‚quentation scolaire 2099 SCHOOLING: SECONDARY SCHOOL GRADUATION CERTIFICATE 2065 Scolarit‚ : Certificat d'‚tudes secondaires 2100 SCHOOLING: TOTAL YEARS OF SCHOOLING 2072 Scolarit‚ : Nombre total d'ann‚es de scolarit‚ 2101 SCHOOLING: TRADES AND OTHER NON-UNIVERSITY CERTIFICATES 2067 Scolarit‚ : Certificats d'‚coles de m‚tiers et autres certificats non universitaires 2102 SCHOOLING: UNIVERSITY CERTIFICATE ABOVE BACHELOR LEVEL 2066 Scolarit‚ : Certificat universitaire sup‚rieur au baccalaur‚at 2103 SCHOOLING: YEARS OF OTHER NON-UNIVERSITY EDUCATION 2070 Scolarit‚ : Nombre d'ann‚es d'autres ‚tudes non universitaires 2104 SCHOOLING: YEARS OF UNIVERSITY 2071 Scolarit‚ : Nombre d'ann‚es d'‚tudes universitaires 2105 SEX 2077 Sexe 2106 VISIBLE MINORITIES 2026 Minorit‚s visibles 3000 FAMILY UNIVERSE 3000 Univers des familles 3001 CENSUS FAMILY 3003 Famille de recensement 3002 CENSUS FAMILY COMPOSITION 3001 Composition de la famille de recensement 3003 CENSUS FAMILY HOUSEHOLD COMPOSITION 3002 Composition du m‚nage avec famille de recensement 3004 CENSUS FAMILY LIVING ARRANGEMENTS 3018 Situation des particuliers dans le m‚nage 3005 CENSUS FAMILY STATUS 3016 Situation des particuliers dans la famille de recensement 3006 CENSUS FAMILY STRUCTURE 3019 Structure de la famille de recensement 3007 CENSUS FAMILY TYPE 3005 Genre de famille de recensement 3008 ECONOMIC FAMILY 3004 Famille ‚conomique 3009 ECONOMIC FAMILY STATUS 3017 Situation des particuliers dans la famille ‚conomique 3010 ECONOMIC FAMILY STRUCTURE 3020 Structure de la famille ‚conomique 3011 ECONOMIC FAMILY TYPE 3006 Genre de famille ‚conomique 3012 INCOME: AVERAGE INCOME OF CENSUS FAMILIES AND NON-FAMILY PERSONS 15 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER 3011 Revenu : Revenu moyen des familles de recensement et des personnes hors famille de recensement de 15 ans ou plus 3013 INCOME: AVERAGE INCOME OF ECONOMIC FAMILIES AND UNATTACHED INDIVIDUALS 15 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER 3012 Revenu : Revenu moyen des familles ‚conomiques et des personnes hors famille ‚conomique de 15 ans ou plus 3014 INCOME: CENSUS FAMILY TOTAL INCOME 3013 Revenu : Revenu total de la famille de recensement 3015 INCOME: ECONOMIC FAMILY TOTAL INCOME 3014 Revenu : Revenu total de la famille ‚conomique 3016 INCOME: INCIDENCE OF LOW INCOME 3008 Revenu : Fr‚quence des unit‚s … faible revenu 3017 INCOME: INCOME STATUS 3007 Revenu : Cat‚gorie de revenu 3018 INCOME: LOW INCOME CUT-OFFS (LICOs) 3015 Revenu : Seuils de faible revenu (SFR) 3019 INCOME: MEDIAN INCOME OF CENSUS FAMILIES AND NON-FAMILY PERSONS 15 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER 3009 Revenu : Revenu m‚dian des familles de recensement et des personnes hors famille de recensement de 15 ans ou plus 3020 INCOME: MEDIAN INCOME OF ECONOMIC FAMILIES AND UNATTACHED INDIVIDUALS 15 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER 3010 Revenu : Revenu m‚dian des familles ‚conomiques et des personnes hors famille ‚conomique de 15 ans ou plus 4000 HOUSEHOLD UNIVERSE 4000 Univers des m‚nages 4001 ANNUAL PAYMENT FOR ELECTRICITY 4016 Paiement annuel au titre de l'‚lectricit‚ 4002 ANNUAL PAYMENT FOR OIL, GAS, COAL, WOOD OR OTHER FUELS 4017 Paiement annuel au titre de l'huile (mazout), du gaz, du charbon, du bois ou de tout autre combustible 4003 ANNUAL PAYMENT FOR WATER AND OTHER MUNICIPAL SERVICES 4015 Paiement annuel au titre de l'eau et des autres services municipaux 4004 ANNUAL PROPERTY TAXES 4012 Montant annuel de l'imp“t foncier 4005 CONDOMINIUM FEES 4001 Frais de condominium 4006 HOUSEHOLD 4006 M‚nage 4007 HOUSEHOLD, COLLECTIVE 4008 M‚nage collectif 4008 HOUSEHOLD MAINTAINER(S) 4025 Soutien(s) du m‚nage 4009 HOUSEHOLD OUTSIDE CANADA 4007 M‚nage … l'ext‚rieur du Canada 4010 HOUSEHOLD, PRIVATE 4009 M‚nage priv‚ 4011 HOUSEHOLD SIZE 4026 Taille du m‚nage 4012 HOUSEHOLD TYPE 4002 Genre de m‚nage 4013 INCOME: AVERAGE INCOME OF HOUSEHOLDS 4023 Revenu : Revenu moyen des m‚nages 4014 INCOME: HOUSEHOLD TOTAL INCOME 4024 Revenu : Revenu total du m‚nage 4015 INCOME: MEDIAN INCOME OF HOUSEHOLDS 4022 Revenu : Revenu m‚dian des m‚nages 4016 MONTHLY MORTGAGE PAYMENT 4018 Paiement hypoth‚caire mensuel 4017 NUMBER OF HOUSEHOLD MAINTAINERS 4014 Nombre de soutiens dans le m‚nage 4018 NUMBER OF PERSONS PER ROOM 4013 Nombre de personnes par piŠce 4019 OWNER'S MAJOR PAYMENTS 4020 Principales d‚penses de propri‚t‚ 4020 OWNER'S MAJOR PAYMENTS OR GROSS RENT AS A PERCENTAGE OF HOUSEHOLD INCOME 4021 Principales d‚penses de propri‚t‚ ou loyer brut, sous forme de pourcentage du revenu du m‚nage 4021 PRIMARY HOUSEHOLD MAINTAINER 4019 Principal soutien du m‚nage 4022 PROPERTY TAXES INCLUDED IN MORTGAGE PAYMENTS 4003 Imp“t foncier compris dans les paiements hypoth‚caires 4023 RENT, GROSS 4004 Loyer brut 4024 RENT, MONTHLY CASH 4005 Loyer mensuel en argent 4025 TENURE 4010 Mode d'occupation 4026 TENURE - CONDOMINIUM 4011 Mode d'occupation - Condominium (copropri‚t‚ divise) 5000 DWELLING UNIVERSE 5000 Univers des logements 5001 BEDROOMS 5001 Chambres … coucher 5002 CONDITION OF DWELLING 5002 tat du logement 5003 DWELLING 5003 Logement 5004 DWELLING, COLLECTIVE 5004 Logement collectif 5005 DWELLING, MARGINAL 5006 Logement marginal 5006 DWELLING, OCCUPIED PRIVATE 5012 Logement priv‚ occup‚ 5007 DWELLING, OWNER-OCCUPIED PRIVATE, NON-FARM 5010 Logement priv‚ non agricole occup‚ par le propri‚taire 5008 DWELLING, PRIVATE 5008 Logement priv‚ 5009 DWELLING, PRIVATE, OCCUPIED BY FOREIGN AND/OR TEMPORARY RESIDENTS 5013 Logement priv‚ occup‚ par des r‚sidents ‚trangers et/ou temporaires 5010 DWELLING, REGULAR 5007 Logement ordinaire 5011 DWELLING, TENANT-OCCUPIED PRIVATE, NON-FARM 5011 Logement priv‚ non agricole occup‚ par un locataire 5012 DWELLING UNDER CONSTRUCTION, RENOVATION OR CONVERSION 5005 Logement en construction, en cours de r‚novation ou de transformation 5013 DWELLING, UNOCCUPIED PRIVATE 5009 Logement priv‚ inoccup‚ 5014 PERIOD OF CONSTRUCTION 5014 P‚riode de construction 5015 ROOMS 5015 PiŠces 5016 STRUCTURAL TYPE OF DWELLING 5016 Type de construction r‚sidentielle 5017 VALUE OF DWELLING 5017 Valeur de logement 6000 GEOGRAPHY UNIVERSE 6000 Univers de la g‚ographie 6001 AGRICULTURAL REGION 6027 R‚gion agricole 6002 AREA MASTER FILE (AMF) 6017 Fichier principal de r‚gion (FPR) 6003 BLOCK-FACE 6011 C“t‚ d'Œlot 6004 CARTLIB (CARTOGRAPHIC LIBRARY) 6005 CARTLIB (BibliothŠque cartographique) 6005 CENSUS AGGLOMERATION (CA) 6001 Agglom‚ration de recensement (AR) 6006 CENSUS CONSOLIDATED SUBDIVISION (CCS) 6039 Subdivision de recensement unifi‚e (SRU) 6007 CENSUS DIVISION (CD) 6014 Division de recensement (DR) 6008 CENSUS FARM 6016 Ferme de recensement 6009 CENSUS METROPOLITAN AREA (CMA) 6030 R‚gion m‚tropolitaine de recensement (RMR) 6010 CENSUS SUBDIVISION (CSD) 6038 Subdivision de recensement (SDR) 6011 CENSUS SUBDIVISION TYPE 6018 Genre de subdivision de recensement 6012 CENSUS TRACT (CT) 6035 Secteur de recensement (SR) 6013 CENTROID 6006 Centro‹de 6014 CMA/CA COMPONENT 6010 Composante des RMR/AR 6015 CMA/CA PARTS 6024 Parties de RMR/AR 6016 ECUMENE (POPULATION) 6015 coumŠne (Population) 6017 ENUMERATION AREA (EA) 6034 Secteur de d‚nombrement (SD) 6018 FEDERAL ELECTORAL DISTRICT (FED) 6007 Circonscription ‚lectorale f‚d‚rale (CEF) 6019 GEOCODING 6019 G‚ocodage 6020 GEOGRAPHIC AREA 6028 R‚gion g‚ographique 6021 GEOGRAPHIC REFERENCE DATE 6012 Date de r‚f‚rence g‚ographique 6022 GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES 6023 Noms g‚ographiques 6023 LAND AREA 6040 Superficie 6024 MAP PROJECTION 6025 Projection cartographique 6025 PLACE NAMES 6022 Nom de localit‚ 6026 POPULATION DENSITY 6013 Densit‚ de la population 6027 POSTAL CODE 6009 Code postal 6028 PRIMARY CENSUS AGGLOMERATION (PCA) 6002 Agglom‚ration de recensement primaire (ARP) 6029 PRIMARY CENSUS METROPOLITAN AREA (PCMA) - PRIMARY CENSUS AGGLOMERATION (PCA) 6031 R‚gion m‚tropolitaine de recensement primaire (RMRP) - Agglom‚ration de recensement primaire (ARP) 6030 PROVINCE 6026 Province 6031 PROVINCIAL CENSUS TRACT (PCT) 6036 Secteur de recensement provincial (SRP) 6032 QUERY AREA 6037 Secteur demand‚ 6033 REFERENCE MAPS 6003 Cartes de r‚f‚rence 6034 RURAL AREA 6032 R‚gion rurale 6035 STANDARD GEOGRAPHICAL CLASSIFICATION (SGC) 6008 Classification g‚ographique type (CGT) 6036 SUBPROVINCIAL REGION (SPR) 6029 R‚gion infraprovinciale (RI) 6037 TERRITORY 6041 Territoire 6038 THEMATIC MAP 6004 Cartes th‚matiques 6039 TOWNSHIP, RANGE AND MERIDIAN 6042 Township, rang et m‚ridien 6040 UNINCORPORATED PLACE (UP) 6021 Localit‚ non constitu‚e (LNC) 6041 URBAN AREA (UA) 6033 R‚gion urbaine (RU) 6042 URBAN POPULATION SIZE GROUP 6020 Groupe de taille de la population urbaine 1002 HOW TO REACH US Data in Many Forms... Statistics Canada disseminates data in a variety of forms. In addition to diskette products and publications, both standard and special tabulations are available in print or electronic format. Maps and other geographic reference materials are available for some types of data. In some cases, workshops and seminars have been developed to provide additional information on some subjects. How to Obtain More Information Inquiries about products and services should be directed to one of the following Statistics Canada Reference Centres: St. John's (709) 772-4073 Winnipeg (204) 983-4020 Halifax (902) 426-5331 Regina (306) 780-5405 Montr‚al (514) 283-5725 Edmonton (403) 495-3027 Ottawa (613) 951-8116 Calgary (403) 292-6717 Toronto (416) 973-6586 Vancouver (604) 666-3691 A toll-free number is provided in all provinces and territories, for users who reside outside the local dialing area of any of the Regional Reference Centres. See the "Regional Reference Centres" section at the end of this documentation package for further information. Newfoundland and Labrador 1-800-563-4255 Nova Scotia, New Brunswick and Prince Edward Island 1-800-565-7192 Quebec 1-800-361-2831 Ontario 1-800-263-1136 Manitoba 1-800-542-3404 Saskatchewan 1-800-667-7164 Alberta 1-800-282-3907 Southern Alberta 1-800-472-9708 British Columbia (South and Central) 1-800-663-1551 Yukon and Northern B.C. (area served by NORTHWESTEL Inc.) Zenith 08913 Northwest Territories (area served by NORTHWESTEL Inc.) Call collect 403-495-3028 Telecommunications Device access is provided for the hearing impaired. See the "Regional Reference Centres" section for further information. How to Order Products Statistics Canada publications may be purchased from local authorized agents and other community bookstores, through the nearest Statistics Canada Regional Reference Centre, or by mail order to Publication Sales, Statistics Canada, Ottawa K1A 0T6. Contact the nearest Statistics Canada Regional Reference Centre for more information on electronic products and services. 1003 REGIONAL REFERENCE CENTRES Statistics Canada's Regional Reference Centres provide a full range of census products and services. Each reference centre is equipped with a library and a sales counter where users can consult or purchase publications, microcomputer diskettes, microfiche, maps and more. The staff of the Regional Reference Centres provide consultative and research services in addition to providing after-sales service and support, including seminars and workshops on the use of Statistics Canada information. Each centre has facilities to retrieve information from Statistics Canada's computerized data retrieval systems CANSIM and TELICHART. A telephone inquiry service is also available with toll-free numbers for regional users outside local calling areas. Call, write, fax or visit the nearest Regional Reference Centre for more information. Newfoundland and Labrador Statistics Canada Advisory Services 3rd Floor Viking Building Crosbie Road St. John's, Newfoundland A1B 3P2 Local calls: 709-772-4073 Toll free: 1-800-563-4255 Fax: 1-709-772-6433 Maritime Provinces Statistics Canada Advisory Services North American Life Centre 3rd Floor 1770 Market Street Halifax, Nova Scotia B3J 3M3 Local calls: 902-426-5331 Toll free: 1-800-565-7192 Fax: 1-902-426-9538 Quebec Statistics Canada Advisory Services 200 Ren‚-L‚vesque Blvd. West Guy Favreau Complex 4th floor, East Tower Montr‚al, Quebec H2Z 1X4 Local calls: 514-283-5725 Toll free: 1-800-361-2831 Fax: 1-514-283-9350 National Capital Region Statistics Canada Statistical Reference Centre Lobby R.H. Coats Building Tunney's Pasture Holland Avenue Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0T6 Local calls: 613-951-8116 If outside the local calling area, dial the toll-free number for your province. Fax: 1-613-951-0581 Ontario Statistics Canada Advisory Services 10th Floor Arthur Meighen Building 25 St. Clair Avenue East Toronto, Ontario M4T 1M4 Local calls: 416-973-6586 Toll free: 1-800-263-1136 Fax: 1-416-973-7475 Manitoba Statistics Canada Advisory Services Suite 300 MacDonald Building 344 Edmonton Street Winnipeg, Manitoba R3B 3L9 Local calls: 204-983-4020 Toll free: 1-800-542-3404 Fax: 1-204-983-7543 Saskatchewan Statistics Canada Advisory Services 9th Floor Avord Tower 2002 Victoria Avenue Regina, Saskatchewan S4P 0R7 Local calls: 306-780-5405 Toll free: 1-800-667-7164 Fax: 1-306-780-5403 Alberta and Northwest Territories Statistics Canada Advisory Services 8th Floor Park Square 10001 Bellamy Hill Edmonton, Alberta T5J 3B6 Local calls: 403-495-3027 Toll free: 1-800-282-3907 N.W.T.: Call collect 1-403-495-3028 Fax: 1-403-495-3026 Southern Alberta Statistics Canada Advisory Services Room 401 First Street Plaza 138-4th Avenue South East Calgary, Alberta T2G 4Z6 Local calls: 403-292-6717 Toll free: 1-800-472-9708 Fax: 1-403-292-4958 British Columbia and Yukon Statistics Canada Advisory Services Suite 440F 3rd Floor Federal Building Sinclair Centre 757 West Hastings St. Vancouver, British Columbia V6C 3C9 Local calls: 604-666-3691 Toll free: 1-800-663-1551 (except Atlin, B.C.) Yukon and Atlin, B.C. Zenith 08913 Fax: 1-604-666-4863 Telecommunications Device for the Hearing Impaired 1-800-363-7629 1004 DEPOSITORY LIBRARIES The Statistics Canada Library in Ottawa maintains complete current and historical records of all Statistics Canada publications, both catalogued and non-catalogued. The library staff is available to help users find the required information. Statistics Canada Library R.H. Coats Building, 2nd Floor Tunney's Pasture Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0T6 Local calls: 613-951-8219/20 Fax: 1-613-951-0939 The following is a list of full depository libraries that receive all Statistics Canada publications and all other federal government publications. Canada Newfoundland St. John's Memorial University of Newfoundland Queen Elizabeth II Library St. John's, Newfoundland A1B 3Y1 Prince Edward Island Charlottetown Government Services Library Charlottetown, Prince Edward Island C1A 3T2 Nova Scotia Halifax Dalhousie University Killam Memorial Library Halifax, Nova Scotia B3H 4H8 Wolfville Acadia University Vaughan Memorial Library Wolfville, Nova Scotia B0P 1X0 New Brunswick Fredericton Legislative Library Fredericton, New Brunswick E3B 5H1 University of New Brunswick Harriet Irving Library Fredericton, New Brunswick E3B 5H5 Moncton Universit‚ de Moncton BibliothŠque Champlain Moncton, New Brunswick E1A 3E9 Sackville Mount Allison University Ralph Pickard Bell Library Sackville, New Brunswick E0A 3C0 Quebec Montr‚al Municipal Library of Montr‚al Montr‚al, Quebec H2L 1L9 Services documentaires multim‚dia Montr‚al, Quebec H2C 1T1 Concordia University Library Montr‚al, Quebec H3G 1M8 McGill University McLennan Library Montr‚al, Quebec H3A 1Y1 Universit‚ de Montr‚al BibliothŠque des sciences humaines et sociales Montr‚al, Quebec H3C 3T2 Universit‚ du Qu‚bec … Montr‚al BibliothŠque Montr‚al, Quebec H2L 4S6 Qu‚bec National Assembly Library Qu‚bec, Quebec G1A 1A5 Sherbrooke Universit‚ de Sherbrooke BibliothŠque g‚n‚rale Cit‚ universitaire Sherbrooke, Quebec J1K 2R1 Sainte-Foy Universit‚ Laval BibliothŠque g‚n‚rale Sainte-Foy, Quebec G1K 7P4 Ontario Downsview York University Scott Library Downsview, Ontario M3J 2R6 Guelph University of Guelph Library Guelph, Ontario N1G 2W1 Hamilton Hamilton Public Library Hamilton, Ontario L8R 3K1 McMaster University Mills Memorial Library Hamilton, Ontario L8S 4L6 Kingston Queen's University at Kingston Douglas Library Kingston, Ontario K7L 3N6 London The University of Western Ontario D.B. Weldon Library London, Ontario N6A 3K7 Ottawa Library of Parliament Canadian Government Information Section Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0A9 National Library of Canada Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N4 University of Ottawa Morisset Library Ottawa, Ontario K1N 9A5 Sudbury Laurentian University of Sudbury Library Sudbury, Ontario P3C 2C6 Thunder Bay Lakehead University Chancellor Paterson Library Thunder Bay, Ontario P7B 5E1 Thunder Bay Public Library Thunder Bay, Ontario P7E 1C2 Toronto Legislative Library Toronto, Ontario M5S 1A5 Metropolitan Toronto Reference Library Toronto, Ontario M4W 2G8 University of Toronto Robarts Library Toronto, Ontario M5S 1A5 Waterloo University of Waterloo Dana Porter Arts Library Waterloo, Ontario N2L 3G1 Windsor Windsor Public Library Windsor, Ontario N9A 4M9 Manitoba Winnipeg Legislative Library Winnipeg, Manitoba R3C 0V8 The University of Manitoba Elizabeth Dafoe Library Winnipeg, Manitoba R3T 2N2 Saskatchewan Regina Legislative Library Regina, Saskatchewan S4S 0B3 Saskatoon University of Saskatchewan The Main Library Saskatoon, Saskatchewan S7N 0W0 Alberta Calgary The University of Calgary MacKimmie Library Calgary, Alberta T2N 1N4 Edmonton Edmonton Public Library Edmonton, Alberta T5J 2V4 Legislative Library Edmonton, Alberta T5K 2B6 The University of Alberta Library Edmonton, Alberta T6G 2J8 British Columbia Burnaby Simon Fraser University Library Burnaby, British Columbia V5A 1S6 Vancouver The University of British Columbia Library Vancouver, British Columbia V6T 1Y3 Vancouver Public Library Vancouver, British Columbia V6Z 1X5 Victoria Legislative Library Victoria, British Columbia V8V 1X4 University of Victoria McPherson Library Victoria, British Columbia V8W 3H5 Northwest Territories Yellowknife Northwest Territories Government Library Yellowknife, Northwest Territories X0E 1H0 Other Countries Federal Republic of Germany Preussischer Kulturbesitz Staatsbibliothek Abt. Amtsdruckchriften U. Tausch Postfach 1407 1000 Berlin 30 Germany United Kingdom The British Library London, WC1B 3DG England, United Kingdom Japan National Diet Library Tokyo, Japan United States of America Library of Congress Washington, D.C. 20540 United States of America 1005 ADDITIONAL REFERENCES AND SERVICES In addition to Regional Reference Centres and depository libraries, Statistics Canada publications may be ordered through your local bookstore or subscription agent. Contact the nearest Regional Reference Centre for a list of Canadian outlets available, or consult the 1991 Census Catalogue (Catalogue No. 92-302E). Secondary distributors offer data access and analytical support through a variety of consulting and computer-based services not available at Statistics Canada. The names and addresses of licensed distributors may be obtained from any Regional Reference Centre. Statistics Canada provides digital geographic products which allow computer manipulation of geographic data. A customized retrieval service is available for users who wish to define their own geographic area of study. A variety of data retrieval files and services provide flexibility in selecting a geographic base. A complete description of available digital files and services is documented in the 1991 Census Catalogue (Catalogue No. 92-302E ). Information concerning census of agriculture products and services may be referenced in the 1991 Census of Agriculture Products and Services publication, Catalogue No. 92-303, or by calling toll free 1-800-465-1991. Users with special data requirements may request post-census survey services. Data are made available on microcomputer diskettes for use with spreadsheet software, or on paper output. For additional information, please contact the nearest Regional Reference Centre. The Electronic Data Dissemination Division (EDDD) is responsible for CANSIM, Statistics Canada's computerized database network and information retrieval service. Users are provided with access to current and historical statistics in various forms including specialized data manipulation and analysis packages, graphics facilities and a bibliographic search service. For more information about CANSIM, contact any Regional Reference Centre. 1006 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AMF - Area Master File CA - census agglomeration CARTLIB - Cartographic Library CCDO - Canadian Classification and Dictionary of Occupations CCS - census consolidated subdivision CD - census division CMA - census metropolitan area CPCGN - Canadian Permanent Committee on Geographical Names CPP - Canada Pension Plan CR - census representative CSD - census subdivision CT - census tract E & I - Edit and Imputation EA - enumeration area FED - federal electoral district FSA - Forward Sortation Area GFDB - Geocartographic Frame Database GIS - geographical information system GIS - Guaranteed Income Supplement HALS - Health and Activity Limitation Survey IGD - Indian Government District INAC - Indian and Northern Affairs Canada LDU - Local Delivery Unit LFS - Labour Force Survey LICO - low income cut-off MAOU - metropolitan area - outside urban MAR - metropolitan area - rural MAU - metropolitan area - urban MFS - major field of study MRC - municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ n.e.c. - not elsewhere classified n.e.s. - not elsewhere specified n.i.e. - not included elsewhere NOC - National Occupational Classification n.o.s. - not otherwise specified OAS - Old Age Security OCM - Occupational Classification Manual PCA - primary census agglomeration PCCF - Postal Code Conversion File PCMA - primary census metropolitan area PCT - provincial census tract QAL - Query Area Library QPP - Quebec Pension Plan RCMP - Royal Canadian Mounted Police RRSP - Registered Retirement Savings Plan SGC - Standard Geographical Classification SIC - Standard Industrial Classification SOC - Standard Occupational Classification SPR - subprovincial region TR - terres r‚serv‚es UA - urban area U.I. - Unemployment Insurance UP - unincorporated place UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator --------------------------------------- List of abbreviations for provinces and territories Nfld. - Newfoundland P.E.I. - Prince Edward Island N.S. - Nova Scotia N.B. - New Brunswick Que. - Quebec Ont. - Ontario Man. - Manitoba Sask. - Saskatchewan Alta. - Alberta B.C. - British Columbia Y.T. - Yukon N.W.T. - Northwest Territories 2000 POPULATION UNIVERSE The Population Universe includes variables that provide information about individuals. It covers a wide variety of characteristics such as demographic, ethno-cultural, language, mobility, schooling, income and labour force. A complete list of these variables is found in the Table of Contents of the User Documentation or in the 1991 Census Dictionary (publication 92-301E). Some variables within this universe are collected for the entire population of Canada; others are collected for a sample of the population only. See Figure 1 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 1 in the User Documentation or to Figure 1 in publication 92-301E, page 18, to view this figure in its original format. The Population Universe of the 1991 Census includes the following groups: - Canadian citizens and landed immigrants with a usual place of residence in Canada; - Canadian citizens and landed immigrants who are abroad, either on a military base or attached to a diplomatic mission; - Canadian citizens and landed immigrants at sea or in port aboard merchant vessels under Canadian registry; - persons in Canada claiming refugee status; - persons in Canada who hold a student authorization (foreign students, student visa holders); - persons in Canada who hold an employment authorization (foreign workers, work permit holders); - persons in Canada who hold a Minister's permit (including extensions); - all non-Canadian born dependents of persons claiming refugee status, or of persons holding student authorizations, employment authorizations or Minister's permits. For census purposes, the last five groups in this list are referred to as non-permanent residents. For further information on non-permanent residents, refer to Immigration: Non-Permanent Resident. The Population Universe of the 1991 Census excludes foreign residents. Foreign residents are persons who belong to the following groups: - government representatives of another country attached to the embassy, high commission or other diplomatic body of that country in Canada, and their families; - members of the Armed Forces of another country who are stationed in Canada, and their families; - residents of another country visiting in Canada temporarily. Foreign residents are not enumerated by the census. _______________________________________________________________ Figure 1. Population Universe and Subuniverses ------------------------------------ Total population Age Date of birth Relationship to reference person Marital status Mother tongue Sex Population excluding institutional residents Aboriginal population Citizenship Common-law status Disability Ethnic origin First official language spoken Home language Knowledge of non-official languages Knowledge of official languages Landed immigrant status Place of birth Religion Age at immigration (1) Period of immigration (1) Year of immigration (1) Population 1 year or more of age, excluding institutional residents, residing in Canada Mobility/Migration (1-year interval) Population 5 years or more of age, excluding institutional residents, residing in Canada Mobility/Migration (5-year interval) Population 15 years or more of age, excluding institutional residents Fertility Income variables Labour variables Schooling variables Institutional residents (1) Persons who are or have been landed immigrants 2001 ABORIGINAL: ABORIGINAL POPULATION Refers to those persons who reported at least one aboriginal ethnic origin, i.e. North American Indian, M‚tis or Inuit and/or reported being registered under the Indian Act of Canada. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 15 and 16 Responses: The Aboriginal Population variable will be depicted in the 1991 Census output in a variety of forms. Included in the derived aboriginal population are the following: Total aboriginal population North American Indian origin only North American Indian and non-aboriginal origin(s) M‚tis origin only M‚tis and non-aboriginal origin(s) Inuit origin only Inuit and non-aboriginal origin(s) Multiple aboriginal origins* Registered Indian without aboriginal origin(s) See also Figure 2 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 2 in the User Documentation or to Figure 2 in publication 92-301E, page 20, to view this figure in its original format. Remarks: In 1986 and previous censuses, aboriginal persons were determined using the ethnic origin question, based primarily on the ancestry dimension. In addition to the ancestry dimension, the 1991 Census allows, for example, a person who is Irish by ethnic origin but registered Indian on account of marriage, to be included in the aboriginal population in spite of an Irish single response to the ethnic origin question. * May include non-aboriginal origin(s). _____________________________________________ Figure 2. Total Aboriginal Population ___________________________ Derived total aboriginal population (1991 Census only) Population with aboriginal origins (1986 and 1991 Censuses) Single ethnic origin responses (1) North American Indian or M‚tis or Inuit Multiple ethnic origin responses (1) Any combination of 2 or more of the following responses: North American Indian M‚tis Inuit Non-aboriginal origins Other reponses (2) Non-aboriginal origin responses to Question 15 but registered under the Indian Act responses to Question 16 (1) Specific responses to the ethnic origin question (Q. 15) (2) Responses to the ethnic origin question (Q. 15) and to the registered Indian question (Q. 16) 2002 ABORIGINAL: MEMBER OF AN INDIAN BAND OR FIRST NATION Refers to those persons who reported an Indian Band or a First Nation of Canada. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 16 Responses: There are approximately 600 different Indian Bands in Canada. Selected groupings of Indian Bands will be published. The unpublished information will be available upon special request, subject to confidentiality and data quality constraints. Remarks: The following instructions were provided to respondents: For persons who are members of an Indian Band or First Nation (for example, the Musqueam Indian Band), indicate this in the box provided. For persons whose Indian status has been regained under Bill C-31 and who are not members of an Indian Band, leave the Indian Band or First Nation box blank. Registered Indians who are not band members for any other reason should leave the Indian Band/First Nation box blank. 2003 ABORIGINAL: REGISTERED INDIAN Refers to those persons who reported they were registered under the Indian Act of Canada. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 16 Responses: Registered under the Indian Act; Not registered under the Indian Act Remarks: The following instructions were provided to respondents: A Yes response to this question should include those persons who are registered as status Indians as defined by the Indian Act of Canada. Also answer Yes to this question if Indian status has been regained since June 1985, when the Indian Act of Canada was amended by Bill C-31. All other persons should answer No to this question. Also answer No to this question for persons: (a) who lost or never had Indian status according to the Indian Act of Canada; (b) whose Indian status was not regained under Bill C-31; or (c) who have applied to the Department of Indian and Northern Affairs to regain Indian status, but whose status has not yet been approved. 2004 AGE Refers to the age at last birthday (as of the census reference date, June 4, 1991). This variable is derived from date of birth. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: Total population Question No.: Derived variable: Question 3 Responses: Range of values: Single years, 0-121 Remarks: In 1966 and 1961, respondents were asked to state their age in completed years as of their last birthday before the census date. For more information, see Date of Birth. 2005 CITIZENSHIP Refers to the legal citizenship status of the respondent. Persons who are citizens of more than one country were instructed to indicate this fact. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 12 Responses: Canada, by birth; Canada, by naturalization; Same as country of birth (other than Canada); Other country Remarks: Canadian citizens were asked to distinguish between Canadian citizenship by birth and Canadian citizenship by naturalization. This distinction is required to identify the immigrant universe. Persons who were born outside Canada and who are Canadian citizens by birth were requested to report "Canada, by birth". In 1971, respondents were asked to indicate their country of citizenship and specific countries were coded. In 1981, 1986 and 1991, this coding operation was eliminated. Citizenship data for specific countries are available by cross-classifying place of birth and citizenship. Data on multiple citizenships are available upon special request, subject to confidentiality constraints. 2006 COMMON-LAW STATUS Refers to two people who live together as husband and wife but who are not legally married to each other. Census: 1991 Reported for: Total population Question No.: Direct variable: Question 6 Responses: Yes; No Remarks: In 1986 and 1981, common-law status was derived based on the relationship to Person 1 question. Common-law status was not measured in censuses prior to 1981. 2007 DATE OF BIRTH Refers to the day, month and year of birth, collected for the purpose of determining the person's age as of the census reference date. Persons who were unable to give the exact date of birth were asked to give the best possible estimate. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976,* 1971,* 1966,** 1961** Reported for: Total population Question No.: Direct variable: Question 3 Responses: January 1, 1870 to June 3, 1991 Remarks: * In 1976 and 1971, the question on date of birth was answered in groups of months: January-May, June-December. ** In 1966 and 1961, respondents were asked to state their age in completed years as of their last birthday before the census date. In 1961, published data for single years of age were graduated (or smoothed) within each five-year age group to counteract the tendency towards "heaping" at certain specific ages. In 1971 (as in 1966) this was not done, and the published tables represent the date as reported. 2008 DISABILITY Refers to the limitation in the kind or amount of a person's activity because of a long-term physical condition, mental condition or health problem. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 18 and 19 Responses: Question 18: Limited at home only Limited at school or at work only Limited in other activities only Limited at home and at school or at work Limited at home and in other activities Limited at school or at work and in other activities Limited at home, at school or at work and in other activities Not limited at home, at school or at work or in other activities Question 19: No long-term disabilities or handicaps Some long-term disabilities or handicaps Remarks: There are two questions: Question 18 asks for an indication of the person being limited in activities at home, at school or at work or in other activities. Question 19 asks if the person has any long-term disabilities or handicaps. A long-term condition or health problem is one that has lasted or is expected to last six or more months from the time the condition or problem began. The instruction for these questions states that the answers should be provided by the adult to whom the information refers; the answer for persons less than 15 years of age should be provided by a parent or guardian. The disability question was added to the census for the first time in 1986 to provide a sample frame to enable the conduct of the postcensal Health and Activity Limitation Survey (HALS). In 1991, the same question was used. However, this time, the question was split and presented as two questions. The HALS addresses issues relating to the nature of the disabilities and their impact on such matters as employment, education, transportation, housing and leisure activities of persons with disabilities. Since HALS provides a better identification of the target population than the census alone, the primary source of data concerning disabilities for publications and other products will be the HALS database. However, tabulations of census data from census Questions 18 and 19 will be available on a special request basis. 2009 EMPLOYMENT EQUITY In 1986, employment equity legislation was implemented in order to achieve fairness and equity in the workplace by eliminating employment barriers and instituting special measures to open up opportunities for women, aboriginal peoples, persons with disabilities and visible minorities. The long-term objective of employment equity is the achievement of representative workforces, with the census providing the framework for obtaining comprehensive socio-economic data for women, aboriginal peoples and visible minorities. The 1986 Health and Activity Limitation Survey (HALS) provided information on persons with disabilities; a similar survey was conducted in 1991. Census Metropolitan Area (Employment Equity Designations) Employment equity legislation has designated eight census metropolitan areas (CMAs) as employment equity CMAs. These are: Calgary, Alberta Edmonton, Alberta Halifax, Nova Scotia Montr‚al, Quebec Regina, Saskatchewan Toronto, Ontario Vancouver, British Columbia Winnipeg, Manitoba The purpose of this designation is to target employment equity programs and activities in large urban areas which are likely to contain significant numbers of the designated groups. For a definition of Census Metropolitan Area (CMA), refer to the section on geography. Industrial Classification (Employment Equity Designations) Refers to the classification of businesses where persons work, according to the general nature of the work carried out, as indicated by the name of the employer and the kind of business, industry or service. This is a derived variable and does not reside on the census database. For employment equity purposes, the census information on industries is aggregated into 18 divisions, based on the 1980 version of the Standard Industrial Classification (SIC). These are: (1) Agricultural and related service industries; (2) Fishing and trapping industries; (3) Logging and forestry industries; (4) Mining (including milling), quarrying and oil well industries; (5) Manufacturing industries; (6) Construction industries; (7) Transportation and storage industries; (8) Communications and other utility industries; (9) Wholesale trade industries; (10) Retail trade industries; (11) Finance and insurance industries; (12) Real estate operator and insurance agent industries; (13) Business service industries; (14) Government service industries; (15) Educational service industries; (16) Health and social service industries; (17) Accommodation, food and beverage service industries; (18) Other service industries. See also Labour: Industry (Based on 1980 Standard Industrial Classification). Reference Period for Population Who Worked Refers to the reference period used for identifying the supply of designated group members in various industries and occupations. For women, aboriginal peoples and visible minorities, this reference period is the 17 months prior to enumeration; no output on persons with disabilities is generated from the census. Occupation (Employment Equity Designations) For employment equity purposes, occupation refers to the kind of work persons were doing during a pre-identified period prior to enumeration (see Reference Period for Population Who Worked). Occupations are structured into 12 principal occupational groups. These are: (1) Upper level managers; (2) Middle or other managers; (3) Professionals; (4) Semi-professionals and technicians; (5) Supervisors; (6) Foremen/women; (7) Clerical workers; (8) Sales workers; (9) Service workers; (10) Skilled crafts and trades workers; (11) Semi-skilled manual workers; (12) Other manual workers. These employment equity occupational categories were developed to correspond to the occupational structure within companies and to measure the representation and career paths of persons in the designated groups over time. They are different from those of both the Canadian Classification and Dictionary of Occupations (CCDO) and the Standard Occupational Classification (SOC). In the 1991 Census, occupation data will be coded according to a new classification structure: the 1990 National Occupational Classification (NOC). For employment equity purposes, under the NOC, occupations will be structured into approximately 15 principal groups. This is a derived variable and does not reside on the census database. See also Labour: Occupation (Based on 1980 Standard Occupational Classification) and Labour: Occupation (Based on 1990 National Occupational Classification). 2010 ETHNIC ORIGIN Refers to the ethnic or cultural group(s) to which the respondent's ancestors belong. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 15 Responses: For response categories (single origins) view Figures 3, 4 and 5 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figures 3, 4 and 5 on pages 27 to 30 for their original format. Refer to the text at the end of this definition for a comparison of 1991, 1986 and 1981 origins. Remarks: In 1991, the following instructions were provided to respondents: While most people of Canada view themselves as Canadian, information about their ancestral origins has been collected since the 1901 Census to reflect the changing composition of the Canadian population and is needed to ensure that everyone, regardless of his/her ethnic or cultural background, has equal opportunity to share fully in the economic, social, cultural and political life of Canada. Therefore, this question refers to the origins of this person's ancestors. Ethnic or cultural origin refers to the ethnic "roots" or ancestral background of the population, and should not be confused with citizenship or nationality. Canadians have many ethnic or cultural origins -- such as Inuit, North American Indian, M‚tis, Irish, Scottish, French, Ukrainian, Chinese, Japanese and East Indian (from India). When determining cultural origin, report the specific ethnic group to which ancestors belonged rather than the language they spoke. For example, report Haitian rather than French, or Austrian rather than German. For persons of South Asian origin, do not report Indian. Please specify Indian from India, Indian from Fiji, Indian from Guyana, etc., or indicate the group such as Punjabi, Tamil, Pakistani. The 1991 question was changed slightly from that asked in the 1986 Census. In 1991, respondents were asked "To which ethnic or cultural group(s) did this person's ancestors belong?" The 1986 Census question asked "To which ethnic or cultural group(s) do you or did your ancestors belong?" The mark-in box/circle for "Black" was added to the 1986 and included in the 1991 questionnaires. In previous censuses respondents wrote "Black" in the space provided. Also in 1991, the ordering of the mark-ins was altered to more accurately reflect the changing relative size of Canada's ethnic population. In 1986 and 1991, respondents with aboriginal origins were to indicate that they were either North American Indian, M‚tis or Inuit/Eskimo. In 1981, respondents with aboriginal origins were to indicate the origins of status or registered Indian, non- status Indian, M‚tis or Inuit. Other aboriginal origins, such as tribal and band origins, were captured as Amerindian, n.o.s., n.e.s. (not otherwise specified, not elsewhere specified) in 1981. It should be noted that, prior to the 1981 Census, only the respondent's paternal ancestry was to be reported. If multiple ethnic origins were reported, only one origin was captured, resulting in one ethnic origin per respondent. In 1981, this restriction was removed, allowing for multiple ethnic origins. One write-in was provided on the 1981 questionnaire, in addition to the mark-in boxes. The 1986 Census questionnaire allowed respondents to write in up to three ethnic origins not included in the mark-in boxes. In 1991, respondents could write in up to two ethnic origins not included in the mark-in circles. It should be noted that the ethnic categories of Balkan, Baltic, Indo-Chinese and Scandinavian contain the same ethnic groups in 1981, 1986 and 1991 to allow for comparability. In 1991, the groups captured for Latin, Central and South American, West Asian and Arab origins were expanded. Not all available multiple ethnic origins will be published. The unpublished data will be available upon special request, subject to confidentiality and data quality constraints. ----------------------- Figure 3. British, French and European Origins (Single Origins) ----------------------------------------------------- British origins (1) English Irish Scottish Welsh Other British, n.i.e. French origins Acadian Franco-Manitoban Franco-Ontarian French French Canadian Qu‚b‚cois Western European origins Austrian Belgian Dutch (Netherlands) Flemish German Luxembourg Swiss Northern European origins (2) Finnish Scandinavian origins Eastern European origins (2) Baltic origins Byelorussian Czech and Slovak Hungarian (Magyar) Polish Romanian Russian Ukrainian Southern European origins (2) Balkan origins Cypriot Greek Italian Maltese Portuguese Spanish Other European origins Basque Gypsy Jewish Other European, n.i.e. ____________________ n.i.e. - not included elsewhere (1) It should be noted that the British Only multiple responses included in the 1981 British single origins were in 1986 and are in 1991 listed as a multiple ethnic response. (2) For a more detailed breakdown of this category, refer to Figures 3A, 3B and 3C. ------------------------------------- Figure 3A. Northern European Origins (Single Origins) ------------------------------------------ Northern European Origins Finnish Scandinavian Danish Icelandic Laplander Norwegian Swedish Scandinavian, n.i.e. ------------------------------ Figure 3B. Southern European Origins (Single Origins) ------------------------------------------ Southern European Origins Balkans Albanian Bulgar Croatian Macedonian Serbian Slovenian Yugoslav, n.i.e. Cypriot Greek Italian Maltese Portuguese Spanish ---------------------------------- Figure 3C. Eastern European Origins (Single Origins) ----------------------------------------- Eastern European Origins Baltic origins Estonian Latvian Lithuanian Byelorussian Czech and Slovak Czech Czechoslovakian Slovak Hungarian (Magyar) Polish Romanian Russian Ukrainian ____________________ n.i.e. = not included elsewhere -------------------------------------- Figure 4. Asian, African and Pacific Islands Origins (Single Origins) -------------------------------------------------- Asian, African and Pacific Islands Origins (Single Origins) West Asian Origins Afghan Armenian Iranian Israeli Kurdish Turk West Asian, n.i.e. Arab origins Egyptian Iraqi Lebanese Maghrebian Palestinian Syrian Arab, n.i.e. African origins Other African, n.i.e. Pacific Islands origins Fijian Polynesian Other Pacific Islanders South Asian origins Punjabi Singhalese Tamil Bangladeshi, n.i.e. East Indian, n.i.e. Pakistani, n.i.e. Sri Lankan, n.i.e. East/South East Asian origins (1) Chinese Filipino Indo-Chinese origins Indonesian Japanese Korean Malay Mongolian Tibetan Other Asian, n.i.e. ____________________ n.i.e. = not included elsewhere (1) For more details, see Figure 4A. ______________________________________________ Figure 4A. Indo-Chinese Origins (Single Origins) Indo-Chinese Origins Burmese Cambodian Laotian Thai Vietnamese ------------------------------------------------------------ Figure 5. South and North American, Black and Other Origins (Single Origins) -------------------------------------------------- South and North American, Black and Other Origins (Single Origins) Latin, Central and South American origins Argentinian Brazilian Chilean Colombian Ecuadorian Guatemalan Hispanic Mexican Nicaraguan Peruvian Salvadorean Other Latin/Central/South American origins Caribbean origins Barbadian Cuban Haitian Jamaican Puerto Rican Other Caribbean, n.i.e. Other West Indian, n.i.e. Aboriginal origins Inuit M‚tis North American Indian Black origins African Black Black Other origins American Australian/New Zealander Canadian Other ------------------------------- Comparison of Ethnic Origins collected in 1991, 1986 and 1981 ------------------------------------------------------------- 1991 Classification 1986 Classification 1981 Classification Self-coded Answers* French French French English English English German German German Scottish Scottish Scottish Italian Italian Italian Irish Irish Irish Ukrainian Ukrainian Ukrainian Chinese Chinese Chinese Dutch (Netherlands) Dutch (Netherlands) Dutch (Netherlands) Jewish Jewish Jewish Polish Polish Polish Black Black Office-coded entry North American North American Status Indian, Indian Indian Non-status Indian M‚tis M‚tis M‚tis Inuit/Eskimo(1) Inuit Inuit Office-coded Answers(2) Other British, British, n.i.e., British, n.o.s., n.i.e. Other British British, n.e.s. Welsh Welsh Welsh Acadian Acadian Qu‚b‚cois, Acadian, Franco-Ontarian, etc. Franco-Manitoban Franco-Manitoban(3) Qu‚b‚cois, Acadian, Franco-Ontarian, etc. Franco-Ontarian Franco-Ontarian(3) Qu‚b‚cois, Acadian, Franco-Ontarian, etc. French Canadian French Canadian Qu‚b‚cois, Acadian, Franco-Ontarian, etc. Qu‚b‚cois Qu‚b‚cois Qu‚b‚cois, Acadian, Franco-Ontarian, etc. Austrian Austrian Austrian Belgian Belgian Belgian Flemish Belgian Belgian Luxembourg Luxembourg Luxembourg Swiss Swiss Swiss Danish Danish Danish Finnish Finnish Finnish Icelandic Icelandic Icelander Laplander Other European, Other European, n.i.e. n.e.s. Norwegian Norwegian Norwegian Swedish Swedish Swedish Scandinavian, Scandinavian, Scandinavian, n.i.e. n.i.e. n.o.s., n.e.s. Byelorussian Byelorussian Byelorussian Czech Czech Czech Czechoslovakian Czechoslovakian Czechoslovakian Estonian Estonian Estonian Hungarian (Magyar) Hungarian (Magyar) Magyar (Hungarian) Latvian Latvian Lettish (Latvian) Lithuanian Lithuanian Lithuanian Romanian Romanian Romanian Russian Russian Russian Slovak Slovak Slovak Albanian Albanian Albanian Bulgar Bulgar Bulgarian Croatian Croatian Croatian Cypriot Greek Cypriot,(4) Greek Turkish Cypriot,(4) Turk Cypriot Greek Greek Greek Greek Macedonian Macedonian Macedonian Maltese Maltese Maltese Portuguese Portuguese Portuguese Serbian Serbian Serbian Slovenian Slovenian Slovene Spanish Spanish Spanish Yugoslav, n.i.e. Yugoslav, n.i.e. Yugoslav, n.o.s. Basque Other European, Other European, n.i.e. n.e.s. Gypsy Other European, Other European, n.i.e. n.e.s. Other European, Other European, Other Balkan, n.e.s., n.i.e. n.i.e. Other European, n.e.s. Afghan Other Asian, n.i.e. Other Pakistani- Bangladeshi, n.e.s. Armenian Armenian Armenian Iranian Iranian Iranian Israeli Israeli Israeli Kurdish Arab, n.i.e. Asian Arab, n.e.s. Turk Turk Turk West Asian, n.i.e. Not included Not included Egyptian Egyptian Egyptian Iraqi Arab, n.i.e. Asian Arab, n.e.s. Lebanese Lebanese Lebanese Maghrebian Arab, n.i.e. North African Arab, n.e.s. Palestinian Palestinian Palestinian Syrian Syrian Syrian Arab, n.i.e. Arab, n.i.e. Asian Arab, n.e.s., North African Arab, n.i.e. Punjabi Punjabi Punjabi Singhalese Singhalese Singhalese Tamil Tamil Tamil Bangladeshi, n.i.e. Bangladeshi, n.i.e. Bangladeshi, n.o.s. East Indian, n.i.e. East Indian, n.i.e. Indian, n.o.s., n.e.s. Pakistani, n.i.e. Pakistani, n.i.e. Pakistani, n.o.s. Sri Lankan, n.i.e. Sri Lankan, n.i.e. Sri Lankan (Ceylonese), n.o.s. Burmese Burmese Burmese Cambodian Cambodian Cambodian Filipino Filipino Philippino Indonesian Indonesian Indonesian Japanese Japanese Japanese Korean Korean Korean Laotian Laotian Laotian Malay Malay Malay Mongolian Chinese Chinese Tibetan Chinese Chinese Thai Thai Thai Vietnamese Vietnamese Vietnamese Other Asian, n.i.e. Other Asian, n.i.e. Other Pakistani- Bangladeshi,Other Far East Asian, n.e.s. Fijian Fijian Fijian Polynesian Polynesian Polynesian Other Pacific Other Pacific Other Pacific Islanders Islanders Islanders, n.e.s. Argentinian Argentinian Argentinian Brazilian Brazilian Brazilian Chilean Chilean Chilean Colombian Other Latin/ Other Latino-American Central/South American Origins Ecuadorian Ecuadorian Ecuadorian Guatemalan Other Latin/ Other Latino-American Central/South American Origins Hispanic Other Latin/ Other Latino-American Central/South American Origins Mexican Mexican Mexican Nicaraguan Other Latin/ Other Latino-American Central/South American Origins Peruvian Peruvian Peruvian Salvadorean Other Latin/ Other Latino-American Central/South American Origins Other Latin/ Other Latin/ Other Latino-American Central/South Central/South American Origins American Origins Barbadian Other West Indian Caribbean Cuban Cuban Cuban Haitian Haitian Haitian Jamaican Jamaican Caribbean Puerto Rican Puerto Rican Caribbean Other Caribbean, Other Caribbean, Caribbean n.i.e. n.i.e. Other West Indian, Other West Indian Caribbean n.i.e. West Indian West Indian Black, n.e.s. Black(5) Black(5) Black American(5) Black American(5) Black, n.e.s. Canadian Black(5) Canadian Black(5) Canadian Black Other Black(5) Other Black(5) Black, n.e.s. African Black African Black African Black Other African, Other African, Other African, n.e.s. n.i.e. n.i.e. Other Aboriginal(5) Other Aboriginal(5) Amerindian, n.o.s., n.e.s. American American American Australian/ Australian/ Other Commonwealth New Zealander New Zealander Canadian Canadian Canadian Other, n.i.e. Other, n.i.e. Other, n.e.s. * Self-coded answers are listed in the order of appearance on the 1991 Census questionnaire. In 1981, multiple responses were permitted for the first time. One write-in space was provided in addition to mark boxes. If more than one ethnic origin was written in the space provided, only the first write-in was coded. The 1986 Census questionnaire allowed respondents to write in up to three ethnic origins not included in the mark boxes. This increased the number of multiple response possibilities. If more than three ethnic origins were written in the spaces provided, then only the first three were coded. The 1991 Census questionnaire allows respondents to write in up to two ethnic origins not included in the mark boxes. If more than the two ethnic origins were written in the spaces provided, only the first two were coded. Note: n.i.e. = not included elsewhere n.e.s. = not elsewhere specified n.o.s. = not otherwise specified Footnotes (1) Eskimo was added to the 1991 Census questionnaire in order to avoid response errors. The category of Inuit/Eskimo was shown as "Inuit" in the 1991 published output. (2) In 1981 and 1986, the coding of the ethnic origin answers was a manual operation. This operation was an automated one in 1991. (3) As a result of coding errors, Franco-Manitoban and Franco- Ontarian origins are not shown in 1986 published output. (4) As a result of low response counts, Greek Cypriot and Turkish Cypriot are not shown in 1986 published output. Greek Cypriot was made a multiple response of Greek and Cypriot. Turkish Cypriot was made a multiple response of Turk and Cypriot. In 1991, Greek Cypriot and Turkish Cypriot were coded again as multiple responses. (5) These answers are standardized on the final database in 1986 and 1991: - Other Aboriginal is combined with the North American Indian self-coded answer. - Other Black is combined with the Black self-coded answer. - West Indian Black is made a multiple response of Other West Indian, n.i.e. and the Black self-coded answer. - Black American is made a multiple response of American and the Black self-coded answer. - Canadian Black is made a multiple response of Canadian and the Black self-coded answer. 2011 FARM OPERATORS Refers to those persons responsible for the day-to-day decisions made in the agricultural operation of the holding. Censuses: 1991, 1986,* 1981,* 1976,* 1971,* 1966,* 1961* Reported for: Total population Questions Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 1, 4 and 7 of Form 6, Agriculture Questionnaire. For further information, refer to the Appendix K in the publication 92-301E. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: * Prior to the 1991 Census, the farm operator referred to the person who was responsible for the day-to-day decisions made in the operation of an agricultural holding. As only one operator was listed for each census farm, the number of operators was the same as the number of census farms. Note: A census farm refers to a farm, ranch or other agricultural holding which produces at least one of the following products intended for sale: crops, livestock, poultry, animal products, greenhouse or nursery products, mushrooms, sod, honey and maple syrup products. 2012 FERTILITY Refers to the number of children ever born alive to women aged 15 years and over. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Female population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 23 Responses: None or number of children Remarks: Respondents were instructed to include children who died after birth as well as those residing elsewhere at census time and to exclude adopted children and stepchildren. Stillbirths were not to be included. In 1991, for the first time, this question is asked of all females (including never married) 15 years of age and over. In previous censuses, the question was asked of only ever-married women 15 years of age and over. 2013 IMMIGRATION: AGE AT IMMIGRATION Refers to the age at which the respondent first obtained landed immigrant status. A landed immigrant is a person who is not a Canadian citizen by birth, but who has been granted the right to live in Canada permanently by Canadian immigration authorities. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population who are, or have been, landed immigrants, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 3 and 14 Responses: Single ages from 0-121 Remarks: This is a derived variable based on (i) date of birth, a direct variable collected on a 100% basis, (ii) year of immigration, a direct variable collected on a 1/5 sample basis, and (iii) an estimated month of immigration. Respondents who answered "Yes" to Question 13 (Landed Immigrant Status) were to answer Question 14 (Year of Immigration) by reporting the year in which they first obtained landed immigrant status. Persons who have immigrated to Canada more than once were to report the year in which they first received landed immigrant status. Persons who answered "No" to Question 13 will not have gone through the immigration process, and thus, do not have a year of immigration or an age at immigration. These persons include Canadian citizens by birth, student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders. The 1981, 1986 and 1991 year of immigration questions address a slightly more restricted population (persons not Canadian citizens by birth in 1981 and 1986, and landed immigrants in 1991) as compared with the 1971 question (all persons born outside Canada). Figure 6A illustrates the conceptual differences between these populations. Due to processing restrictions, earlier censuses had only pre-defined periods of immigration which made it impossible to calculate age at immigration. View Figure 6A below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 6A on page 34 for its original format. ------------------------------------------ Figure 6A. Permanent and Non-permanent Residents: Place of Birth Total Population (excluding institutional residents) Permanent residents Non-immigrant population (4) Non-immigrant population born in Canada (2) Non-immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Immigrant population (5) Immigrant population born in Canada (2) Immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Non-permanent residents (1) Non-permanent residents born in Canada (2) Non-permanent residents born outside Canada (3) ____________________ (1) Persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants or Minister's permit holders (2) Canadian-born population (3) Foreign-born population (4) Persons who are Canadian citizens by birth (5) Persons who are, or have been, landed immigrants 2014 IMMIGRATION: IMMIGRANT POPULATION Refers to persons who are, or have been, landed immigrants in Canada. A landed immigrant is a person who is not a Canadian citizen by birth, but who has been granted the right to live in Canada permanently by Canadian immigration authorities. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 13 Responses: Respondents were asked to mark either "No" or "Yes". Remarks: The derivation of the immigrant population was changed in 1991 compared with the 1981 and 1986 Censuses. In the 1981 and 1986 Censuses, the immigrant population was defined as those persons who were not Canadian citizens by birth. In the 1991 Census, a direct question was used to identify the immigrant population as the census universe was expanded to include refugee claimants and holders of employment and student authorizations and Minister's permits. The immigrant population includes those persons who answered "Yes" to Question 13 (Landed Immigrant Status) in 1991. Respondents who are Canadian citizens by birth, holders of student or employment authorizations, refugee claimants or Minister's permit holders were to mark "No" to this question. For further information on the immigrant population, view Figure 6A below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figures 6A and 6B on pages 34 and 35 in their original format. ------------------------------------------ Figure 6A. Permanent and Non-permanent Residents: Place of Birth Total Population (excluding institutional residents) Permanent residents Non-immigrant population (4) Non-immigrant population born in Canada (2) Non-immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Immigrant population (5) Immigrant population born in Canada (2) Immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Non-permanent residents (1) Non-permanent residents born in Canada (2) Non-permanent residents born outside Canada (3) ____________________ (1) Persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants or Minister's permit holders (2) Canadian-born population (3) Foreign-born population (4) Persons who are Canadian citizens by birth (5) Persons who are, or have been, landed immigrants 2015 IMMIGRATION: LANDED IMMIGRANT STATUS Refers to persons who are not Canadian citizens by birth, but who have been granted the right to live in Canada permanently by Canadian immigration authorities. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 13 Responses: Respondents were asked to mark either "No" or "Yes". Remarks: Respondents who are Canadian citizens by birth, refugee claimants and holders of student authorizations, employment authorizations and Minister's permits were to mark "No". Respondents who at the time of the census were or had ever been landed immigrants to Canada were to mark "Yes" to Question 13 (Landed Immigrant Status). Landed immigrants who have resided in Canada for at least three years have the right to become Canadian citizens by naturalization. The landed immigrant status question permits census data users to identify the non-immigrant population (Canadian citizens by birth), the immigrant population (landed immigrants) and non-permanent residents (refugee claimants and holders of student authorizations, employment authorizations and Minister's permits). For more information on these populations, view Figure 6A below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figures 6A and 6B on pages 34 and 35 for their original format. ------------------------------------------ Figure 6A. Permanent and Non-permanent Residents: Place of Birth Total Population (excluding institutional residents) Permanent residents Non-immigrant population (4) Non-immigrant population born in Canada (2) Non-immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Immigrant population (5) Immigrant population born in Canada (2) Immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Non-permanent residents (1) Non-permanent residents born in Canada (2) Non-permanent residents born outside Canada (3) ____________________ (1) Persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants or Minister's permit holders (2) Canadian-born population (3) Foreign-born population (4) Persons who are Canadian citizens by birth (5) Persons who are, or have been, landed immigrants 2016 IMMIGRATION: NON-IMMIGRANT POPULATION Refers to persons who are Canadian citizens by birth. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable: Question 12 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: View Figure 6A below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figures 6A and 6B on pages 34 and 35 for their original format. ------------------------------------------ Figure 6A. Permanent and Non-permanent Residents: Place of Birth Total Population (excluding institutional residents) Permanent residents Non-immigrant population (4) Non-immigrant population born in Canada (2) Non-immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Immigrant population (5) Immigrant population born in Canada (2) Immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Non-permanent residents (1) Non-permanent residents born in Canada (2) Non-permanent residents born outside Canada (3) ____________________ (1) Persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants or Minister's permit holders (2) Canadian-born population (3) Foreign-born population (4) Persons who are Canadian citizens by birth (5) Persons who are, or have been, landed immigrants 2017 IMMIGRATION: NON-PERMANENT RESIDENT Refers to persons who hold a student authorization, employment authorization, Minister's permit or who are refugee claimants. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 12 and 13 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: This is a new population group for the 1991 Census. Previous censuses excluded persons holding authorizations, visas and permits, as well as refugee claimants, except in the 1941 Census when persons who did not plan to live permanently in Canada were included. In 1991, this is a derived population based on (i) citizenship, a direct variable collected on a 1/5 sample and (ii) landed immigrant status, a direct variable collected on a 1/5 sample. Non-permanent residents are identified as persons who are not Canadian citizens by birth and who answered "No" to the landed immigrant status question. Estimates of the non-permanent residents are only available for the non-institutional population. View Figure 6A below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figures 6A and 6B on pages 34 and 35 for their original format. ------------------------------------------ Figure 6A. Permanent and Non-permanent Residents: Place of Birth Total Population (excluding institutional residents) Permanent residents Non-immigrant population (4) Non-immigrant population born in Canada (2) Non-immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Immigrant population (5) Immigrant population born in Canada (2) Immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Non-permanent residents (1) Non-permanent residents born in Canada (2) Non-permanent residents born outside Canada (3) ____________________ (1) Persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants or Minister's permit holders (2) Canadian-born population (3) Foreign-born population (4) Persons who are Canadian citizens by birth (5) Persons who are, or have been, landed immigrants 2018 IMMIGRATION: PERIOD OF IMMIGRATION Refers to groupings of years derived from the year of immigration question. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 Reported for: Population who are, or have been, landed immigrants, excluding institutional residents. A landed immigrant is a person who is not a Canadian citizen by birth, but who has been granted the right to live in Canada permanently by Canadian immigration authorities. Question No.: Derived variable: Question 14 Responses: Groupings of years as desired for the years 1870 to 1991 Remarks: This is a derived variable based on year of immigration. Respondents who answered "Yes" to Question 13 (Landed Immigrant Status) were to answer Question 14 (Year of Immigration) by reporting the year in which they first obtained landed immigrant status in Canada. Persons who immigrated to Canada more than once were to report the year in which they first received landed immigrant status. Persons who answered "No" to Question 13 will not have gone through the immigration process, and thus, do not have a year of immigration. These persons include Canadian citizens by birth, student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders. The 1981, 1986 and 1991 year of immigration questions address a slightly more restricted population (persons not Canadian citizens by birth in 1981 and 1986, and landed immigrants in 1991) as compared with the 1971 question (all persons born outside Canada). The conceptual differences between these populations are illustrated in figure 6A at the end of this definition. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, figure 6A on pages 34 for its original format. ------------------------------------------ Figure 6A. Permanent and Non-permanent Residents: Place of Birth Total Population (excluding institutional residents) Permanent residents Non-immigrant population (4) Non-immigrant population born in Canada (2) Non-immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Immigrant population (5) Immigrant population born in Canada (2) Immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Non-permanent residents (1) Non-permanent residents born in Canada (2) Non-permanent residents born outside Canada (3) ____________________ (1) Persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants or Minister's permit holders (2) Canadian-born population (3) Foreign-born population (4) Persons who are Canadian citizens by birth (5) Persons who are, or have been, landed immigrants 2019 IMMIGRATION: YEAR OF IMMIGRATION Refers to the year landed immigrant status was first obtained in Canada. A landed immigrant is a person who is not a Canadian citizen by birth, but who has been granted the right to live in Canada permanently by Canadian immigration authorities. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population who are, or have been, landed immigrants, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 14 Responses: Single years from 1870 to 1991. Includes only the first five months of 1991. Remarks: Respondents who answered "Yes" to Question 13 (Landed Immigrant Status) were to answer Question 14 (Year of Immigration) by reporting the year in which they first obtained landed immigrant status in Canada. Persons who immigrated to Canada more than once were to report the year in which they first received landed immigrant status. Persons who answered "No" to Question 13 will not have gone through the immigration process, and thus, do not have a year of immigration. These persons include Canadian citizens by birth, student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders. The 1981, 1986 and 1991 questions address a slightly more restricted population (persons not Canadian citizens by birth in 1981 and 1986, and landed immigrants in 1991) as compared with the 1971 question (all persons born outside Canada). The conceptual differences between these populations are illustrated in figure 6A at the end of this definition. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, figure 6A on page 34 for its original format. Due to processing restrictions, earlier censuses had only pre-defined periods of immigration. ------------------------------------------ Figure 6A. Permanent and Non-permanent Residents: Place of Birth Total Population (excluding institutional residents) Permanent residents Non-immigrant population (4) Non-immigrant population born in Canada (2) Non-immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Immigrant population (5) Immigrant population born in Canada (2) Immigrant population born outside Canada (3) Non-permanent residents (1) Non-permanent residents born in Canada (2) Non-permanent residents born outside Canada (3) ____________________ (1) Persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants or Minister's permit holders (2) Canadian-born population (3) Foreign-born population (4) Persons who are Canadian citizens by birth (5) Persons who are, or have been, landed immigrants 2020 INCOME: AVERAGE INCOME OF INDIVIDUALS Average income of individuals refers to the weighted mean total income of individuals 15 years of age and over who reported income for 1990. Average income is calculated from unrounded data by dividing the aggregate income of a specified group of individuals (e.g., males, 45-54 years of age) by the number of individuals with income in that group. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over with income, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: This statistic is not resident on the database. It is calculated for any group as follows: - The sum of (Yi times Wi) Y = ------------------------ , where The sum of Wi - Y = Average income of the individuals 15 years of age and over with income in the group Yi = Actual income of each individual 15 years of age and over in the group Wi = Weight of each individual 15 years of age and over with income in the group Average and median incomes and standard errors for average income of individuals will be calculated for those individuals who are at least 15 years of age and who have an income (positive or negative). For all other universes, these statistics will be calculated over all units whether or not they reported any income. 2021 INCOME: BENEFITS FROM CANADA OR QUEBEC PENSION PLAN Refers to benefits received in calendar year 1990 from the Canada or Quebec Pension Plan, e.g., retirement pensions, survivors' benefits and disability pensions. Does not include lump-sum death benefits. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(e) Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: In 1981 and 1971, this source was combined with the Old Age Security (OAS) pension and Guaranteed Income Supplement (GIS). In 1991 and 1986, information on OAS and GIS was collected in a separate question. See Income: Old Age Security Pension and Guaranteed Income Supplement. Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2022 INCOME: BENEFITS FROM UNEMPLOYMENT INSURANCE Refers to total Unemployment Insurance benefits received in calendar year 1990, before income tax deductions. It includes benefits for sickness, maternity, fishing, work sharing, retraining and retirement received under the Federal Unemployment Insurance Program. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(f) Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: The 1971 and 1961 Censuses included Unemployment Insurance benefits as a component of "Other Government Income". Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2023 INCOME: COMPOSITION OF INCOME The composition of the total income of a population group or a geographic area refers to the relative share of each income source or group of sources, expressed as a percentage of the aggregate income of that group or area. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over with income, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: See "Remarks". Remarks: The components of total income and the combinations for which percentages may be published are shown at the end of this definition. View Figure 7 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 7 on page 41 for its original format. Published percentages are derived from aggregate data prior to rounding. ________________________________________________________ Figure 7. Components of Income ____________________ Total Income Employment income Wages and salaries Net income from unincorporated non-farm business and/or professional practice Net farm self-employment income Government transfer payments Old Age Security pension and Guaranteed Income Supplement Canada Pension Plan and Quebec Pension Plan benefits Unemployment Insurance benefits Family Allowances Federal Child Tax Credits Other income from government sources Investment income Dividends, interest and other investment income Other income Retirement pensions, superannuation and annuities Other money income 2024 INCOME: CONSTANT DOLLARS INCOME Refers to the presentation of income statistics from two or more censuses in terms of the value of the dollar in one of those censuses. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over with income, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: To convert the 1985 incomes into 1990 dollars, the 1985 values were revised upwards by the change in the consumer price index between 1985 and 1990. 2025 INCOME: DIVIDENDS AND INTEREST ON BONDS, DEPOSITS AND SAVINGS CERTIFICATES, AND OTHER INVESTMENT INCOME Refers to interest received in calendar year 1990 from deposits in banks, trust companies, co-operatives, credit unions, caisses populaires, etc., as well as interest on savings certificates, bonds and debentures and all dividends from both Canadian and foreign stocks. Also included is other investment income from either Canadian or foreign sources such as net rents from real estate, mortgage and loan interest received, regular income from an estate or trust fund, and interest from insurance policies. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(h) Responses: Positive or negative dollar value or nil Remarks: In 1971 and 1961, separate information was collected on (i) interest and dividends and (ii) other investment income. Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2026 INCOME: EMPLOYMENT INCOME Refers to total income received by persons 15 years of age and over during 1990 as wages and salaries, net income from unincorporated non-farm business and/or professional practice and net farm self-employment income. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 45(a), (b) and (c) Responses: Positive or negative dollar value or nil Remarks: See "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. Also see the detailed definitions for each of the components. 2027 INCOME: FAMILY ALLOWANCES Refers to total allowances paid in calendar year 1990 by the federal and provincial governments in respect of dependent children under 18 years of age. For Quebec residents, "Allowance for children less than 6 years of age" and "Allowance for newborn children" are included. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: No information was collected from the respondents on family allowances. Instead, these were calculated in the course of processing and assigned, where applicable, to one of the parents in the census family on the basis of information on children in the family and the rates prevailing in the various provinces in 1990. Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2028 INCOME: FEDERAL CHILD TAX CREDITS Refers to federal Child Tax Credits paid in calendar year 1990 by the federal government in respect of dependent children under 18 years of age. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: No information was collected from the respondents on Child Tax Credits. Instead, these were calculated in the course of processing and assigned, where applicable, to one of the parents in the census family on the basis of information on children in the family and the family income. Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2029 INCOME: GOVERNMENT TRANSFER PAYMENTS Refers to total income from all transfer payments received from federal, provincial or municipal governments in calendar year 1990. This variable is derived by summing the amounts in: the Old Age Security pension and Guaranteed Income Supplement benefits from Canada or Quebec Pension Plan benefits from Unemployment Insurance Family Allowances federal Child Tax Credits other income from government sources. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: See the detailed definitions and "Remarks" for each of the components. This variable can be derived for any of the above census years by summing the various government transfer payments. 2030 INCOME: MAJOR SOURCE OF INCOME Refers to that component which constitutes the largest proportion of an income recipient's total income. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable Responses: See "Remarks". Remarks: Various combinations of income sources can be used to derive this classification. For example, at the most detailed published level, the income sources were combined into five components: wages and salaries, self-employment (non-farm and farm), government transfer payments, investment income and other income. The absolute values for these components can then be compared and the component with the largest absolute value is designated as the major source of income. This variable is not resident on the database. It is specifically calculated for use in income publications. 2031 INCOME: MEDIAN INCOME OF INDIVIDUALS The median income of a specified group of income recipients is that amount which divides their income size distribution into two halves, i.e. the incomes of the first half of individuals are below the median, while those of the second half are above the median. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over with income, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: (1) This statistic is not resident on the database. For an income size distribution, the median is usually estimated as follows: M = Lm + cm (d/fm) , where M = Median value, Lm = Lower boundary of the income group in which one half of the total weighted count of income recipients falls, cm = Size (range) of the median income group, d = Number of income recipients necessary from the median income group to reach the middle, i.e. one half of all income recipients less the cumulative number of recipients up to the median income group, fm = Number of income recipients in the median income group. (2) The procedure to calculate medians from census data is under review and the final method may vary from that used in the previous censuses. (3) Average and median incomes and standard errors for average income of individuals will be calculated for those individuals who are at least 15 years of age and who have an income (positive or negative). For all other universes, these statistics will be calculated over all units whether or not they reported any income. 2032 INCOME: NET FARM SELF-EMPLOYMENT INCOME Refers to net income (gross receipts from farm sales minus depreciation and cost of operation) received during calendar year 1990 from the operation of a farm, either on own account or in partnership. In the case of partnerships, only the respondent's share of income was to be reported. Also included are advance, supplementary or assistance payments to farmers by federal or provincial governments. However, the value of income "in kind", such as agricultural products produced and consumed on the farm, is excluded. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(c) Responses: Positive or negative dollar value or nil Remarks: See "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2033 INCOME: NET INCOME FROM UNINCORPORATED NON-FARM BUSINESS AND/OR PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE Refers to net income (gross receipts minus expenses of operation such as wages, rents and depreciation) received during calendar year 1990 from the respondent's non-farm unincorporated business or professional practice. In the case of a partnership, only the respondent's share was to be reported. Also included is net income from persons baby-sitting in their own homes, operators of direct distributorships such as those selling and delivering cosmetics, as well as from free-lance activities of artists, writers, music teachers, hairdressers, dressmakers, etc. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(b) Responses: Positive or negative dollar value or nil Remarks: In 1986 and prior censuses, this variable was called "Income: Net Non-farm Self-employment Income". Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2034 INCOME: OLD AGE SECURITY PENSION AND GUARANTEED INCOME SUPPLEMENT Refers to Old Age Security pensions and Guaranteed Income Supplements paid to persons 65 years of age and over, and Spouses' Allowances paid to 60- to 64-year-old spouses of Old Age Security recipients by the federal government only during the calendar year 1990. Also included are Extended Spouses' Allowances paid to 60- to 64-year-old widows/widowers . Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(d) Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: In 1971 and 1981, this source was combined with "Benefits from Canada/Quebec Pension Plan". For 1986 and 1991, information on these benefits was collected in a separate question. See Income: Benefits from Canada or Quebec Pension Plan. In 1961, neither the Canada/Quebec Pension Plan nor the Guaranteed Income Supplement existed. The relevant source was "Old Age Pensions and Old Age Assistance". Provincial income supplements are included in Income: Other Income from Government Sources. Retirement pensions to civil servants, RCMP and military personnel are included in Income: Retirement Pensions, Superannuation and Annuities. Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2035 INCOME: OTHER INCOME FROM GOVERNMENT SOURCES Refers to all transfer payments, excluding those covered as a separate income source (Family Allowances, federal Child Tax Credits, Old Age Security pensions and Guaranteed Income Supplements, Canada or Quebec Pension Plan benefits and Unemployment Insurance benefits) received from federal, provincial or municipal programs in calendar year 1990. This source includes social assistance payments received by persons in need, such as mothers with dependent children, persons temporarily or permanently unable to work, elderly individuals, the blind and the disabled. Included are provincial income supplement payments to seniors to supplement the Old Age Security pension and Guaranteed Income Supplement and provincial payments to seniors to help offset accommodation costs. Also included are other transfer payments such as benefits under the Canadian Jobs Strategy, veterans' pensions, war veterans' allowance, pensions to widows and dependants of veterans and workers' compensation. Additionally, any amounts received in 1990 for refundable Provincial Tax Credits, Federal Sales Tax Credits and the federal Goods and Services Tax Credits are included. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(g) Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: The 1961 and 1971 Censuses included Unemployment Insurance benefits as a component of this source, while for 1981, 1986 and 1991, information on these benefits was collected in a separate question. In 1981, 1986 and 1991, provincial income supplements to the elderly were included in this item, while for the earlier censuses, provincial old age assistance was included with "Government Old Age Pensions". Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2036 INCOME: OTHER MONEY INCOME Refers to regular cash income received during calendar year 1990 and not reported in any of the other nine sources listed on the questionnaire, e.g., alimony, child support, periodic support from other persons not in the household, net income from roomers and boarders, income from abroad (except dividends and interest), non-refundable scholarships and bursaries, severance pay, royalties and strike pay. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(j) Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: In 1981, this variable was combined with "Retirement Pensions, Superannuation and Annuities". For 1986 and 1991, information on these pensions was included under Income: Retirement Pensions, Superannuation and Annuities. Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2037 INCOME: RETIREMENT PENSIONS, SUPERANNUATION AND ANNUITIES Refers to all regular income received during calendar year 1990 as the result of having been a member of a pension plan of one or more employers. It includes payments received from all annuities, including payments from a matured Registered Retirement Savings Plan (RRSP) in the form of a life annuity, a fixed term annuity, a registered retirement income fund or an income-averaging annuity contract; pensions paid to widows or other relatives of deceased pensioners; pensions of retired civil servants, Armed Forces personnel and Royal Canadian Mounted Police (RCMP) officers; annuity payments received from the Canadian Government Annuities Fund, an insurance company, etc. Does not include lump-sum death benefits, lump-sum benefits or withdrawals from a pension plan or RRSP or refunds of overcontributions. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(i) Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: In 1981, this variable was combined with "Other Money Income". Also see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2038 INCOME: STANDARD ERROR OF AVERAGE INCOME Refers to the estimated standard error of average income for an income size distribution. It serves as a rough indicator of the precision of the corresponding estimate of average income, if interpreted as shown below. For about 68% of the samples which could be selected from the sample frame, the difference between the sample estimate of average income and the corresponding figure based on complete enumeration would be less than one standard error. For about 95% of the possible samples, the difference would be less than two standard errors and, in about 99% of the samples, the difference would be approximately two and a half times the standard error. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over with income, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: This statistic is not resident on the database. It is specifically calculated for most of the income data published. 2039 INCOME: TOTAL INCOME Refers to the total money income received from the following sources during the calendar year 1990 by persons 15 years of age and over: Total wages and salaries Net income from unincorporated non-farm business and/or professional practice Net farm self-employment income Family Allowances Federal Child Tax Credits Old Age Security pension and Guaranteed Income Supplement Benefits from Canada or Quebec Pension Plan Benefits from Unemployment Insurance Other income from government sources Dividends and interest on bonds, deposits, savings certificates and other investment income Retirement pensions, superannuation and annuities. Other money income Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: Although the respondents were asked a direct question on their total income excluding Family Allowances and the federal Child Tax Credits, the reported total income is replaced by a derived total income which includes an assigned amount for Family Allowances and the federal Child Tax Credits. Information on total money income was collected in the 1961, 1971, 1981, 1986 and 1991 Censuses. The major differences between censuses with respect to income are summarized below. For an overview, view Figure 8 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 8 on page 50 for its original format. Concept (i) The 1961 Census did not collect data on income from farming. Therefore, this source of income was excluded from "Total Income" in that census. (ii) The 1986 Census included, for the first time, federal Child Tax Credits in "Total Money Income". (iii) In all censuses, income received by immigrants prior to their arrival in Canada was not included in "Total Income". (iv) In all censuses, the income concept excluded gambling gains and losses, lottery prizes, money inherited during the year in a lump sum, capital gains or losses, receipts from the sale of property, income tax refunds, loan payments received, lump- sum settlements of insurance policies, rebates received on property taxes, refunds of pension contributions as well as all income "in kind" such as free meals, living accommodations, or agricultural products produced and consumed on the farm. Reference Period Except for 1961, respondents were asked to report their income for the calendar year prior to the census. The 1961 Census gave the respondents the option to report their income either for the 12 months preceding the census or for the calendar year 1960. Coverage (i) The 1961 Census excluded all farm households, all collective households and all households in the Northwest Territories. (ii) Only the 1971 Census collected information on income from institutional residents. Methodology (i) In 1971, income data were collected from a 1/3 sample of households. In all other censuses, the sample size was 1/5. (In certain selected areas, sampling was replaced by 100% enumeration.) (ii) The data were collected by canvassers in 19 61. In subsequent censuses, the main collection method used was self-enumeration. (iii) Because of inconsistent reporting, members of Hutterite colonies were assigned zero income in the 1981, 1986 and 1991 Censuses. (iv) Various censuses differed in respect of combination of income sources. For details, view Figure 8 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 8 on page 50 for its original format. (v) No information was collected from respondents on Family Allowances and Child Tax Credits in 1986 and 1991. These were calculated on the basis of other information on families and assigned, where applicable, to appropriate individuals. ___________________________________________ Figure 8. Income Content and Coverage in the Censuses of Canada ______________________________________________________ Census Sources 1961 1971 1981 1986 1991 Wages and salaries Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Net non-farm self-employment Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Net farm self-employment No Yes Yes Yes Yes Family Allowances Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Federal Child Tax Credits No No No Yes Yes Old Age Security (OAS) and Guaranteed Income Supplement (GIS) - 1 2 Yes Yes Benefits from Canada or Quebec Pension Plan (CPP/QPP) - 1 2 Yes Yes Benefits from Unemployment Insurance 3 3 Yes Yes Yes Other income from government sources Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Interest and dividends Yes Yes 4 4 4 Other investment income Yes Yes 4 4 4 Retirement pensions, superannuation, annuities Yes Yes 5 Yes Yes Other money income Yes Yes 5 Yes Yes Reference period June '60- 1970 1980 1985 1990 May '61 Sample size 20% 33% 20% 20% 20% Coverage Farm and All 6 6 6 N.W.T. Excluded ____________________ (1) One question was asked to include OAS, CPP/QPP and provincial Old Age Assistance. (2) The question included CPP/QPP benefits but provincial income supplements were included in "Other income from government sources". (3) Included in "Other income from government sources". (4) One question covering all investment income. (5) One question covering both "Retirement pension, superannuation, annuities" and "Other money income". (6) Institutional population excluded 2040 INCOME: WAGES AND SALARIES Refers to gross wages and salaries before deductions for such items as income tax, pensions, unemployment insurance, etc. Included in this source are military pay and allowances, tips, commissions and cash bonuses, as well as all types of casual earnings in the 1990 calendar year. The value of taxable allowances and benefits provided by employers, such as free lodging and free automobile use, is excluded. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 45(a) Responses: Dollar value or nil Remarks: See "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 2041 INSTITUTIONAL RESIDENT Refers to a resident of an "institutional" collective dwelling, other than staff members and their families. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Reported for: Total population Question No.: Derived variable: Question 2 Responses: Patient, resident, young offender, inmate Remarks: "Institutional" collective dwellings are children's group homes and orphanages, nursing homes, chronic care hospitals, residences for senior citizens, hospitals, psychiatric institutions, treatment centres and institutions for the physically handicapped, correctional and penal institutions, young offenders' facilities and jails. In the 1991, 1986 and 1981 Censuses, only basic data were collected for institutional residents: age, sex, marital status and mother tongue. Therefore, any tabulations containing other variables collected from the one-fifth sample of households will not include institutional residents. In contrast, the 1976 and 1971 Censuses did include institutional residents in many tabulations based on sample variables. In 1981, the term "Inmates" was used. 2042 LABOUR: CLASS OF WORKER (DERIVED) This variable classifies persons who reported a job into those who (i) worked mainly for someone else for wages, salaries, commissions or payments "in kind", (ii) worked without pay in a family farm, business or professional practice owned or operated by a related household member, (iii) worked mainly for themselves, with or without paid help. The job reported was the one held in the week prior to enumeration if the person was employed, or the job of longest duration since January 1, 1990, if the person was not employed during the reference week. Persons with two or more jobs in the reference week were to provide information for the job at which they worked the most hours. This variable differs from Labour: Class of Worker (Direct) in that self-employed workers who reported that their business was incorporated have been included in the "paid worker" category. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 41 and 42 Responses: Paid workers (wage and salary earners and self- employed persons in incorporated companies); Unpaid family workers (worked without pay for a relative in a family business or farm); Self- employed without paid help (own account) in unincorporated companies; Self-employed with paid help (employers) in unincorporated companies Remarks: Paid Workers (Wage and Salary Earners and Self- employed Persons in Incorporated Companies) In the 1991 Census publications and other products, the term paid workers normally refers to employees and self-employed persons in incorporated companies. Employees include persons 15 years of age and over who worked since January 1, 1990, and indicated that, in the job reported, they were working mainly for wages, salaries, tips or commissions. Also included are persons who worked for a piece-rate; those who worked for payment "in kind" in non-family enterprises, such as members of a religious order, who received free room and board or other supplies in lieu of cash; salespersons on commission working for only one company and not maintaining an office or staff; and those who worked for various private households at such jobs as baby-sitting and cleaning. It should be noted that most 1991 publications and tabulations will provide data for those paid workers who were in the labour force during the week prior to enumeration, rather than for the total group of paid workers who worked since January 1, 1990, although all data are available. Data for paid workers may not be strictly comparable between 1971, 1981, 1986 and 1991. For example, newspaper carriers were considered as paid workers in 1971 but as self-employed in 1981, 1986 and 1991. See also "Unpaid Family Workers". Unpaid Family Workers (Worked Without Pay for a Relative in a Family Business or Farm) Includes persons 15 years of age and over who worked since January 1, 1990, for whom the job reported consisted mainly of work without regular money wages for a relative who was a member of the same household, at tasks contributing to the operation of the business or farm owned or operated by the relative. While 1991, 1986 and 1981 Census data are directly comparable for this variable, the data between 1971 and the other census years may not be strictly comparable because of small changes in definitions. Females who were unpaid family workers, worked as farm labourers and did less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week, were excluded from the labour force according to 1971 definitions. These persons are included in the employed labour force in 1981, 1986 and 1991. Due to changes in tax laws and census procedures, some persons formerly identified as unpaid family workers may now be classified as paid workers. The tax changes permitted for the first time, in the 1980 taxation year, the deduction of a spouse's wages as expenses. This may have resulted in some changes in status from "unpaid family workers" to "paid workers". In addition, there were some data quality problems with the 1981 data which led to undercounting the unpaid family worker category. In 1986, an apparent dramatic increase from 1981 in this category of worker was due more to better reporting in 1986 than an actual increase in the number of unpaid family workers. Self-employed Without Paid Help (Own Account) in Unincorporated Companies and Self-employed With Paid Help (Employers) in Unincorporated Companies Includes persons 15 years of age and over who worked since January 1, 1990, and for whom the job reported consisted mainly of self-employment. In 1971, 1981, 1986 and 1991 Census tabulations, the term "self-employed" normally excludes self- employed in incorporated companies. Respondents were to indicate "self- employed with paid help" or "self-employed without paid help" as appropriate and to indicate whether their business or farm was incorporated. Self-employment includes operating a business or professional practice, alone or in a partnership. This includes operating a farm whether the land is rented or owned, working on a free-lance or contract basis to do a job (e.g., architects, private duty nurses) and providing meals and/or rooms and/or day care services in own home for boarders, roomers or neighbours' children. It also includes operating a direct distributorship selling and delivering products such as cosmetics, newspapers, brushes and soap products, and fishing with own equipment or with equipment in which the person has a share. It should be noted that the tax changes mentioned earlier may have changed the status of some self- employed persons from "without paid help" to "with paid help" if they decided to pay wages to their spouses. Some persons who are considered as paid workers in the census are considered as self-employed without a business (and therefore without paid help) in the Labour Force Survey. These are persons working for various private households at such jobs as baby- sitting and cleaning. Coverage differences noted in the text below, should be kept in mind when comparing census and survey data. ____________________________________________________________ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2043 LABOUR: CLASS OF WORKER (DIRECT) This variable classifies persons who reported a job into those who (i) worked mainly for someone else for wages, salaries, commissions or payments "in kind", (ii) worked without pay in a family farm, business or professional practice owned or operated by a related household member, (iii) worked mainly for themselves, with or without paid help. The job reported was the one held in the week prior to enumeration if the person was employed, or the job of longest duration since January 1, 1990, if the person was not employed during the reference week. Persons with two or more jobs in the reference week were to provide information for the job at which they worked the most hours. This variable differs from Labour: Class of Worker (Derived) in that those persons who are self-employed in an incorporated company have not been added to the "paid worker" category. Self-employed persons in incorporated companies in 1971 and 1981 Census products are normally included in the "paid worker" category to permit comparisons with surveys of establishments and the System of National Accounts. However, for some types of analyses, the categories obtained from the direct variable may be more appropriate. In 1986 and 1991 Census products, self-employed persons whose farms or businesses were incorporated are shown separately where space permits. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question No.: Direct variable: Question 41 Responses: Paid workers (wage and salary earners); Unpaid family workers (worked without pay for a relative in a family business or farm); Self-employed without paid help (own account); Self-employed with paid help (employers) Remarks: Paid Workers (Wage and Salary Earners) This category includes persons 15 years of age and over who worked since January 1, 1990, and indicated that, in the job reported, they were working mainly for wages, salaries, tips or commissions. Also included are persons who worked for a piece-rate; those who worked for payment "in kind" in non-family enterprises, such as members of a religious order, who received free room and board or other supplies in lieu of cash; salespersons on commission working for only one company and not maintaining an office or staff; and those who worked for various private households at such jobs as baby-sitting and cleaning. It should be noted that most 1991 publications and tabulations will provide data for those paid workers who were in the labour force during the week prior to enumeration, rather than for the total group of paid workers who worked since January 1, 1990, although all data are available. Data for paid workers may not be strictly comparable between 1971, 1981, 1986 and 1991. For example, newspaper carriers were considered as paid workers in 1971 but as self-employed in 1981, 1986 and 1991. See also "Unpaid Family Workers". Unpaid Family Workers (Worked Without Pay for a Relative in a Family Business or Farm) Includes persons 15 years of age and over who worked since January 1, 1990, for whom the job reported consisted mainly of work without regular money wages for a relative who was a member of the same household, at tasks contributing to the operation of the business or farm owned or operated by the relative. While 1991, 1986 and 1981 Census data are directly comparable for this variable, the data between 1971 and the other census years may not be strictly comparable because of small changes in definitions. Females who were unpaid family workers, worked as farm labourers and did less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week, were excluded from the labour force according to 1971 definitions. These persons are included in the employed labour force in 1981, 1986 and 1991. Due to changes in tax laws and census procedures, some persons formerly identified as unpaid family workers may now be classified as paid workers. The tax changes permitted for the first time, in the 1980 taxation year, the deduction of a spouse's wages as expenses. This may have resulted in some changes in status from unpaid family workers to paid workers. In addition, there were some data quality problems with the 1981 data which led to undercounting the unpaid family worker category. In 1986, an apparent dramatic increase from 1981 in this category of worker was due more to better reporting in 1986 than an actual increase in the number of unpaid family workers. Self-employed Without Paid Help (Own Account) and Self-employed With Paid Help (Employers) Includes persons 15 years of age and over who worked since January 1, 1990, and for whom the job reported consisted mainly of self-employment. Respondents were to indicate "self-employed with paid help" or "self-employed without paid help" as appropriate and to indicate in Question 42 whether their business or farm was incorporated. Self-employment includes operating a business or professional practice, alone or in a partnership. This includes operating a farm whether the land is rented or owned, working on a free-lance or contract basis to do a job (e.g., architects, private duty nurses) and providing meals and/or rooms and/or day care services in own home for boarders, roomers or neighbours' children. It also includes operating a direct distributorship selling and delivering products such as cosmetics, newspapers, brushes and soap products, and fishing with own equipment or with equipment in which the person has a share. It should be noted that the tax changes mentioned earlier may have changed the status of some self- employed persons from "without paid help" to "with paid help" if they decided to pay wages to their spouses. Some persons who are considered as paid workers in the census are considered as self-employed without a business (and therefore without paid help) in the Labour Force Survey. These are persons working for various private households at such jobs as baby- sitting and cleaning. Coverage differences noted in the text below should be kept in mind when comparing census and survey data. ____________________________________________________________ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2044 LABOUR: EMPLOYED Refers to persons who, during the week prior to June 4, 1991: (a) did any work at all excluding housework or other maintenance or repairs around the home and volunteer work; or (b) were absent from their job or business because of own temporary illness or disability, vacation, labour dispute at their place of work, or were absent for other reasons. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 and 31 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: The "Employed" includes all persons working for wages or salaries, all persons working in their own business, farm or profession, and all persons working without pay in a family farm or business during the reference week, as well as persons who were absent from their job or business because of illness, labour dispute at their place of work, vacation, etc. Work for wages or salaries included work for wages, salaries, piece-rates, tips, commissions, payments "in kind", service as a member of a religious order, active duty in the Armed Forces and casual work for pay such as baby-sitting and cleaning. Work in own farm, business or professional practice included time spent in the operation or setting up of such enterprises, whether or not goods were sold or services were rendered and whether or not profit was made; work done on a free-lance or contract basis; work done to provide meals and/or room and/or day care services in their own home for boarders, roomers or neighbours' children; the operation of a direct distributorship selling and delivering products such as cosmetics, newspapers, brushes or soap products, as well as fishing, hunting and trapping, whether for profit or for maintenance of their family or community. Persons who contributed to the operation of a family farm or business owned or operated by a relative who was a member of the same household are included in the "Employed" as unpaid family workers. In addition to the inclusion of persons absent from their jobs or businesses because they were ill, on vacation, on strike, or locked out, the other reasons mentioned in the Guide to the census questionnaire included maternity leave, bad weather, fire, personal or family responsibilities and, if paid, training courses. For information on the comparability of Employed with previous censuses and with the Labour Force Survey, see the text below. See also Figure 9 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 9 on page 64 for its original format. See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ____________________________________________________________ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 9. Population and Labour Force Activity Components, 1991 Census of Canada Population 15 years of age and over Institutional residents Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Total labour force Employed Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who/ were: (4) or (5)) Last worked in 1990 (5) (consists of persons who were: (5)) Unemployed Experienced Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Last worked in 1990 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Inexperienced Last worked before 1990 (consists of persons who/ who had : (1) or (2)) Never worked in lifetime (consists of persons who /who had: (1) or (2)) Not in labour force Last worked in 1991 Last worked in 1990 Last worked before 1990 Never worked in lifetime ______________________ (1) Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought ______________________ (2) New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (3) On temporary lay-off Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (4) Worked in reference week Civilian Armed Forces ______________________ (5) Absent from job or business in reference week Civilian Armed forces 2045 LABOUR: EMPLOYMENT/POPULATION RATIO Refers to the number of persons employed expressed as a percentage of the population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. The employment/population ratio for a particular group (age, sex, marital status, geographic area, etc.) is the number employed in that group expressed as a percentage of the population for that group. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding Institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 and 31 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Employed Employment/population ratio = --------------------- times 100 Population 15 years of age and over In 1976 and 1971, while institutional residents were excluded from the labour force, they were normally included in the population 15 years of age and over. For information on the comparability of Employed with previous censuses, see text below. * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ____________________________________________________________ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2046 LABOUR: EXPERIENCED LABOUR FORCE Refers to persons who, during the week prior to June 4, 1991, were employed or unemployed but who had worked since January 1, 1990. The experienced labour force can be derived by deleting from the total labour force those unemployed persons 15 years of age and over who have never worked or who worked only prior to January 1, 1990. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 to 35 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: The experienced labour force is a subuniverse which is frequently used when tabulating occupation, industry and class of worker data. Only respondents who worked since January 1, 1990 were required to respond to these questions. Similar data are not tabulated regularly by the Labour Force Survey as the subuniverse for which occupation, industry and class of worker data are collected in that survey includes all persons who have worked in the past five years. For information on the comparability of Labour Force Activity with previous censuses, refer to the text below. The experienced labour force is not the same as or does not consist of all persons who have worked since January 1, 1990. View Figure 9 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 9 on page 64 for its original format. * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ____________________________________________________________ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 9. Population and Labour Force Activity Components, 1991 Census of Canada Population 15 years of age and over Institutional residents Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Total labour force Employed Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who / were: (4) or (5)) Last worked in 1990 (5) (consists of persons who were: (5)) Unemployed Experienced Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Last worked in 1990 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Inexperienced Last worked before 1990 (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Never worked in lifetime (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Not in labour force Last worked in 1991 Last worked in 1990 Last worked before 1990 Never worked in lifetime ______________________ (1) Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought ______________________ (2) New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (3) On temporary lay-off Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (4) Worked in reference week Civilian Armed Forces ______________________ (5) Absent from job or business in reference week Civilian Armed forces 2047 LABOUR: FULL-TIME OR PART-TIME WEEKS WORKED IN 1990 Refers to persons who worked in 1990. These persons were asked to report whether the weeks they worked in 1990 were full weeks (30 hours or more per week) of work or not. Persons with a part-time job for part of the year and a full-time job for another part of the year were to report the information for the job at which they worked the most weeks. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over who worked in 1990, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked in 1990 Question No.: Direct variable: Question 44 Responses: Full time (30 hours or more per week); Part time (less than 30 hours per week) Remarks: In previous censuses, no specific definition was given to respondents for full-time work. Respondents were instructed in the Guide to consider part-time work as work which involved fewer hours than the normally scheduled weekly hours of work performed by persons doing similar work. In 1971, data for this variable included institutional residents who worked in 1970. 2048 LABOUR: HOURS WORKED IN REFERENCE WEEK Refers to the actual number of hours that persons worked in the week prior to enumeration. It includes hours worked for wages, salaries, tips or commissions, hours worked in one's own business, farm or professional practice, or hours worked without pay in a family business or farm owned or operated by a relative living in the same household. "Work" excludes housework or other maintenance or repairs around the home and volunteer work. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 30 Responses: None or write-in entry of number of total hours worked in reference week (to the nearest hour) Remarks: See the definition of Labour: Employed for a more detailed description of "work". In 1991, as in 1986 and 1981, respondents were asked to write in their actual number of hours worked in the reference week. None of these reference weeks included a statutory holiday. In 1971 and 1976, two separate questions were asked, one on paid and self- employment hours and one on unpaid hours. In both cases, precise response categories were given on the questionnaire. In addition, the reference weeks in 1971 and 1976 included a statutory holiday, and the data included institutional residents. In 1971, female unpaid family workers who worked as farm labourers and did less than 20 hours unpaid work in the reference week were excluded from the labour force. Data for 1991, 1986 and 1981 are therefore, in most cases, not comparable to previous years. Similar data (but for different reference weeks) are available from the Labour Force Survey. For further information on the comparability of Labour Force Activity with previous censuses and with the Labour Force Survey, refer to the text below. ____________________________________________________________ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2049 LABOUR: INCORPORATION STATUS Refers to the legal status of a business or farm. It is directed at persons who were mainly self-employed, either with or without paid help in the job reported (i.e. their job in the week prior to enumeration or that of longest duration since January 1, 1990). An incorporated business is a business or farm which has been formed into a legal corporation, having a legal entity under either federal or provincial laws. An unincorporated business or farm has no separate legal entity, but may be a partnership, family business or owner-operated business. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 and who were self-employed Question No.: Direct variable: Question 42 Responses: Incorporated; Unincorporated Remarks: No formal definition for "incorporation" was given to respondents. The question on incorporation is often used in conjunction with Labour: Class of Worker, since self-employed persons who reported their farm or business as incorporated can be included with paid workers in certain types of analysis. 2050 LABOUR: INDUSTRY (BASED ON 1980 STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATION) Refers to the general nature of the business carried out in the establishment where the person worked, as indicated by the name of the employer and the kind of business, industry or service. Dataare available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. If the person was not employed in the week prior to enumeration, the information relates to the job of longest duration since January 1, 1990. Persons with two or more jobs were to report the information for the job at which they worked the most hours. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 36 and 37 Responses: The industry questions request write-in responses which are subsequently coded to correspond to the 1980 Standard Industrial Classification (SIC). This classification consists of a systematic and comprehensive arrangement of industries structured into divisions, major groups, groups and classes. These industrial classes are based on the general nature of the establishment's business, industry or service. For further information on the classification, see Standard Industrial Classification, 1980, Catalogue No. 12-501. Remarks: The coding of responses to the industry questions was done, where possible, using a pre-coded List of Establishments to ensure uniformity with the SIC assigned to the same establishments by other Statistics Canada surveys. The 1991 industry data are available for the following populations: persons 15 years of age and over, who worked since January 1, 1990; persons employed in the week prior to census enumeration and persons who were unemployed during the week preceding enumeration, but who worked since January 1, 1990. These latter two groups combined are referred to as the "experienced labour force". The remaining component of the labour force, unemployed persons who worked prior to January 1, 1990, or who never worked, are shown in the data under the category "Industry not applicable". For the variable Labour: Industry (Based on 1980 Standard Industrial Classification), if the industry was not specified by the respondent (or not defined in sufficient detail to permit coding), then a 1980 SIC code was imputed at the major group level and shown in the "Assigned" category. For Division A, Agricultural and Related Service Industries, Division K, Finance and Insurance Industries and Division N, Government Service Industries, data are available at the two-digit level only (major groups). All other data are available at the three-digit group level. The variable Labour: Industry (Based on 1980 Standard Industrial Classification) permits direct comparisons between 1991 and 1986 Census industry data. Direct comparisons between 1991, 1986, 1981 and 1971 Census industry data are also possible, based on the 1970 SIC. For further information, refer to the definition of Labour: Industry (Based on 1970 Standard Industrial Classification). Comparisons between the Labour Force Survey and the census of Canada data on industry are hampered by minor differences. Please see text below for further information on the types of differences that may apply. ___________________________ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2051 LABOUR: INDUSTRY (BASED ON 1970 STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATION) Refers to the general nature of the business carried out in the establishment where the person worked, as indicated by the name of the employer and the kind of business, industry or service. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. If the person was not employed in the week prior to enumeration, the information relates to the job of longest duration since January 1, 1990. Persons with two or more jobs were to report the information for the job at which they worked the most hours. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 36 and 37 Responses: The industry questions request write-in responses which are subsequently coded to correspond to the 1970 Standard Industrial Classification Manual (SIC). This classification consists of a systematic and comprehensive arrangement of industries structured into divisions, major groups and classes. These industrial classes are based on the general nature of the establishment's business, industry or service. For further information on the classification, see Standard Industrial Classification Manual, 1970, Catalogue No. 12-501. Remarks: The coding of responses to the industry questions was done, where possible, using a pre-coded List of Establishments to ensure uniformity with the SIC assigned to the same establishments by other Statistics Canada surveys. The 1991 industry data are available for the following populations: persons 15 years of age and over, who worked since January 1, 1990; persons employed in the week prior to census enumeration and persons who were unemployed during the week preceding enumeration, but who worked since January 1, 1990. These latter two groups combined are referred to as the "experienced labour force". The remaining component of the labour force, unemployed persons who worked prior to January 1, 1990, or who never worked, are shown in the data under the category "Industry not applicable". The 1991 and 1986 Census data on industry were made directly comparable to those of 1981 and 1971 during the coding operation by using a series of special codes and computer manipulations. For the variable Labour: Industry (Based on 1980 Standard Industrial Classification), if the industry was not specified by the respondent (or not defined in sufficient detail to permit coding), then a 1980 SIC code was imputed at the major group level and shown in the "Assigned" category. For Labour: Industry (Based on 1970 Standard Industrial Classification), these unspecified and undefined industries are shown in Division 12, Industry Unspecified or Undefined, of the 1970 SIC. The 1991 industry data (based on the 1970 SIC) allow direct comparisons between 1991, 1986, 1981 and 1971 Census data. It should be noted that some differences exist in the definition of the labour force (for further information, see "Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey" found below). Although direct comparisons cannot be made with data published in 1951 and 1961, a 1971 Census product (Industry Trends, 1951-1971, Catalogue No. 94-793) did publish 1951 and 1961 data that had been manually adjusted to make them comparable to 1971 data. Portions of these tables are reproduced in similar 1981, 1986 and 1991 products. Class 715, Canadian Offices of Canadian Incorporated Companies Classified as Non-Canadian, was combined with Class 707, Investment and Holding Companies and Class 999 was not used. For Division 1, Agriculture, data are available only for Major Groups 1 and 2 combined (Experimental and Institutional Farms and Other Farms) and for Major Group 3 (Services Incidental to Agriculture). ________________________ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2052 LABOUR: INEXPERIENCED LABOUR FORCE The inexperienced labour force consists of unemployed persons 15 years of age and over who have never worked or who worked only prior to January 1, 1990. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who did not work since January 1, 1990 Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 to 35 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: The inexperienced labour force is that portion of the total labour force who has not worked since January 1, 1990. No occupation, industry or class of worker data are collected for these persons. This concept is not comparable to that used by the Labour Force Survey as that survey collects occupation, industry and class of worker data for all persons who worked in the past five years. For information on the comparability of Labour Force Activity with previous censuses, see text below. See also Figure 9 below. Refer to User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 9 on page 64 for its original format. ------------------------ Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 9. Population and Labour Force Activity Components, 1991 Census of Canada Population 15 years of age and over Institutional residents Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Total labour force Employed Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who / were: (4) or (5)) Last worked in 1990 (5) (consists of persons who were: (5)) Unemployed Experienced Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Last worked in 1990 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Inexperienced Last worked before 1990 (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Never worked in lifetime (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Not in labour force Last worked in 1991 Last worked in 1990 Last worked before 1990 Never worked in lifetime ______________________ (1) Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought ______________________ (2) New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (3) On temporary lay-off Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (4) Worked in reference week Civilian Armed Forces ______________________ (5) Absent from job or business in reference week Civilian Armed forces 2053 LABOUR: LABOUR FORCE ACTIVITY Refers to the labour market activity of the working age population who, in the week prior to June 4, 1991, were employed or unemployed. The remainder of the working age population is classified as not in labour force. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. The two components of the labour force, i.e. Employed and Unemployed, are defined in their respective description. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 to 35 Responses: The values for the Labour Force Activity variable are: Employed Worked in reference week Armed Forces Civilian Absent from job or business in reference week Armed Forces Civilian Unemployed Experienced On temporary lay-off Did not look for work Looked for full-time work Looked for part-time work New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for full-time work Looked for part-time work Looked for work Looked for full-time work Looked for part-time work Inexperienced New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for full-time work Looked for part-time work Looked for work Looked for full-time work Looked for part-time work Not in labour force Last worked in 1991 Last worked in 1990 Last worked before 1990 Never worked Figure 9 below illustrates the components of population and labour force activity. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 9 on page 64 for its original format. Remarks: The categories of this concept were derived from the responses to the labour force queries on the census questionnaire. These were as follows: Hours worked in reference week On temporary lay-off or absent from job or business (in reference week) New job to start in four weeks or less (from reference week) Looked for work in past four weeks (including reference week) Reasons unable to start work (in reference week) When last worked Definitions of the above-listed variables are included in this dictionary. However, the major purpose of these variables was to derive the labour force activity of the respondent. Other than for specialized research in consultation with subject-matter officers, the direct use of these variables on their own (except for Hours Worked in Reference Week and When Last Worked) should be avoided. For information on the comparability of Labour Force Activity with previous censuses and with the Labour Force Survey, see text below. * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ---------------------- Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 9. Population and Labour Force Activity Components, 1991 Census of Canada Population 15 years of age and over Institutional residents Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Total labour force Employed Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who / were: (4) or (5)) Last worked in 1990 (5) (consists of persons who were: (5)) Unemployed Experienced Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Last worked in 1990 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Inexperienced Last worked before 1990 (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Never worked in lifetime (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Not in labour force Last worked in 1991 Last worked in 1990 Last worked before 1990 Never worked in lifetime ______________________ (1) Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought ______________________ (2) New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (3) On temporary lay-off Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (4) Worked in reference week Civilian Armed Forces ______________________ (5) Absent from job or business in reference week Civilian Armed forces 2054 LABOUR: LOOKED FOR WORK IN PAST FOUR WEEKS (FULL- OR PART-TIME)* Refers to whether a person actively looked for work in the four weeks prior to Census Day, either full- or part-time work (less than 30 hours a week). "Actively looked" means using such job search methods as contacting a Canada Employment Centre, checking with employers, or placing or answering newspaper ads. Data were collected for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who were not working in the week prior to enumeration. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who did not work in the week prior to enumeration Question No.: Direct variable: Question 33 Responses: No; Yes, looked for full-time work; Yes, looked for part-time work (less than 30 hours a week) Remarks: In 1976 and 1971, no information was available on whether the work sought was full time or part time; as well, institutional residents and persons who worked in the week prior to enumeration were asked the question. In the Labour Force Survey, respondents are asked if they looked for work in the past six months. A second question is used to determine if they searched for work in the past four weeks. Data are usually modified by information from other questions before release. For further information, see the definition of Labour: Unemployed. This variable is used to derive the respondent's labour force activity status. Use on its own is restricted. * These data are available only after consultation with subject-matter officers. 2055 LABOUR: NEW JOB TO START IN FOUR WEEKS OR LESS (FROM REFERENCE WEEK)* Refers to whether a person had definite arrangements to start a new job within the next four weeks. Data were collected for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who did not work in the week prior to enumeration. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who did not work in the week prior to enumeration Question No.: Direct variable: Question 32 Responses: No, did not have definite arrangements to start a new job within the next four weeks; Yes, had definite arrangements to start a new job within the next four weeks Remarks: In 1976, both institutional residents and persons who worked in the week prior to enumeration were asked this question. A similar question is asked in the Labour Force Survey but, as in the census, data are usually combined with those from other questions. For further information, see the definition of Labour: Unemployed. This variable is used to derive the respondent's labour force activity status. Use on its own is restricted. * These data are available only after consultation with subject-matter officers. 2056 LABOUR: NOT IN LABOUR FORCE Refers to those persons who, in the week prior to enumeration, were unwilling or unable to offer or supply their labour services under conditions existing in the labour market. It includes persons who looked for work during the last four weeks but who were not available to start work in the reference week, as well as persons who did not work, did not have a new job to start in four weeks or less, were not on temporary lay-off or did not look for work in the four weeks prior to enumeration. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.:Derived variable: Questions 30 to 35 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Most persons in this category would be students, homemakers, retired workers, seasonal workers in an "off" season who were not looking for work, and persons who could not work because of a long-term illness or disability. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the questions on labour force activity and therefore are excluded from the universe to which the data apply. In 1976, when "reasons" for unavailability for work were not obtained, all unemployed persons who looked for work and indicated they were not available were included as "Not in Labour Force". As well, in both 1976 and 1971, institutional residents were included. For more information, see Labour: Labour Force Activity. See also Figure 9 below. Refer to User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 9 on page 64 for its original format. * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 9. Population and Labour Force Activity Components, 1991 Census of Canada Population 15 years of age and over Institutional residents Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Total labour force Employed Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who / were: (4) or (5)) Last worked in 1990 (5) (consists of persons who were: (5)) Unemployed Experienced Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Last worked in 1990 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Inexperienced Last worked before 1990 (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Never worked in lifetime (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Not in labour force Last worked in 1991 Last worked in 1990 Last worked before 1990 Never worked in lifetime ______________________ (1) Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought ______________________ (2) New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (3) On temporary lay-off Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (4) Worked in reference week Civilian Armed Forces ______________________ (5) Absent from job or business in reference week Civilian Armed forces 2057 LABOUR: OCCUPATION (BASED ON 1971 OCCUPATIONAL CLASSIFICATION MANUAL) Refers to the kind of work persons were doing during the reference week, as determined by their kind of work and the description of the most important duties in their job. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. If the person did not have a job during the week prior to enumeration, the data relate to the job of longest duration since January 1, 1990. Persons with two or more jobs were to report the information for the job at which they worked the most hours. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (recoded sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 39 and 40 Responses: Respondents were asked to "write in" the kind of work they were doing and their most important activities or duties. The information from these responses was then used by census coders to assign a four-digit occupation code. Remarks: The 1991 occupation data are produced according to two classification structures: the 1971 Occupational Classification Manual (OCM) and the 1980 Standard Occupational Classification (SOC), a revision of the 1971 OCM. While the two classifications appear similar, certain occupations have different codes and thus appear in different unit groups depending on the classification. The 1991 Census occupation data classified to the 1971 OCM are to be used whenever comparisons with 1971 occupation data are made. The OCM is composed of 23 occupation major groups subdivided into 81 minor groups which are further subdivided into 496 unit groups. At the unit group level, occupation titles are classified on the basis of "kind of work performed", as determined by the tasks, duties and responsibilities of the occupation. The unit groups to which occupation titles are assigned, therefore, are homogeneous with respect to kind of work performed. For further information on the 1971 OCM, see Occupational Classification Manual, 1971, Volume 1, Catalogue No. 12-536. The 1991 occupation data are available for the following populations: persons 15 years of age and over, who worked since January 1, 1990; persons employed in the week prior to the census enumeration and persons unemployed during the week preceding enumeration, but who had worked since January 1, 1990. These latter two groups combined are referred to as the "experienced labour force". The remaining component of the labour force, unemployed persons who had worked prior to January 1, 1990, or who had never worked, is shown in the data under the category "Occupation not applicable". Respondents who had worked since January 1, 1990, but did not specify an occupation (or gave a response too vague to be coded), are assigned to Major Group 00 - Occupation Not Stated. The 1971 Census occupation question asked for job titles in addition to kind of work and most important activities and duties. Testing prior to the 1981 Census suggested that the elimination of the question on job title would not have a significant effect on the coded occupation data obtained. Therefore, this third question was not asked on the 1981, 1986 and 1991 Censuses. Occupation data from the 1981 and 1986 Censuses are also available, classified according to the 1971 OCM. Thus it is possible to historically compare data from all four censuses. A sample of 1961 Census data coded to the 1971 OCM is also available, but only at the occupation major group level. For further information on comparability with previous censuses, see text below. ---------------------- Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2058 LABOUR: OCCUPATION (BASED ON 1980 STANDARD OCCUPATIONAL CLASSIFICATION) Refers to the kind of work persons were doing during the reference week, as determined by their kind of work and the description of the most important duties in their job. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. If the person did not have a job during the week prior to enumeration, the data relate to the job of longest duration since January 1, 1990. Persons with two or more jobs were to report the information for the job at which they worked the most hours. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 39 and 40 Responses: Respondents were asked to "write in" the kind of work they were doing and their most important activities or duties. The information from these responses was then used by census coders to assign a four-digit occupation code. Remarks: The 1991 occupation data are produced according to two classification structures: the 1971 Occupational Classification Manual (OCM) and the 1980 Standard Occupational Classification (SOC), a revision of the 1971 OCM. While the two classifications appear similar, certain occupations have different codes and thus appear in different unit groups depending on the classification. Most 1991 Census standard products present occupation data based on the 1980 SOC. The SOC is composed of 22 occupation major groups subdivided into 80 minor groups which are further subdivided into 514 unit groups. At the unit group level, occupation titles are classified on the basis of "kind of work performed", as determined by the tasks, duties and responsibilities of the occupation. The unit groups to which occupation titles are assigned, therefore, are homogeneous with respect to kind of work performed. For further information on the 1980 SOC, see Standard Occupational Classification, 1980, Catalogue No. 12-565E. The 1991 occupation data are available for the following populations: persons 15 years of age and over, who worked since January 1, 1990; persons employed in the week prior to the census enumeration and persons unemployed during the week preceding enumeration, but who had worked since January 1, 1990. These latter two groups combined are referred to as the "experienced labour force". The remaining component of the labour force, unemployed persons who had worked prior to January 1, 1990, or who had never worked, is shown in the data under the category "Occupation not applicable". If an occupation was not specified by a respondent who had worked since January 1, 1990 (or the response was too vague to be coded), then a 1980 SOC code was imputed to the minor group level. The number of responses imputed to each minor group is shown under the "Assigned" category. The 1981 and 1986 Censuses also used the 1980 SOC to classify occupation data; therefore, direct comparisons with 1991 data are possible. For comparisons with 1971 data, adjustments must be made to the labour force universe and only occupation data classified to the 1971 OCM can be used. For further information, refer to the definition of Labour: Occupation (Based on 1971 Occupational Classification Manual). Comparisons between the Labour Force Survey and census data on occupation are possible at the major and minor group level of detail provided differences in the coverage and methodology of the two surveys are taken into consideration. For more information on the differences between the census and the Labour Force Survey, refer to the definition of Labour: Experienced Labour Force and the text below. ------------------- Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2059 LABOUR: OCCUPATION (BASED ON 1990 NATIONAL OCCUPATIONAL CLASSIFICATION) Refers to the kind of work persons were doing during the reference week, as determined by their kind of work and the description of the most important duties in their job. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. If the person did not have a job during the week prior to enumeration, the data relate to the job of longest duration since January 1, 1990. Persons with two or more jobs were to report the information for the job at which they worked the most hours. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question Nos.:Derived variable: Questions 39 and 40 Responses: Respondents are asked to "write in" the kind of work they were doing and their most important activities or duties. The information from these responses was then used by census coders to assign a four-digit occupation code. Remarks: In 1991 Census occupation data will be classified to a third classification structure: the 1990 National Occupational Classification (NOC). The NOC is a new classification structure unrelated to the 1980 Standard Occupational Classification (SOC) or the 1971 Occupational Classification Manual (OCM). The NOC follows the major, minor and unit group structure used by the SOC and OCM; however, at the unit group level, occupation titles are classified on the basis of the education, training or skill level required to enter the job, as well as kind of work performed, as determined by the tasks, duties and responsibilities of the occupation. The 1991 occupation data are available for the following populations: persons 15 years of age and over, who worked since January 1, 1990; persons employed in the week prior to the census enumeration and persons unemployed during the week preceding enumeration, but who had worked since January 1, 1990. These latter two groups combined are referred to as the "experienced labour force". The remaining component of the labour force, unemployed persons who had worked prior to January 1, 1990, or who had never worked, is shown in the data under the category "Occupation not applicable". No other census occupation data classified to the 1990 NOC are available. Furthermore, because of the different classification criteria (e.g., job training and work performed), occupation data coded to the NOC cannot be compared with data from other censuses or the Labour Force Survey. 2060 LABOUR: ON TEMPORARY LAY-OFF OR ABSENT FROM JOB OR BUSINESS (IN REFERENCE WEEK)* Refers to whether persons were, during the week prior to June 4, 1991 (i) on temporary lay-off from a job to which they expected to return, (ii) absent from their job or business during that week because of illness, vacation, a strike or lock-out at their place of work, or such other reasons as maternity leave, bad weather, fire and personal or family responsibilities, including absence on training courses if receiving wages or salaries or (iii) to whether neither of these situations applied. Data were collected for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who did not work in the week prior to enumeration. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who did not work in the week prior to enumeration Question No.: Direct variable: Question 31 Responses: No; Yes, on temporary lay-off from a job to which this person expects to return; Yes, on vacation, ill, on strike or locked out, or absent for other reasons Remarks: In 1976 and 1971, two separate questions were asked, one on lay-off and the second on absence. All persons 15 years of age and over, including those who worked in the week preceding the census as well as institutional residents, were asked these questions. The Labour Force Survey asks similar questions but, as in the census, the data are usually combined with those from other questions. In 1981, persons were considered to be on temporary lay-off from a job to which they expected to return if the length of their lay-off did not exceed 26 weeks. In 1971 and 1976, this period was restricted to 30 days. For 1986 and 1991, there was no limit to the lay-off period . For further information, see the definitions of Labour: Employed and Labour: Unemployed. This variable is used to derive the respondent's labour force activity status. Use on its own is restricted. * These data are available only after consultation with subject-matter officers. 2061 LABOUR: PARTICIPATION RATE Refers to the total labour force (in reference week) expressed as a percentage of the population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. The participation rate for a particular group (age, sex, marital status, geographic area, etc.) is the labour force in that group expressed as a percentage of the population for that group. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 to 34 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Total labour force Participation rate = -------------------- times 100 Population 15 years of age and over In 1976 and 1971, while institutional residents were excluded from the labour force, they were normally included in the population in calculating participation rates. For information on the comparability of Labour Force Activity with previous censuses, see the text below. * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ------------------- Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2062 LABOUR: PLACE OF WORK Refers to the usual place of work of non-institutional residents 15 years of age and over who have worked since January 1, 1990. The variables usually relate to the individual's job in the week prior to enumeration. However, if the person had not worked in that week but had worked since January 1, 1990, the information related to the job held longest during that period. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked since January 1, 1990 Question No.: Direct variable: Question 38 Responses: Worked at home (including farms); Worked outside Canada; Worked at the address specified below (respondents were asked to provide the full address of their place of work including municipality, county [if known], province or territory, postal code or to write in "No usual place") Remarks: Respondent-completed Responses Worked at home - Includes those persons whose location of employment is in the same building as their place of residence and those persons living and working on the same farm. Worked outside Canada - Includes diplomats, Armed Forces personnel and others enumerated abroad, recent immigrants not currently employed whose job of longest duration since January 1, 1990 was outside Canada, and persons working in nearby U.S.A. centres are included in the "Outside Canada" category. Worked at the address specified below - This response was to be checked by persons whose place of work did not fall in either the "Worked at home" or "Worked outside Canada" categories. In addition, the full address of the place of work was to be reported. If the full address was not known, the name of the building or street intersection could be substituted. Persons who did not work in one area but who reported regularly to a headquarters were to give the address of the local headquarters or depot. Persons with no fixed or usual place of work were to write in "No usual place". Coded Responses Province/territory of work - Refers to the province or territory of work of each respondent whose place of work is not outside Canada, although persons with no usual place of work may or may not have a value for this term. Census division (CD) of work - Refers to the census division of work of each respondent whose place of work is not outside Canada, although persons with no usual place of work may or may not have a value for this term. CD codes are unique only within each province. They should therefore be used with the province/territory of work. Census subdivision (CSD) of work - Refers to the census subdivision (municipality) of work of each respondent whose place of work is not outside Canada, although persons with no usual place of work may or may not have a value for this term. CSD codes are uniquely defined within each census division. They should therefore be used in conjunction with the province/territory of work and the census division of work. Census metropolitan area (CMA) or census agglomeration (CA) of work - Refers to the census metropolitan area or census agglomeration of work of those persons whose census subdivision of work is within a census metropolitan area or a census agglomeration. 2063 LABOUR: REASONS UNABLE TO START WORK (IN REFERENCE WEEK)* Refers to whether or not persons who did not have a job in the week prior to June 4, 1991 and who actively looked for work in the four weeks prior to enumeration could have started work in that week and if not, the reasons why. Data were collected for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who did not have a job in the week prior to enumeration and who actively looked for work in the four weeks prior to enumeration Question No.: Direct variable: Question 34 Responses: Yes, could have started work; No, already had a job; No, temporary illness or disability; No, personal or family responsibilities; No, going to school; No, other reasons Remarks: In 1976, the question was asked of all persons looking for work in the reference week and no reasons for unavailability for work were asked. A similar question which is asked of all persons who looked for work in the past six months is used to determine availability for work in the Labour Force Survey. Data are usually combined with those from other questions. For further information, see the definition of Labour: Unemployed. This variable is used to derive the respondent's labour force activity status. Use on its own is restricted. * These data are available only after consultation with subject-matter officers. 2064 LABOUR: TOTAL LABOUR FORCE (IN REFERENCE WEEK) Refers to persons who were either employed or unemployed during the week prior to enumeration (June 4, 1991). Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 to 34 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: See the definitions of Labour: Labour Force Activity, Labour: Employed and Labour: Unemployed, and Figure 9 at the end of this definition for further information. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 9 on page 64 for its original format. * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 9. Population and Labour Force Activity Components, 1991 Census of Canada Population 15 years of age and over Institutional residents Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Total labour force Employed Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who / were: (4) or (5)) Last worked in 1990 (5) (consists of persons who were: (5)) Unemployed Experienced Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Last worked in 1990 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Inexperienced Last worked before 1990 (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Never worked in lifetime (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Not in labour force Last worked in 1991 Last worked in 1990 Last worked before 1990 Never worked in lifetime ______________________ (1) Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought ______________________ (2) New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (3) On temporary lay-off Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (4) Worked in reference week Civilian Armed Forces ______________________ (5) Absent from job or business in reference week Civilian Armed forces 2065 LABOUR: UNEMPLOYED Refers to persons who, during the week prior to enumeration (June 4, 1991): (a) were without work, actively looked for work in the past four weeks and were available for work; or (b) were on lay-off and expected to return to their job and were available for work; or (c) had definite arrangements to start a new job in four weeks or less and were available for work. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 to 35 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: The "Unemployed" includes mainly those persons who, during the week prior to enumeration, were without work, had actively looked for work in the past four weeks and were available for work in the reference week. Availability was determined by the response to Question 34, "Reason unable to start work". Some people who reported that they could not start work in the reference week are in fact considered as available (e.g., in the case of people already committed to another job; because of temporary illness or disability; or because of personal or family responsibilities). These answers are interpreted in the light of the person's recent job search and implied intention to find work. "Going to school" and the residual "Other" are the two responses where the person is considered truly unavailable for work and therefore not in the labour force. Also considered as unavailable were students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school, at any time since September 1990, who looked for full-time work. Those persons who did not work during the reference week because they had been laid off from a job to which they expected to return constitute a second element of the "Unemployed". The availability criterion (Question 34) was applied to such persons if they also looked for work. In addition, persons on lay-off who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September 1990 and who did not look for work or who only looked for full-time work in the past four weeks were considered to be unavailable. Persons who did not work during the reference week but had definite arrangements to start a new job in four weeks or less are also counted as unemployed. As in the case of persons on lay-off, the availability criterion (Question 34) was applied only if they also looked for work. As well, persons in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September 1990 were considered unavailable for work if they did not look for work or only looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. For information on the comparability of Labour Force Activity with previous censuses and with the Labour Force Survey, see text below. ----------------------- Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2066 LABOUR: UNEMPLOYMENT RATE Refers to the unemployed labour force expressed as a percentage of the total labour force (in reference week). The unemployment rate for a particular group (age, sex, marital status, geographic area, etc.) is the number of unemployed in that group expressed as a percentage of the labour force for that group. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 30 to 34 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Unemployed labour force Unemployment rate = ------------------------- times 100 Total labour force For information on the comparability of Labour Force Activity with previous censuses, see the text below. * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ----------------------- Comparability of Labour Force Activity Data with those of previous Censuses (1971-1991) and with the Labour Force Survey Historical Census Comparability Census Labour Force Activity concepts have remained fairly consistent since 1971. However, some changes in the questions asked, in processing, as well as some minor conceptual changes, have been introduced throughout the past five censuses. These differences need to be taken into consideration whenever data from two or more census years are being compared. Derived variables are available which take into account as many of these differences as possible and they should be used in doing historical comparisons. Population For all census years, the labour force activity questions were asked of the population 15 years of age and over. Since 1981, institutional residents have not been asked the labour force questions and are therefore excluded from this population. In 1976 and 1971, even though the institutional residents were asked the labour force questions, they were included in the "Not in the Labour Force" group. Employed In 1971, the "Employed" group consisted of three categories: persons who worked in the reference week for pay or profit; persons who worked in the reference week in unpaid family work; and persons with a job but not at work during the reference week. Data were obtained from three separate questions. Female farm labourers who were unpaid family workers and who "helped without pay" for less than 20 hours a week were excluded from the"Employed" category and classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Persons who indicated that they were both "absent from job" and "looking for work" were considered unemployed. In 1976, the "Employed" group was derived from similar questions as in 1971. However, female farm labourers who worked less than 20 hours of unpaid work a week were classified as employed. In addition, persons who were both "looking for work" and "absent from work" were included in the "Employed" group. Persons absent without pay on training courses or educational leave were to mark "Yes, absent" if the job was being held for their return. In 1981, only one question on hours worked in the reference week was asked. Persons were to report both hours of paid and unpaid work. A combined question on "temporary lay-off and absent from work" was asked. Only absences from paid training courses were to be considered as absences from work. No changes were made to the "Employed" category in either 1986 or 1991. Unemployed In 1971, the "Unemployed" category consisted of two groups: persons who looked for work in the reference week and persons who were on temporary lay-off during the reference week. According to the 1971 questionnaire Guide, respondents were to mark "Yes" to the looking for work question if they would have looked for work but did not because they were temporarily ill or believed that no work was available in the community. The Guide also instructed respondents to include themselves on lay-off only if they had been in that situation for 30 days or less. In 1976, two new questions were added to the questionnaire in order to determine unemployment status. The first was a question on availability for work in the reference week. This question provided for "Yes" or "No" responses only. Instructions in the Guide requested persons still in school, those who already had a job, were temporarily ill or who had personal or family responsibilities, to consider themselves unavailable. Persons unavailable for work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". The availability question was only asked of persons who looked for work in the reference week. The second new question asked respondents if they had a new job to start at a future date. In addition to these new questions, a new processing restriction was applied. Persons on lay-off or with a new job, who were in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September, were considered unavailable for work. Therefore, in 1976, persons were considered unemployed if they were "on lay-off" or had a "new job to start in the future" and were not in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school. Persons who looked for work in the reference week and were available to work were also included in the Unemployed. In 1981, the reference period for the looking for work question was increased to the past four weeks instead of the reference week. The availability question was expanded to include more detailed response categories: already had a job; temporary illness or disability; personal or family responsibilities; going to school; or other reasons. Only persons who marked "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable for work. The new job to start at a future date question was reworded to specify that the job was to start within four weeks of the reference week. Persons on temporary lay-off were identified by a question which combined information on lay-off and absences from a job. The reference period for lay-off was extended to 26 weeks. As in 1976, persons on lay-off or with a new job to start were considered unavailable if they had been in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since September. Persons who looked for work and who responded "going to school" or "other reasons" were considered unavailable regardless of whether they were on lay-off or had a new job to start. In 1986, the reference period for temporary lay-off was removed and the phrase "from a job to which the person expects to return" was added to the questionnaire. The 1986 questionnaire did not include a question on school attendance. It was therefore not possible to apply the school attendance criteria to persons on lay-off or with a new job to start. In 1991, the questions asked to determine unemployment status were the same as those asked in 1986. In addition, a school attendance question was included on the questionnaire. The processing of unemployment data in 1991 was similar to that of 1981. There was, however, a change introduced for students in full-time attendance at elementary or secondary school at any time since last September. These persons were considered unavailable to work if they had looked for full-time work in the past four weeks. Not in the Labour Force The "Not in the Labour Force" category is a residual group. Persons who are not "Employed" or "Unemployed" fall into this category provided they are in the population for which labour force activity is relevant. The main differences for this group are the inclusion of institutional residents in 1976 and 1971 and the inclusion of persons not in the "Unemployed" category in 1976, 1981, 1986 and 1991 because they were considered unavailable for work. In 1971, female farm labourers who did less than 20 hours of unpaid work were classified as "Not in the Labour Force". Comparability With the Labour Force Survey Difference in Assignment of Labour Force Activity Status The census has attempted over the past years to bring its labour force definition more closely in line with that used by the monthly Labour Force Survey. Most changes to question wording have been made for this purpose. However, differences do exist between the two sources in the assignment of a labour force activity status. These differences are largely due to the nature of the questions asked. The census bases its labour force activity assignments on the responses to five questions, while the Labour Force Survey asks a far more extensive set of labour questions. Among the differences in questions asked are the following: The census asks one looking for work question with a reference period of the past four weeks. Persons who indicated that they did look for work were asked the availability question (Could you have started work last week?). The survey asks two looking for work questions. The first one refers to looking in the past six months and the second to searching in the past four weeks. The availability question is asked of everyone who searched in the past four weeks as well as persons who looked in the past six months but did not search in the past four weeks. The survey asks respondents if they attended school last week. In the 1991 Census, respondents were asked if they attended school in the past nine months (that is since last September). This information is used in determining availability to work along with the "Could you have started work last week?" question. The census and the Labour Force Survey differ in their determination of availability for work. The segment of the population most affected by this difference is full-time students. Coverage The Labour Force Survey excludes persons living on Indian reserves, full-time members of the Armed Forces, people living in institutions as well as persons residing in the Yukon or the Northwest Territories. Households of diplomatic or other Canadian government personnel outside Canada are also excluded. The census provides complete coverage of the Canadian population. However, in 1991, institutional residents were not asked the labour force activity questions. In addition, the 1991 Census enumerated non-permanent residents (persons who are student authorization holders, employment authorization holders, refugee claimants and Minister's permit holders). The Labour Force Survey excludes these persons. Enumeration Methods The Labour Force Survey is conducted by well-trained interviewers rather than the self-enumeration technique used in the census. Reference Periods The reference weeks for the May and June 1991 Labour Force Surveys were May 12 to 18 and June 9 to 15, while that for the 1991 Census was the week of May 27 to June 2. The Labour Force Survey collects information about the occupation and industry attachments of persons employed, unemployed and not in the labour force who held a job in the past five years. In the 1991 Census, only persons who had worked since January 1, 1990 were asked to provide industry and occupation information. Sample Size The labour force questions are contained on the long form census questionnaire which was distributed to persons in every fifth household in Canada. The May and June Labour Force Survey data are based on a sample of 62,000 households. Other Considerations Methods of collection, processing, editing and imputation in the Labour Force Survey can take advantage of data available from the previous month's questionnaire. 2067 LABOUR: WEEKS WORKED IN 1990 Refers to the number of weeks in 1990 during which a person worked, even if only for a few hours. It includes weeks of paid vacation or sick leave with pay or paid absence on training courses. "Work" excludes housework or other maintenance or repairs around the home and volunteer work. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 43 Responses: None or write-in entry of number of weeks Remarks: Any week in which the person worked, even if only for a few hours, was counted as a week of work. Respondents were instructed to enter 52 weeks if they were paid for a full year even though they worked less than a year (for example, a school teacher paid on a 12-month basis). In 1971, data for this variable included institutional residents, and were obtained in grouped form (none; 1-13; 14- 26; 27-39; 40-48; 49-52). * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. 2068 LABOUR: WHEN LAST WORKED Refers to the year or period in which a person last worked at all, even for a few days. "Work" excludes housework or other maintenance or repairs around the home and volunteer work. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 35 Responses: In 1991; In 1990; Before 1990; Never worked in lifetime Remarks: This question is used to identify persons with recent work experience. Persons who responded "In 1991" or "In 1990" make up the population who "worked since January 1, 1990". This is the population for whom occupation, industry and class of worker data are collected. Recent immigrants to Canada who had not yet found employment were instructed (if they inquired) to report the year in which they last worked in another country. The 1971 data for this variable included institutional residents. See also Figure 9 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 9 on page 64 for its original format. * See the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms for differences between 1961 and 1971. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 9. Population and Labour Force Activity Components, 1991 Census of Canada Population 15 years of age and over Institutional residents Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Total labour force Employed Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who / were: (4) or (5)) Last worked in 1990 (5) (consists of persons who were: (5)) Unemployed Experienced Last worked in 1991 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Last worked in 1990 (consists of persons who had/ were: (1) or (2) or (3)) Inexperienced Last worked before 1990 (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Never worked in lifetime (consists of persons who/ who had: (1) or (2)) Not in labour force Last worked in 1991 Last worked in 1990 Last worked before 1990 Never worked in lifetime ______________________ (1) Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought ______________________ (2) New job to start in four weeks or less Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (3) On temporary lay-off Did not look for work Looked for work in past four weeks Full-time work sought Part-time work sought _______________________ (4) Worked in reference week Civilian Armed Forces ______________________ (5) Absent from job or business in reference week Civilian Armed forces 2069 LABOUR: WORK ACTIVITY IN 1990 Refers to the number of weeks in which a person worked in 1990 and whether these weeks worked were full-time or part-time. Data are available for persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.:Derived variable: Questions 43 and 44 Responses: (Derived categories) Did not work in 1990 Worked 1-13 weeks full time; 1-13 weeks part time; 14-26 weeks full time; 14-26 weeks part time; 27-39 weeks full time; 27-39 weeks part time; 40-48 weeks full time; 40-48 weeks part time; 49-52 weeks full time; 49-52 weeks part time Remarks: The term full-year full-time workers refers to persons 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents, who worked 49-52 weeks full time in 1990. For further information, see the Labour: Weeks Worked in 1990 and Labour: Full-time or Part-time Weeks Worked in 1990 definitions. "Work Activity in 1980" was a new variable in 1981, although similar data can be derived from the 1971 Census database. 2070 LANGUAGE: FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE SPOKEN Refers to a variable specified within the framework of the implementation of the Official Languages Act . Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 7, 9 and 10 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: This variable was derived within the framework of the application of the Official Languages Act. The derivation method is described in the draft regulations respecting the use of official languages for the provision of public services. It takes into account, first, the knowledge of the two official languages; second, the mother tongue; and third, the home language. People who can conduct a conversation in French only are assigned French as their first official language spoken. People who can carry on a conversation in English only are assigned English as their first official language spoken. The responses to questions on mother tongue and home language are subsequently used to establish the first official language spoken by people who speak both English and French, or who cannot speak either of the two official languages. The French category includes people who speak French only, or French and at least one non-official language as their mother tongue. People who speak English only or English and at least one non-official language as their mother tongue are included in the English category. For cases that have not yet been classified, people are assigned to the French category when they speak French only or French and at least one non-official language as their home language. The procedure is the same for English. Thus, the population is classified into two principal categories: English or French. It is necessary to add two residual categories for people who cannot be classified in accordance with the information available: (a) English and French; and (b) neither English nor French. Please consult the following documents for more information: Draft Regulations Respecting the Use of One of the Two Official Languages in Communications With the Public and the Provision of Services to the Public, tabled on November 8, 1990, in accordance with section 85 of the Official Languages Act, R.S.C., c. 32 (4th suppl.); Population Estimates by First Official Language Spoken, Housing, Family and Social Statistics Division; and Language Studies, Statistics Canada, Reference No. 47013, September 1989. 2071 LANGUAGE: HOME LANGUAGE Refers to the language spoken most often at home by the individual at the time of the census. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 9 Responses: For more information see Figures 10, 10A, 10B and 10C. To view figures in their original format, see the User Documentation or Figures 10, 10A, 10B and 10C, pages 81 and 82, publication 92-301E. Remarks: The following changes were made to the question on home language. In 1991, the expression "speak most often at home" replaced "speak at home now", which was used in 1981 and 1986. The instruction on the questionnaire (If more than one language, which language do you speak most often?) was deleted. The boxes for the most common non-official languages were deleted, leaving the two official languages (i.e. English and French) as the only languages specifically referred to on the questionnaire. Other languages could be entered in the space provided. In 1991, the following instructions were provided to respondents: Report the language each person speaks most often at home. If you live alone, report the language in which you feel most comfortable. If two languages are used equally often, report both. For a child who has not yet learned a language, report the language used most often at home. If two languages are used equally often, report both. If deaf or mute, report the language used most often at home to communicate. If a person speaks an Indian language (from India), do not report Indian as the language spoken at home but rather the specific language such as Hindi, Urdu or Punjabi. If a person speaks an Amerindian (North American Indian) language, report the specific Amerindian language such as Cree or Ojibway. For comparability purposes, see a list of languages reported in 1981, 1986 and 1991, in the text below. ----------------------------------------- Mother Tongue and Home Language: Classifications from 1991, 1986 and 1981 ----------------------------------------- Changes have been made in the language classification used in our publications. In this appendix, the 1991, 1986 and 1981 classifications are compared. In 1986, languages were grouped by language family (Romance, Germanic and so on). In 1991, the Sino-Tibetan, Tai and Austro- Asiatic language families were added. In addition, some residual categories were added to existing language families (e.g., Germanic languages, n.i.e., Dravidian languages, n.i.e.). Finally, in 1991, several aboriginal languages identified in 1986 were included, because of their small numbers, in the category "Athapascan languages, n.i.e.". The individual categories used in 1991 do not always match those used in 1986 and 1981. In most cases, however, the corresponding number can be obtained by adding all members of the language family. For example, the 1986 total for Chinese is equivalent to the sum of the 1991 figures for "Chinese" and "Sino-Tibetan languages, n.i.e.". 1991 Classification 1986 Classification 1981 Classification English English English French French French Non-official languages Aboriginal languages Aboriginal languages Amerindian languages and Inuktitut(1) Algonquian languages Algonquian languages Algonkian languages Blackfoot Blackfoot Not available Cree Cree Cree Malecite Malecite Not available Micmac Micmac Not available Montagnais-Naskapi Montagnais-Naskapi Not available Ojibway Ojibway Ojibway Algonquian languages, Algonquian languages, Algonkian n.i.e n.i.e languages, n.o.s.,* n.e.s. Athapaskan languages Athapaskan languages Athapaskan languages (Dene) (Dene) Carrier Carrier Not available Chilcotin Chilcotin Not available Chipewyan Chipewyan Not available Dogrib Dogrib Not available Kutchin-Gwich'in Kutchin (Loucheux) Not available (Loucheux) North Slave (Hare) Hare* Not available South Slave Slave* Not available Not available Kaska (Nahani)(2) Not available Not available Tahltan(2) Not available Not available Tutchone(2) Not available Not available Yellowknife(2) Not available Athapaskan languages, Athapaskan languages, Not available n.i.e. n.i.e.* Haida Haida Haida languages Iroquoian languages Iroquoian languages Iroquoian languages Mohawk Mohawk Not available Iroquoian Iroquoian Not available languages, n.i.e. languages, n.i.e. Kutenai Kutenai Kootenayan languages Salish languages Salish languages Salishan languages Dakota Dakota Siouan languages Tlingit Tlingit Tlingit languages Tsimshian Tsimshian Tsimshian languages Wakashan languages Wakashan languages Wakashan languages Amerindian languages, Amerindian languages, Indian, n.o.s. * n.i.e. n.i.e. Inuktitut Inuktitut Inuktitut Romance languages Romance languages Not available Italian Italian Italian Portuguese Portuguese Portuguese Romanian Romanian Romanian Spanish Spanish Spanish Romance languages, Not available Not available n.i.e.(3) Germanic languages Germanic languages Not available German German German Yiddish Yiddish Yiddish Germanic languages, Not available Not available n.i.e.(4) Netherlandic Netherlandic Netherlandic languages languages languages Dutch Dutch Dutch Flemish Flemish Flemish Frisian Frisian Frisian Scandinavian Scandinavian Scandinavian languages languages languages Danish Danish Danish Icelandic Icelandic Icelandic Norwegian Norwegian Norwegian Swedish Swedish Swedish Celtic languages Celtic languages Celtic languages Gaelic languages Gaelic languages Gaelic Welsh Welsh Welsh Celtic languages, Celtic languages, Celtic languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. n.o.s.,* n.e.s. Slavic languages Slavic languages Not available Bulgarian Bulgarian Bulgarian Byelorussian Byelorussian Byelorussian Croatian Croatian Croatian Czech Czech Czech Macedonian Macedonian Macedonian Polish Polish Polish Russian Russian Russian Serbian Serbian Serbian Serbo-Croatian Serbo-Croatian Not available Slovak Slovak Slovak Slovenian Slovenian Slovenian Ukrainian Ukrainian Ukrainian Slavic languages, Slavic languages, Other European * n.i.e. n.i.e. Baltic languages Baltic languages Baltic languages Latvian (Lettish) Latvian (Lettish) Latvian (Lettish) Lithuanian Lithuanian Lithuanian Finno-Ugric languages Finno-Ugric languages Not available Estonian Estonian Estonian Finnish Finnish Finnish Hungarian Hungarian Magyar (Hungarian) Greek Greek Greek Armenian Armenian Armenian Turkic languages Turkic languages* Turkish Turkish Not available Not available Turkic languages, Not available Not available n.i.e. (5) Semitic languages Semitic languages Semitic languages Arabic Arabic Arabic Hebrew Hebrew Hebrew Maltese Maltese Not available Semitic languages, Semitic languages, Semitic languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. n.o.s.,* n.e.s. Indo-Iranian languages Indo-Iranian languages Indo-Pakistani languages* Baluchi Not available Not available Bengali Bengali Bengali Gujarati Not available Not available Hindi Hindi Hindi Kurdish Not available Not available Marathi Not available Not available Pashto Not available Not available Persian (Farsi) Persian (Farsi) Iranian(6) Punjabi Punjabi Punjabi Sinhalese Sinhalese Cingalese Urdu Urdu Urdu Indo-Iranian Indo-Iranian Indo-Pakistani languages, n.i.e. languages, n.i.e. n.o.s., n.e.s. Dravidian languages Dravidian languages* Not available Malayalam Malayalam Malayalam Tamil Tamil Tamil Telugu Telugu Telugu Dravidian languages, Not available Not available n.i.e.(7) Japanese Japanese Japanese Korean Korean Korean Sino-Tibetan Not available Not available languages Chinese Chinese* Chinese Sino-Tibetan Not available Not available languages n.i.e.(8) Tai languages Not available Not available Lao(9) Not available Not available Thai Thai* Kam-Tai Austro-Asiatic Not available Not available languages Khmer(Cambodian) Khmer(Cambodian)* Cambodian Vietnamese Vietnamese* Vietnamese Austro-Asiatic Not available Not available languages, n.i.e.(10) Malayo-Polynesian Malayo-Polynesian Malayo-Polynesian languages languages languages* Indonesian(Malay) Indonesian(Malay) Malay,Bahasa Tagalog(Pilipino) Tagalog(Pilipino) Philippino and Tagalog Malayo-Polynesian Malayo-Polynesian Malayo-Polynesian languages, n.i.e. languages, n.i.e. languages, n.o.s., n.e.s. Asiatic languages, Asiatic languages, Other Asiatic, n.i.e. n.i.e. n.o.s., n.e.s. Niger-Congo languages Niger-Congo languages Not available Bantu languages Bantu languages Not available Swahili Swahili Swahili Bantu languages, Bantu languages, Bantu, n.o.s., n.i.e. n.i.e. n.e.s. Niger-Congo languages, Niger-Congo languages, Niger-Congo n.i.e. n.i.e. languages African languages, African languages, African n.i.e. n.i.e. languages, n.o.s., n.e.s. Creoles Creoles Not available Other languages Other languages* Other* * Indicates a major change to the languages and/or dialects making up a specific category. Note n.i.e. = not included elsewhere n.o.s. = not otherwise specified n.e.s. = not elsewhere specified Footnotes (1) In 1981, the sum of the figures for Amerindian languages and Inuktitut is equivalent to the sum of the Aboriginal languages category in 1986 and 1991. (2) In 1991, these languages are included in the category "Athapaskan languages, n.i.e.". (3) Catalan, Occitan and Latin among others are included in this category. (4) This category includes Faeroese, Luxemburgish, Afrikaans and Alsatian. (5) In 1986, this category was coded with "Turkic languages". In 1991, it includes among others Azari and Azerbaijani. (6) In the 1981 publication, Iranian was not considered an Indo-Pakistani language. (7) Among the languages in this category are Kannada, Brahui and Kurukhi. (8) In 1986, this category was coded with "Chinese". In 1991, it includes among others Haka, Manipuri and Tibetan. (9) In 1986, Lao was coded with "Thai". (10) This category includes among others Mundari and Santali. ------------------------------------------------------- Figure 10. Mother Tongue, Home Language and Knowledge of Non-official Languages Total population, mother tongue and home language English French Non-official languages Aboriginal languages* Algonquian languages Athapaskan languages (Dene) Haida Iroquoian languages Kutenai Salish languages Dakota Tlingit Tsimshian Wakashan languages Amerindian languages, n.i.e. Inuktitut Romance languages Italian Portuguese Romanian Spanish Romance languages, n.i.e. Germanic languages* German Yiddish Netherlandic languages Scandinavian languages Germanic languages, n.i.e. Celtic languages Gaelic languages Welsh Celtic languages, n.i.e. Slavic languages Bulgarian Byelorussian Croatian Czech Macedonian Polish Russian Serbian Serbo-Croatian Slovak Slovenian Ukrainian Slavic languages, n.i.e. Baltic languages Latvian (Lettish) Lithuanian Finno-Ugric languages Estonian Finnish Hungarian Greek Armenian Turkic languages Turkish Turkic languages, n.i.e. Semitic languages Arabic Hebrew Maltese Semitic languages, n.i.e. Indo-Iranian languages Baluchi Bengali Gujarati Hindi Kurdish Marathi Pashto Persian (Farsi) Punjabi Sinhalese Urdu Indo-Iranian languages, n.i.e. Dravidian languages Malayalam Tamil Telugu Dravidian languages, n.i.e. Japanese Korean Sino-Tibetan languages Chinese Sino-Tibetan languages, n.i.e. Tai languages Lao Thai Austro-Asiatic languages Khmer (Cambodian) Vietnamese Austro-Asiatic languages, n.i.e. Malayo-Polynesian languages Indonesian (Malay) Tagalog (Pilipino) Malayo-Polynesian languages, n.i.e. Asiatic languages, n.i.e. Niger-Congo languages* Bantu languages Niger-Congo languages, n.i.e. African languages, n.i.e. Creoles Other languages** n.i.e. = not included elsewhere Note: Data will also be available for cases where the respondent will declare more than one language to Question 7 on Form 2A or Question 8, 9 or 10 on Form 2B. * For a detailed breakdown of Aboriginal, Germanic and Niger-Congo languages, see Figures 10A, 10B and 10C below. ** For knowledge of non-official languages, a category will be added for sign languages. _______________________________________________________________ Figure 10A. Aboriginal languages ____________________ Aboriginal languages Algonquian languages Blackfoot Cree Malecite Micmac Montagnais-Naskapi Ojibway Algonquian languages, n.i.e. Athapaskan languages (Dene) Carrier Chilcotin Chipewyan Dogrib Kutchin-Gwich'in (Loucheux) North Slave (Hare) South Slave Athapaskan languages, n.i.e. Haida Iroquoian languages Mohawk Iroquoian languages, n.i.e. Kutenai Salish languages Dakota Tlingit Tsimshian Wakashan languages Amerindian languages, n.i.e. Inuktitut n.i.e. = not included elsewhere _________________________________________________________ Figure 10B. Germanic Languages __________________ Germanic languages German Yiddish Netherlandic languages Dutch Flemish Frisian Scandinavian languages Danish Icelandic Norwegian Swedish Germanic languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. = not included elsewhere _____________________________________________________________ Figure 10C. Niger-Congo languages _____________________ Niger-Congo languages Bantu languages Swahili Bantu languages, n.i.e. Niger-Congo languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. = not included elsewhere 2072 LANGUAGE: KNOWLEDGE OF NON-OFFICIAL LANGUAGES Refers to the language or languages, other than English or French, in which the respondent can conduct a conversation. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 8 Responses: For more information see Figures 10, 10A, 10B and 10C below. To view figures in their original format, see the User Documentation or Figures 10, 10A, 10B and 10C, pages 81 and 82, publication 92-301E. Remarks: The non-official language data are based on the respondent assessment of his or her ability to speak non-official languages. In 1991, the following instructions were provided to respondents: If no languages other than English or French are spoken, mark the circle labelled None. Do not report a language learned at school unless a conversation of some length on various topics can be carried on in that language. For a child who has not yet learned a language, report a language other than English or French if used often at home. If deaf or mute, report a sign language if used. If a person speaks an Indian language (from India), do not report Indian but rather the specific language such as Hindi, Urdu or Punjabi. If a person speaks an Amerindian (North American Indian) language, report the specific Amerindian language such as Cree or Ojibway. This question was asked for the first time in the 1991 Census. See the non-official languages reported in 1991 in the text below. ______________________________________________________________ Knowledge of Non-official Languages: 1991 Classification This is the non-official language classification used for the 1991 Census. The classification, with the exception of English, French and sign languages, is the same as the one used in establishing mother tongue and home language. Non-official languages Germanic languages German Aboriginal languages Yiddish Germanic languages, n.i.e. Algonquian languages Netherlandic languages Blackfoot Dutch Cree Flemish Malecite Frisian Micmac Scandinavian languages Montagnais-Naskapi Danish Ojibway Icelandic Algonquian Norwegian languages, n.i.e. Swedish Athapaskan languages (Dene) Carrier Celtic languages Chilcotin Gaelic languages Chipewyan Welsh Dogrib Celtic languages, n.i.e. Kutchin-Gwich'in (Loucheux) North Slave (Hare) Slavic languages South Slave Bulgarian Athapaskan languages, Byelorussian n.i.e. Croatian Haida Czech Macedonian Iroquoian languages Polish Mohawk Russian Iroquoian languages, Serbian n.i.e. Serbo-Croatian Kutenai Slovak Salish languages Slovenian Dakota Ukrainian Tlingit Slavic languages, n.i.e. Tsimshian Wakashan languages Baltic languages Amerindian languages, Latvian (Lettish) n.i.e. Lithuanian Inuktitut Romance languages Finno-Ugric languages Italian Estonian Portuguese Finnish Romanian Hungarian Spanish Romance languages, n.i.e. Greek Tai languages Armenian Lao Tha Turkic languages Turkish Turkic languages, n.i.e. Austro-Asiatic languages Khmer (Cambodian) Semitic languages Vietnamese Arabic Austro-Asiatic languages, Hebrew n.i.e. Maltese Malayo-Polynesian languages Semitic languages, n.i.e. Indonesian (Malay) Tagalog (Pilipino) Indo-Iranian languages Malayo-Polynesian Baluchi languages n.i.e. Bengali Asiatic languages, n.i.e. Gujarati Hindi Niger-Congo languages Kurdish Bantu languages Marathi Swahili Pashto Bantu languages, n.i.e. Persian (Farsi) Niger-Congo languages, n.i.e. Punjabi Sinhalese African languages, n.i.e. Urdu Indo-Iranian languages, n.i.e. Creoles Dravidian languages Sign languages Malayalam Tamil Other languages Telugu Dravidian languages, n.i.e. Japanese Korean Sino-Tibetan languages Chinese Sino-Tibetan languages, n.i.e. Note: n.i.e. = not included elsewhere ------------------------------------------------------- Figure 10. Mother Tongue, Home Language and Knowledge of Non-official Languages Total population, mother tongue and home language English French Non-official languages Aboriginal languages* Algonquian languages Athapaskan languages (Dene) Haida Iroquoian languages Kutenai Salish languages Dakota Tlingit Tsimshian Wakashan languages Amerindian languages, n.i.e. Inuktitut Romance languages Italian Portuguese Romanian Spanish Romance languages, n.i.e. Germanic languages* German Yiddish Netherlandic languages Scandinavian languages Germanic languages, n.i.e. Celtic languages Gaelic languages Welsh Celtic languages, n.i.e. Slavic languages Bulgarian Byelorussian Croatian Czech Macedonian Polish Russian Serbian Serbo-Croatian Slovak Slovenian Ukrainian Slavic languages, n.i.e. Baltic languages Latvian (Lettish) Lithuanian Finno-Ugric languages Estonian Finnish Hungarian Greek Armenian Turkic languages Turkish Turkic languages, n.i.e. Semitic languages Arabic Hebrew Maltese Semitic languages, n.i.e. Indo-Iranian languages Baluchi Bengali Gujarati Hindi Kurdish Marathi Pashto Persian (Farsi) Punjabi Sinhalese Urdu Indo-Iranian languages, n.i.e. Dravidian languages Malayalam Tamil Telugu Dravidian languages, n.i.e. Japanese Korean Sino-Tibetan languages Chinese Sino-Tibetan languages, n.i.e. Tai languages Lao Thai Austro-Asiatic languages Khmer (Cambodian) Vietnamese Austro-Asiatic languages, n.i.e. Malayo-Polynesian languages Indonesian (Malay) Tagalog (Pilipino) Malayo-Polynesian languages, n.i.e. Asiatic languages, n.i.e. Niger-Congo languages* Bantu languages Niger-Congo languages, n.i.e. African languages, n.i.e. Creoles Other languages** n.i.e. = not included elsewhere Note: Data will also be available for cases where the respondent will declare more than one language to Question 7 on Form 2A or Question 8, 9 or 10 on Form 2B. * For a detailed breakdown of Aboriginal, Germanic and Niger-Congo languages, see Figures 10A, 10B and 10C below ** For knowledge of non-official languages, a category will be added for sign languages. _______________________________________________________________ Figure 10A. Aboriginal languages ____________________ Aboriginal languages Algonquian languages Blackfoot Cree Malecite Micmac Montagnais-Naskapi Ojibway Algonquian languages, n.i.e. Athapaskan languages (Dene) Carrier Chilcotin Chipewyan Dogrib Kutchin-Gwich'in (Loucheux) North Slave (Hare) South Slave Athapaskan languages, n.i.e. Haida Iroquoian languages Mohawk Iroquoian languages, n.i.e. Kutenai Salish languages Dakota Tlingit Tsimshian Wakashan languages Amerindian languages, n.i.e. Inuktitut n.i.e. = not included elsewhere _________________________________________________________ Figure 10B. Germanic Languages __________________ Germanic languages German Yiddish Netherlandic languages Dutch Flemish Frisian Scandinavian languages Danish Icelandic Norwegian Swedish Germanic languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. = not included elsewhere _____________________________________________________________ Figure 10C. Niger-Congo languages _____________________ Niger-Congo languages Bantu languages Swahili Bantu languages, n.i.e. Niger-Congo languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. = not included elsewhere 2073 LANGUAGE: KNOWLEDGE OF OFFICIAL LANGUAGES Refers to the ability to conduct a conversation in English only, in French only, in both English and French or in none of the official languages of Canada. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 7 Responses: English only; French only; Both English and French; Neither English nor French Remarks: The official language data are based on respondent assessment of his or her ability to speak the two official languages. In 1991, the following instructions were provided to respondents: Do not report English or French learned at school unless a conversation of some length on various topics can be carried on in that language. For a child who has not yet learned a language, report the language used at home if it is either English or French. If both languages are used often, mark the circle labelled Both English and French. If neither language is used often, mark Neither English nor French. If deaf or mute, report English, French or both provided that one or both of these languages is understood. 2074 LANGUAGE: MOTHER TONGUE Refers to the first language learned at home in childhood and still understood by the individual at the time of the census. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Reported for: Total population Question Nos.: Direct variable: Question 7 of Form 2A and Question 10 of Form 2B Responses: For more information see Figures 10, 10A, 10B and 10C below. To view figures in their original format, see the User Documentation or Figures 10, 10A, 10B and 10C, pages 81 and 82, publication 92-301E. Remarks: Mother tongue is the only language question on Form 2A. On Form 2B, four language questions were asked consecutively. The question on mother tongue appeared after the questions on language knowledge and the question on home language. In the wording of the question on mother tongue, the expression "at home" was added to specify the context in which the individual learned the language. In 1986, the three most frequently occurring non- official languages, from the preceding census, were listed on the questionnaire. In 1991, the boxes corresponding to those non-official languages were removed and only the two official languages, English and French, appeared on the questionnaire. Other languages could be written in the space provided. To facilitate the task of respondents, an instruction which appeared in the 1986 Census Guide was added to the questionnaire. The instruction read as follows: "If this person no longer understands the first language learned, indicate the second language learned." Furthermore, the following instructions were provided to respondents in the 1991 Census Guide: Report the first language learned at home before starting school. If this language is no longer understood, report the second language learned. If more than one language is understood, report the language first learned at home. If two languages were learned at the same time, report the language spoken most often as a child at home. If both languages were used equally often, report both. For a child who has not yet learned a language, report the first language this child will learn at home. If two languages will be learned at the same time, report the one which will be used most often to speak to this child. If both languages are used equally often, report both. If a person speaks an Indian language (from India), do not report Indian but rather the specific language such as Hindi, Urdu or Punjabi. If a person speaks an Amerindian (North American Indian) language, report the specific Amerindian language such as Cree or Ojibway. For comparability purposes of languages reported in 1981, 1986 and 1991, see text below. ----------------------------------------- Mother Tongue and Home Language: Classifications from 1991, 1986 and 1981 ----------------------------------------- Changes have been made in the language classification used in our publications. In this appendix, the 1991, 1986 and 1981 classifications are compared. In 1986, languages were grouped by language family (Romance, Germanic and so on). In 1991, the Sino-Tibetan, Tai and Austro- Asiatic language families were added. In addition, some residual categories were added to existing language families (e.g., Germanic languages, n.i.e., Dravidian languages, n.i.e.). Finally, in 1991, several aboriginal languages identified in 1986 were included, because of their small numbers, in the category "Athapascan languages, n.i.e.". The individual categories used in 1991 do not always match those used in 1986 and 1981. In most cases, however, the corresponding number can be obtained by adding all members of the language family. For example, the 1986 total for Chinese is equivalent to the sum of the 1991 figures for "Chinese" and "Sino-Tibetan languages, n.i.e.". 1991 Classification 1986 Classification 1981 Classification English English English French French French Non-official languages Aboriginal languages Aboriginal languages Amerindian languages and Inuktitut(1) Algonquian languages Algonquian languages Algonkian languages Blackfoot Blackfoot Not available Cree Cree Cree Malecite Malecite Not available Micmac Micmac Not available Montagnais-Naskapi Montagnais-Naskapi Not available Ojibway Ojibway Ojibway Algonquian languages, Algonquian languages, Algonkian n.i.e n.i.e languages, n.o.s.,* n.e.s. Athapaskan languages Athapaskan languages Athapaskan languages (Dene) (Dene) Carrier Carrier Not available Chilcotin Chilcotin Not available Chipewyan Chipewyan Not available Dogrib Dogrib Not available Kutchin-Gwich'in Kutchin (Loucheux) Not available (Loucheux) North Slave (Hare) Hare* Not available South Slave Slave* Not available Not available Kaska (Nahani)(2) Not available Not available Tahltan(2) Not available Not available Tutchone(2) Not available Not available Yellowknife(2) Not available Athapaskan languages, Athapaskan languages, Not available n.i.e. n.i.e.* Haida Haida Haida languages Iroquoian languages Iroquoian languages Iroquoian languages Mohawk Mohawk Not available Iroquoian Iroquoian Not available languages, n.i.e. languages, n.i.e. Kutenai Kutenai Kootenayan languages Salish languages Salish languages Salishan languages Dakota Dakota Siouan languages Tlingit Tlingit Tlingit languages Tsimshian Tsimshian Tsimshian languages Wakashan languages Wakashan languages Wakashan languages Amerindian languages, Amerindian languages, Indian, n.o.s. * n.i.e. n.i.e. Inuktitut Inuktitut Inuktitut Romance languages Romance languages Not available Italian Italian Italian Portuguese Portuguese Portuguese Romanian Romanian Romanian Spanish Spanish Spanish Romance languages, Not available Not available n.i.e.(3) Germanic languages Germanic languages Not available German German German Yiddish Yiddish Yiddish Germanic languages, Not available Not available n.i.e.(4) Netherlandic Netherlandic Netherlandic languages languages languages Dutch Dutch Dutch Flemish Flemish Flemish Frisian Frisian Frisian Scandinavian Scandinavian Scandinavian languages languages languages Danish Danish Danish Icelandic Icelandic Icelandic Norwegian Norwegian Norwegian Swedish Swedish Swedish Celtic languages Celtic languages Celtic languages Gaelic languages Gaelic languages Gaelic Welsh Welsh Welsh Celtic languages, Celtic languages, Celtic languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. n.o.s.,* n.e.s. Slavic languages Slavic languages Not available Bulgarian Bulgarian Bulgarian Byelorussian Byelorussian Byelorussian Croatian Croatian Croatian Czech Czech Czech Macedonian Macedonian Macedonian Polish Polish Polish Russian Russian Russian Serbian Serbian Serbian Serbo-Croatian Serbo-Croatian Not available Slovak Slovak Slovak Slovenian Slovenian Slovenian Ukrainian Ukrainian Ukrainian Slavic languages, Slavic languages, Other European * n.i.e. n.i.e. Baltic languages Baltic languages Baltic languages Latvian (Lettish) Latvian (Lettish) Latvian (Lettish) Lithuanian Lithuanian Lithuanian Finno-Ugric languages Finno-Ugric languages Not available Estonian Estonian Estonian Finnish Finnish Finnish Hungarian Hungarian Magyar (Hungarian) Greek Greek Greek Armenian Armenian Armenian Turkic languages Turkic languages* Turkish Turkish Not available Not available Turkic languages, Not available Not available n.i.e. (5) Semitic languages Semitic languages Semitic languages Arabic Arabic Arabic Hebrew Hebrew Hebrew Maltese Maltese Not available Semitic languages, Semitic languages, Semitic languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. n.o.s.,* n.e.s. Indo-Iranian languages Indo-Iranian languages Indo-Pakistani languages* Baluchi Not available Not available Bengali Bengali Bengali Gujarati Not available Not available Hindi Hindi Hindi Kurdish Not available Not available Marathi Not available Not available Pashto Not available Not available Persian (Farsi) Persian (Farsi) Iranian(6) Punjabi Punjabi Punjabi Sinhalese Sinhalese Cingalese Urdu Urdu Urdu Indo-Iranian Indo-Iranian Indo-Pakistani languages, n.i.e. languages, n.i.e. n.o.s., n.e.s. Dravidian languages Dravidian languages* Not available Malayalam Malayalam Malayalam Tamil Tamil Tamil Telugu Telugu Telugu Dravidian languages, Not available Not available n.i.e.(7) Japanese Japanese Japanese Korean Korean Korean Sino-Tibetan Not available Not available languages Chinese Chinese* Chinese Sino-Tibetan Not available Not available languages n.i.e.(8) Tai languages Not available Not available Lao(9) Not available Not available Thai Thai* Kam-Tai Austro-Asiatic Not available Not available languages Khmer(Cambodian) Khmer(Cambodian)* Cambodian Vietnamese Vietnamese* Vietnamese Austro-Asiatic Not available Not available languages, n.i.e.(10) Malayo-Polynesian Malayo-Polynesian Malayo-Polynesian languages languages languages* Indonesian(Malay) Indonesian(Malay) Malay,Bahasa Tagalog(Pilipino) Tagalog(Pilipino) Philippino and Tagalog Malayo-Polynesian Malayo-Polynesian Malayo-Polynesian languages, n.i.e. languages, n.i.e. languages, n.o.s., n.e.s. Asiatic languages, Asiatic languages, Other Asiatic, n.i.e. n.i.e. n.o.s., n.e.s. Niger-Congo languages Niger-Congo languages Not available Bantu languages Bantu languages Not available Swahili Swahili Swahili Bantu languages, Bantu languages, Bantu, n.o.s., n.i.e. n.i.e. n.e.s. Niger-Congo languages, Niger-Congo languages, Niger-Congo n.i.e. n.i.e. languages African languages, African languages, African n.i.e. n.i.e. languages, n.o.s., n.e.s. Creoles Creoles Not available Other languages Other languages* Other* * Indicates a major change to the languages and/or dialects making up a specific category. Note n.i.e. = not included elsewhere n.o.s. = not otherwise specified n.e.s. = not elsewhere specified Footnotes (1) In 1981, the sum of the figures for Amerindian languages and Inuktitut is equivalent to the sum of the Aboriginal languages category in 1986 and 1991. (2) In 1991, these languages are included in the category "Athapaskan languages, n.i.e.". (3) Catalan, Occitan and Latin among others are included in this category. (4) This category includes Faeroese, Luxemburgish, Afrikaans and Alsatian. (5) In 1986, this category was coded with "Turkic languages". In 1991, it includes among others Azari and Azerbaijani. (6) In the 1981 publication, Iranian was not considered an Indo-Pakistani language. (7) Among the languages in this category are Kannada, Brahui and Kurukhi. (8) In 1986, this category was coded with "Chinese". In 1991, it includes among others Haka, Manipuri and Tibetan. (9) In 1986, Lao was coded with "Thai". (10) This category includes among others Mundari and Santali. ------------------------------------------------------- Figure 10. Mother Tongue, Home Language and Knowledge of Non-official Languages Total population, mother tongue and home language English French Non-official languages Aboriginal languages* Algonquian languages Athapaskan languages (Dene) Haida Iroquoian languages Kutenai Salish languages Dakota Tlingit Tsimshian Wakashan languages Amerindian languages, n.i.e. Inuktitut Romance languages Italian Portuguese Romanian Spanish Romance languages, n.i.e. Germanic languages* German Yiddish Netherlandic languages Scandinavian languages Germanic languages, n.i.e. Celtic languages Gaelic languages Welsh Celtic languages, n.i.e. Slavic languages Bulgarian Byelorussian Croatian Czech Macedonian Polish Russian Serbian Serbo-Croatian Slovak Slovenian Ukrainian Slavic languages, n.i.e. Baltic languages Latvian (Lettish) Lithuanian Finno-Ugric languages Estonian Finnish Hungarian Greek Armenian Turkic languages Turkish Turkic languages, n.i.e. Semitic languages Arabic Hebrew Maltese Semitic languages, n.i.e. Indo-Iranian languages Baluchi Bengali Gujarati Hindi Kurdish Marathi Pashto Persian (Farsi) Punjabi Sinhalese Urdu Indo-Iranian languages, n.i.e. Dravidian languages Malayalam Tamil Telugu Dravidian languages, n.i.e. Japanese Korean Sino-Tibetan languages Chinese Sino-Tibetan languages, n.i.e. Tai languages Lao Thai Austro-Asiatic languages Khmer (Cambodian) Vietnamese Austro-Asiatic languages, n.i.e. Malayo-Polynesian languages Indonesian (Malay) Tagalog (Pilipino) Malayo-Polynesian languages, n.i.e. Asiatic languages, n.i.e. Niger-Congo languages* Bantu languages Niger-Congo languages, n.i.e. African languages, n.i.e. Creoles Other languages** n.i.e. = not included elsewhere Note: Data will also be available for cases where the respondent will declare more than one language to Question 7 on Form 2A or Question 8, 9 or 10 on Form 2B. * For a detailed breakdown of Aboriginal, Germanic and Niger-Congo languages, see Figures 10A, 10B and 10C below. ** For knowledge of non-official languages, a category will be added for sign languages. _______________________________________________________________ Figure 10A. Aboriginal languages ____________________ Aboriginal languages Algonquian languages Blackfoot Cree Malecite Micmac Montagnais-Naskapi Ojibway Algonquian languages, n.i.e. Athapaskan languages (Dene) Carrier Chilcotin Chipewyan Dogrib Kutchin-Gwich'in (Loucheux) North Slave (Hare) South Slave Athapaskan languages, n.i.e. Haida Iroquoian languages Mohawk Iroquoian languages, n.i.e. Kutenai Salish languages Dakota Tlingit Tsimshian Wakashan languages Amerindian languages, n.i.e. Inuktitut n.i.e. = not included elsewhere _________________________________________________________ Figure 10B. Germanic Languages __________________ Germanic languages German Yiddish Netherlandic languages Dutch Flemish Frisian Scandinavian languages Danish Icelandic Norwegian Swedish Germanic languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. = not included elsewhere _____________________________________________________________ Figure 10C. Niger-Congo languages _____________________ Niger-Congo languages Bantu languages Swahili Bantu languages, n.i.e. Niger-Congo languages, n.i.e. n.i.e. = not included elsewhere 2075 MARITAL STATUS (LEGAL) Refers to the conjugal status of a person. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966,* 1961* Reported for: Total population Question No.: Direct variable: Question 5 Responses: Legally married (and not separated); Legally married and separated; Divorced; Widowed; Never married (single) Remarks: The various responses are defined as follows: Legally married (and not separated) Persons whose husband or wife is living, unless the couple is separated or a divorce has been obtained. Legally married and separated Persons who have been deserted or who have parted because they no longer want to live together, but have not obtained a divorce. Divorced Persons who have obtained a legal divorce and who have not remarried. Widowed Persons who have lost their spouse through death and who have not remarried. Never married (single) Persons who have never married (including all persons less than 15 years of age) and persons whose marriage has been annulled and who have not remarried. Data for persons in common-law unions, classified by legal marital status, are available for 1991. In 1986 and 1981, such persons were included among the "Now married" population. Historical comparability can be maintained for the 1991 data by including persons in common-law unions with the "Legally married (and not separated)" population. * "Separated" persons were included with "married" persons in 1966 and 1961. 2076 MOBILITY 1: COUNTRY OF RESIDENCE 1 YEAR AGO Refers to the person's usual country of residence on June 4, 1990, one year prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (1 Year Ago) subuniverse only. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 1 year of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Direct variable: Question 20 Responses: The one-year ago mobility question requests a write- in response of name of "country" which is subsequently converted to a three-digit code corresponding to the place of birth classification. Remarks: Respondents who indicated that they had lived outside Canada (external migrants) were asked to indicate the name of their country of residence one year earlier according to that country's present boundaries. Country of Residence 1 Year Ago is not applicable to internal migrants, non-migrants and non-movers. There is no corresponding "current country of residence" variable since persons residing in Canada one year ago but not on Census Day are not counted. See also "Remarks" under Mobility 1: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 1 Year Ago and the figure below. See User Documentation or catalogue # 92-301E, Figure 11 on page 85 for its original format. _______________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2077 MOBILITY 1: MOBILITY STATUS - PLACE OF RESIDENCE 1 YEAR AGO Refers to the relationship between a person's usual place of residence on Census Day and his or her usual place of residence one year earlier. A person is classified as a non-mover if no difference exists; otherwise, a person is classed as a mover and this categorization is called Mobility Status (1 Year Ago). Within the category movers, a further distinction is made between intraprovincial movers, interprovincial migrants and external migrants. Non-movers are persons who, on Census Day, were living at the same address which they occupied one year earlier. Movers are persons who, on Census Day, were living at a different address than the one at which they resided one year earlier. Intraprovincial movers are movers who, on Census Day, were living at a different address but in the same province/territory that they occupied one year earlier. Interprovincial migrants are movers who, on Census Day, were living in a different province/territory one year earlier. External migrants are movers who, on Census Day, were living outside Canada one year earlier. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 1 year of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Derived variable: Question 20 Responses: Lived at the same address as now; Lived in the same province/territory, but at a different address; Lived in a different province/territory in Canada (respondent provides name of the province/territory); Lived outside Canada (respondent writes in name of other country) Remarks: This is a new mobility variable for 1991, which is based on place of residence one year ago. Like the Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago variable, the one year ago variable determines whether or not a person is a mover, that is whether or not the person lived at a different address one year earlier. Unlike the Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago variable, place of residence one year ago is restricted to the provincial level. Therefore, with the one year ago variable, it is not possible to determine if a mover is a migrant or non-migrant in terms of whether or not, on Census Day, the mover lived in a different census subdivision (CSD) five years earlier. The only differentiation that can be made between movers is whether or not, on Census Day, the mover lived in a different province one year earlier. Thus, one-year ago movers can be classified as either "intraprovincial movers" or "interprovincial migrants". The category of intraprovincial movers consists of both non-migrants and migrants (in terms of same or different CSD one year ago), but it is not possible to differentiate between the migrant and non-migrant movers with the one year ago question. For further details on migration status, see Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. For persons 15 years of age and over who failed to provide an answer, Mobility Status (1 Year Ago) was imputed according to the following order of priority: (i) deterministic fix, (ii) on the basis of information reported for other family members, (iii) from another respondent who had the same demographic profile according to selected variables, and finally (iv) default imputation, which involved an arbitrary assignment. For persons 1 to 14 years of age, mobility information was imputed on the basis of responses given by some other family members. For non-family persons (not resident in a collective dwelling), imputation was made on the basis of information reported by Person 1 in that household. For non- family persons residing in a collective dwelling, Mobility Status (1 Year Ago) was assigned from another respondent who had the same values for selected variables. With respect to external migration, immigrants - persons who were residing outside Canada one year earlier but within Canada on Census Day - are counted. This is not to be confused with "landed immigrants"; see Immigration: Year of Immigration. When tabulating migration data on external migrants by country of residence one year ago, the reported country reflects its current geographic boundaries. Emigrants - persons residing in Canada one year ago but not on Census Day - are not counted. With respect to internal migration, users should note that province/territory is the migration- defining unit for the one-year migration interval. In-migration, out-migration, net internal migration, migration streams and origin-destination matrices can be produced from the database. In-migration is defined as a movement into a province or territory from elsewhere in Canada, relative to the one-year migration interval. Persons who made such a move are called in-migrants. Out-migration is defined as a movement out of a province or territory to elsewhere in Canada, relative to the one-year migration interval. Persons who made such a move are called out- migrants. Net internal migration refers to the number of in- migrants into a province or territory minus the number of out-migrants from the same province/territory relative to the one-year migration interval. Migration stream refers to a body of migrants having a common province or territory of origin and a common province or territory of destination. Origin-destination matrix refers to data on migrants, cross-classified by area of origin (province/territory) and area of destination (province/territory) to form a matrix of streams, or a set of pairs of streams, each pair representing movement in opposite directions. For further details, see the mobility variables Mobility 1: Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago and Mobility 1: Country of Residence 1 Year Ago. It should be noted that data are not published for all possible mobility and migration classifications, but are available upon special request subject to confidentiality constraints. The relationship between the 1991 Census question on place of residence 1 year ago and the Mobility Status (1 Year Ago) conceptual framework is illustrated in Figure 12 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 12 in the User Documentation or to Figure 12 in publication 92-301E, page 88, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census _______________________________________________________________ Figure 12. Relationship Between the Mobility Status - Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Conceptual Framework and the 1991 Census Question on Place of Residence 1 Year Ago PART 1: 1991 CENSUS QUESTION 20 Where did this person live 1 year ago, that is, on June 4, 1990? Mark one circle () only. (See Part 2) () Lived at the same address as now: [1] () Lived in the same province/territory, but at a different address: [2,3] () Lived in a different province/territory in Canada Print name of province/territory____________: [2,4,5] () Lived outside Canada Print name of country_________: [2,4,6] _____________________________ PART 2: CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK Mobility Status [1] Non-mover [2] Mover [3] Intraprovincial Mover [4] Provincial/External Migrant [5] Interprovincial Migrant [6] External Migrant 2078 MOBILITY 1: PROVINCE/TERRITORY OF RESIDENCE 1 YEAR AGO Refers to the person's usual province or territory of residence on June 4, 1990, one year prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (1 Year Ago) subuniverse only . Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 1 year of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Direct variable: Question 20 Responses: The one-year ago mobility question requests a write- in response of name of "province or territory" which is subsequently converted to a two-digit code according to the Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) - see the section on geography. Remarks: Respondents who indicated that they had lived in a different province or territory one year ago provided the name of the province or territory. These persons are classified as interprovincial migrants. For non-movers and intraprovincial migrants, province or territory of residence 1 year ago is the same as current province or territory of residence. Province or Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago is not applicable to external migrants. For the corresponding current province/territory of residence, refer to the variables Province and Territory in the section on geography. See also "Remarks" under Mobility 1: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 1 Year Ago, and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2079 MOBILITY 5: CENSUS DIVISION OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the person's usual census division (CD) of residence on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Direct variable: Question 22 Responses: The five-year ago mobility question requests a write-in response of name of "municipality, county and province" which is subsequently converted to a seven-digit code according to the Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) - see the section on geography. The four-digit census division code is a substring of the seven-digit SGC code. The four-digit code corresponds to a two-digit province/territory code followed by a two-digit census division code. Remarks: Respondents who indicated that they lived in a different "city, town, village, township, municipality or Indian reserve in Canada" five years ago (internal migrants) provided the name of the place, county and province. The municipality and county correspond to the census subdivision (CSD) and census division (CD) respectively. Migrants whose CSD of residence five years ago is in the same CD as the current CSD of residence are classified as intra-CD migrants. The CD of residence five years ago reflects 1991 Census boundaries. For non-movers and non-migrants, census division of residence 5 years ago is the same as current census division of residence. Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago is not applicable to external migrants. For the corresponding current CD of residence and a definition of CD, refer to the variable Census Division (CD) in the section on geography. See also "Remarks" under Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago, and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2080 MOBILITY 5: CENSUS METROPOLITAN AREA OR CENSUS AGGLOMERATION OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the census metropolitan area (CMA), census agglomeration (CA), or non-CMA/CA where the person usually resided on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Derived variable: Question 22 Responses: This is a derived variable which provides a CMA/CA code for persons whose census subdivision (CSD) of residence five years ago is a CMA/CA component, or a value of zero (0) if it is not. For information on the linkage of CMA/CA names to codes and CSD components, refer to the 1991 Standard Geographical Classification Manual, Volume 1, Catalogue No. 12-571. Remarks: As with census subdivisions (CSDs) and census divisions (CDs), the CMA/CA of residence five years ago reflects 1991 Census boundaries. Migrants whose CSD of residence five years ago is within the same CMA/CA as the current CSD (based on 1991 boundaries) are classified as intra-CMA/CA migrants. Migrants whose current CSD of residence (June 4, 1991) is in a different CMA/CA of residence from that of five years ago are classified as inter- CMA/CA migrants. Persons who resided in a CMA/CA five years ago with a current residence (June 4, 1991) elsewhere (a different CMA/CA or outside a CMA/CA) in Canada (June 4, 1991) are out-migrants from that CMA/CA. Persons whose current residence is within a CMA/CA (on June 4, 1991) with a place of residence five years ago elsewhere in Canada (CMA/CA or outside CMA/CA) are in-migrants to that CMA/CA. For the corresponding current CMA/CA of residence and a definition of CMA/CA, refer to the variables Census Metropolitan Area (CMA) and Census Agglomeration (CA) in the section on geography. See also "Remarks" under Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2081 MOBILITY 5: CENSUS SUBDIVISION OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the person's usual municipality or census subdivision (CSD) of residence on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Direct variable: Question 22 Responses: The five-year ago mobility question requests a write-in response of name of "municipality, county and province" which is subsequently converted to a seven-digit code according to the Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) - see the section on geography. This code consists of two digits for the province/territory, followed by two digits for the census division and ending with three digits for the census subdivision. Remarks: Respondents who indicated that they had lived in a different "city, town, village, township, municipality or Indian reserve in Canada" five years ago (internal migrants) provided the name of the municipality, county and province. The municipality and county correspond to the census subdivision (CSD) and census division (CD) respectively. The CSD of residence five years ago reflects 1991 Census boundaries. At the CSD level, users are advised to exercise caution in the use of data on migrants, particularly for suburban municipalities within large metropolitan areas. Counts for total migrants, including in- and out-migrants, could be distorted due to suspected types of misresponse such as: (a) respondents in metropolitan areas reporting the main city rather than the municipality they actually lived in five years earlier (e.g., reported Toronto instead of Scarborough); (b) respondents failing to indicate a move from a different CSD if they perceived that they were still in the same main city (e.g., moved from Toronto to Scarborough but indicated that they still lived in the same municipality); and (c) respondents reporting moves according to out-of-date boundaries. For non-movers and non-migrants, census subdivision of residence 5 years ago is the same as current census subdivision of residence. Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago is not applicable to external migrants. For the corresponding current CSD of residence and a definition of CSD, refer to the variable Census Subdivision (CSD) in the section on geography. See also "Remarks" under Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2082 MOBILITY 5: CENSUS SUBDIVISION TYPE OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the census subdivision (CSD) type classification of the CSD (Indian reserve, village, town, township, city or municipality) where the person usually resided on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only . Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Derived variable: Question 22, CSD type Responses: 1991 CSD type classification Remarks: The type indicates the municipal status of a census subdivision. Census subdivisions are classified into various types, according to official designations adopted by provincial or federal authorities. For a listing of CSD types, see Figure 23B at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23B in the User Documentation or to Figure 23B in publication 92-301E, page 174, to view this figure in its original format. For more details on CSD type, see "Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications" in the section on geography. The CSD type of residence 5 years ago reflects the current 1991 boundaries and municipal status. This new variable for 1991 will allow analysis of migration flows to and from various CSD types. For example, data on mobility and migration may be retrieved for Indian reserves, northern villages, hamlets, etc. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23B. Census Subdivision Types by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 BOR : Borough 1 - - - - - C : City - Cit‚ 141 3 1 3 6 2 CM : County (municipality) 30 - - - - - COM : Community 184 139 45 - - - CT : Canton (municipalit‚ de) 103 - - - - 103 CU : Cantons unis (municipalit‚ de) 10 - - - - 10 DM : District municipality 48 - - - - - HAM : Hamlet 38 - - - - - ID : Improvement district 22 - - - - - IGD : Indian government district 2 - - - - - LGD : Local government district 21 - - - - - LOT : Township and royalty 68 - 68 - - - MD : Municipal district 35 - - 12 - - NH : Northern hamlet 14 - - - - - NV : Northern village 10 - - - - - P : Paroisse (municipalit‚ de) 406 - - - - 406 PAR : Parish 151 - - - 151 - R : Indian reserve - R‚serve indienne 917 1 4 23 19 27 RM : Rural municipality 403 - - - - - RV : Resort village 40 - - - - - SA : Special area 3 - - - - - SCM : Subdivision of county municipality 41 - - 41 - - SD : Sans d‚signation (municipalit‚) 485 - - - - 485 S-E : Indian settlement - tablissement indien 27 - - - - 3 SET : Settlement 35 - - - - - SRD : Subdivision of regional district 70 - - - - - SUN : Subdivision of unorganized 90 90 - - - - SV : Summer village 54 - - - - - T : Town 706 171 8 39 27 - TP : Township 475 - - - - - TR : Terres r‚serv‚es 9 - - - - 9 UNO : Unorganized - Non organis‚ 155 - - - - 117 V : Ville 255 - - - - 255 VC : Village cri 8 - - - - 8 VK : Village naskapi 1 - - - - 1 VL : Village 934 - - - 84 197 VN : Village nordique 14 - - - - 14 Figure 23B Census Subdivision Types by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 BOR : Borough 1 - - - - - - C : City - Cit‚ 51 5 13 16 39 1 1 CM : County (municipality) - - - 30 - - - COM : Community - - - - - - - CT : Canton (municipalit‚ de) - - - - - - - CU : Cantons unis (municipalit‚ de) - - - - - - - DM : District municipality - - - - 48 - - HAM : Hamlet - - - - - 3 35 ID : Improvement district 3 - - 19 - - - IGD : Indian government district - - - - 2 - - LGD : Local government district - 21 - - - - - LOT : Township and royalty - - - - - - - MD : Municipal district - - - 23 - - - NH : Northern hamlet - - 14 - - - - NV : Northern village - - 10 - - - - P : Paroisse (municipalit‚ de) - - - - - - - PAR : Parish - - - - - - - R : Indian reserve - R‚serve indienne 128 74 104 63 468 4 2 RM : Rural municipality - 105 298 - - - - RV : Resort village - - 40 - - - - SA : Special area - - - 3 - - - SCM : Subdivision of county municipality - - - - - - - SD : Sans d‚signation (municipalit‚) - - - - - - - S-E : Indian settlement - tablissement indien 9 4 1 - 3 7 - SET : Settlement - - - - - 13 22 SRD : Subdivision of regional district - - - - 70 - - SUN : Subdivision of unorganized - - - - - - - SV : Summer village - - - 54 - - - T : Town 148 35 146 109 15 3 5 TP : Township 475 - - - - - - TR : Terres r‚serv‚es - - - - - - - UNO : Unorganized - Non organis‚ 20 10 2 - - 1 5 V : Ville - - - - - - - VC : Village cri - - - - - - - VK : Village naskapi - - - - - - - VL : Village 116 39 325 121 46 4 2 VN : Village nordique - - - - - - - 2083 MOBILITY 5: COUNTRY OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the person's usual country of residence on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Direct variable: Question 22 Responses: The five-year ago mobility question requests a write-in response of name of "country" which is subsequently converted to a three-digit code corresponding to the place of birth classification. Remarks: Respondents who indicated that they had lived outside Canada (external migrants) were asked to indicate the name of their country of residence five years earlier according to that country's present boundaries. Country of Residence 5 Years Ago is not applicable to internal migrants, non-migrants or non-movers. There is no corresponding "current country of residence" variable since persons residing in Canada five years ago but not on Census Day are not counted. See also "Remarks" under Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. _______________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2084 MOBILITY 5: MOBILITY STATUS - PLACE OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the relationship between a person's usual place of residence on Census Day and his or her usual place of residence five years earlier. A person is classified as a non-mover if no difference exists; otherwise, a person is classed as a mover and this categorization is called Mobility Status (5 Years Ago). Within the category movers, a further distinction is made between non-migrants and migrants; this difference is called migration status. Non-movers are persons who, on Census Day, were living at the same address which they occupied five years earlier. Movers are persons who, on Census Day, were living at a different address than the one at which they resided five years earlier. Non-migrants are movers who, on Census Day, were living at a different address but in the same census subdivision (CSD) that they occupied five years earlier. Migrants are movers who, on Census Day, were residing in a different CSD five years earlier (internal migrants) or who were living outside Canada five years earlier (external migrants). Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 21 and 22 Responses: Lived at the same address as now; Lived at a different address but in the same census subdivision (CSD) as now; Lived in a different CSD in Canada (respondent provides name of CSD [municipality], county [if known] and province or territory); Lived outside Canada (respondent gives name of the country) Remarks: Although the conceptual framework of Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) has not changed since 1986, some modifications have been introduced to the mobility question for 1991. An initial question (Question 21) filters out non-movers, and the term "address" replaces "dwelling" in the response categories. For information on historical comparability of Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago, from 1961 on, see the text at end of this definition. For persons 15 years of age and over who failed to provide an answer, Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) was imputed according to the following order of priority: (i) deterministic fix, (ii) on the basis of information reported for other family members, (iii) from another respondent who had the same demographic profile according to selected variables, and finally (iv) default imputation, which involved an arbitrary assignment. For persons 5 to 14 years of age, mobility information was imputed on the basis of responses given by some other family members. For non-family members (not resident in a collective dwelling), imputation was made on the basis of information reported by Person 1 in that household. For non- family members residing in a collective dwelling, Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) was assigned from another respondent who had the same values for selected variables. With respect to external migration, immigrants - persons who were residing outside Canada five years earlier but within Canada on Census Day - are counted. This is not to be confused with "landed immigrants"; see Immigration: Year of Immigration. When tabulating migration data on external migrants by country of residence five years ago, the reported country reflects its current geographic boundaries. Emigrants - persons residing in Canada five years ago but not on Census Day - are not counted. With respect to internal migration, different types of migration are derived based on various aggregations of CSDs (e.g., to CDs, CMAs). In-migration, out-migration, net internal migration, migration streams and origin-destination matrices can be produced from the database. In-migration is defined as a movement into a CSD (or CSD aggregation) from elsewhere in Canada, relative to the five-year migration interval. Persons who made such a move are called in-migrants. Out-migration is defined as a movement out of a CSD (or CSD aggregation) to elsewhere in Canada, relative to the five-year migration interval. Persons who made such a move are called out-migrants. Net internal migration refers to the number of in- migrants into a CSD (or CSD aggregation) minus the number of out-migrants from the same CSD (or CSD aggregation) relative to the five-year migration interval. Migration stream refers to a body of migrants having a common CSD (or CSD aggregation) of origin and a common CSD (or CSD aggregation) of destination. Origin-destination matrix refers to data on migrants, cross-classified by area of origin (CSD or CSD aggregation) and area of destination (CSD or CSD aggregation) to form a matrix of streams, or a set of pairs of streams, each pair representing movement in opposite directions. The concept of "migrants" is defined at the CSD level. For geographic levels below the CSD, such as enumeration areas (EAs) and census tracts (CTs), the distinction between the migrant and non-migrant population refers to the corresponding CSD of the EA or CT. For example, migrants of a CT are those persons who moved from a different CSD, while non- migrants are those who moved within the same CSD - they moved either between different CTs or within the same CT. When tabulating usual place of residence five years ago by current place of residence, all geographic areas reflect their 1991 boundaries, even when referred to as places of residence in 1986. This applies to all boundary changes between censuses (e.g., census metropolitan areas, census divisions, census subdivisions). For further details, see the following Mobility 5 variables: Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago, Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago, Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago, Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago, Country of Residence 5 Years Ago, Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence, Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago, Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago, Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago. See the section on geography for corresponding current places (e.g., province, census division) of residence, geographic definitions and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. It should be noted that data are not published for all possible mobility and migration classifications, but are available upon special request, subject to confidentiality constraints. The reader is directed to Figure 13 below, where the relationship between the 1991 Census question on place of residence 5 years earlier and the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) conceptual framework is illustrated. Refer to Figure 13 in the User Documentation or in publication 92-301E, page 96 to view the figure in its original format. --------------------- Comparibility of Mobility Data with Those of Previous Censuses The following is a brief summary of the historical comparability of census mobility data, from the place of residence five years ago question. More detailed information (including references to the 1941 and 1946 Censuses) is available in two user guides: A User's Guide to the 1976 Census Data on Mobility Status, uncatalogued working paper, May 1980, and User's Guide to 1986 Census Data on Mobility, November 1990, both available through Statistics Canada. A. Conceptual Changes Mobility data from the mobility status question on place of residence five years ago, which has not differed significantly from the five-year questions of previous censuses, are generally comparable from 1961 on. The question has been based on a five-year reference interval and the census subdivision (CSD) has been used as the migration-defining unit. While the five-year census mobility data are generally comparable from 1961 to 1991, there are some conceptual differences users should be aware of. * In 1991, the term "address" replaced the term "dwelling". The latter term had been used in all previous censuses since 1961. The current term "address" is used in the context of address of usual residence, not mailing address. * From 1976 on, the primary classification of the population was made on the basis of mobility status (movers, non-movers) while, in some of the earlier censuses, the primary classification was based on migration status (migrants, non-migrants). * There are also changes in related factors, such as question content, which users should be aware of when analysing mobility data. Factors Affecting Conceptual Comparability A number of factors affect historical data comparability of mobility in relation to the conceptual framework. Some of the areas in which changes have occurred are: coverage, question content and stucture, and geographic framework. (a) Changes in coverage and universe From 1961 on, the universe for mobility status has included the population 5 years of age and over, with exclusions, which have varied from census to census. * In 1961, mobility status was reported for the population aged 5 years and over residing in private households, excluding residents in collectives, temporary residents, overseas military and government personnel and their families and persons located after the regular census through postal check or re-enumeration. In 1971 and 1976, the universes of population 5 years of age and over excluded Canadian residents stationed abroad in the Armed Forces or in diplomatic services. * From 1981 on, the mobility universe comprises the population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadian military government personnel and their families posted abroad, in households outside Canada. This is in contrast to 1971 and 1976 data which did include institutional residents. (b) Changes in question content and structure * From 1961 to 1986, the previous country of residence was not collected for respondents indicating a place of residence outside Canada five years earlier. In 1991, respondents who indicated that they had lived outside Canada five years ago were asked to provide the name of the country. * From 1971 on, internal migrants were asked only to specify the name of their CSD of residence 5 years ago, whereas in previous censuses migrants were also asked whether or not their earlier residence was a farm. * A question on the number of intermunicipal moves was asked only in 1971. * In 1986 and 1991, emphasis was placed on ensuring that Indian reserves were accurately reported in mobility categories. From 1986 on, the answer categories refer to "city, town, village, township, other municipality or Indian reserve" compared to "city, town, village, borough or municipality" in 1981 and "city, town, village, municipality" in 1971 and 1976. * Instructions in the question referring to write-ins of place names were the same between 1971 and 1976, but they were expanded in 1981 to include examples. The 1981 instruction was repeated in 1986. In 1991, the instruction was revised with new wording and examples. * In 1991, revisions were made to both the structure and wording of the place of residence five years ago question. In addition to the rewording of instructions and the replacement of the term "dwelling" with "address", a filter question was introduced to serve as a screen for movers and non- movers. As well, answer categories were reworded and shortened. With these revisions, the basic content is still the same as the five-year questions of previous censuses, such that, in general, historical comparability is retained. (c) Changes in geographic framework * Comparability of mobility data over the censuses has been affected by both conceptual changes in geography (such as definitions of rural, urban, farm, non-farm, census metropolitan areas) and changes in census subdivision (CSD), census division (CD), census metropolitan area (CMA) and census agglomeration (CA) boundaries. Because the number of census geographic areas (e.g., CSDs, CMAs, etc.) and their boundaries change from census to census, the user must exercise caution when using mobility data over two or more censuses. For example, in 1986 there were 6,009 CSDs, 114 CAs and 25 CMAs compared to 5,710 CSDs, 88 CAs and 24 CMAs in 1981. The changing number and boundaries of CSDs from one census to another will, to some extent, affect the comparability of the measure of "migrants" across censuses (since the volume of migrants is partly a function of the number and size of CSDs). Details of changes affecting the historical comparability of census geography from 1961 to 1986, as well as definitions and descriptions of available maps, are covered in a variety of census products. * Because of changes in geographic areas between censuses, places of residence five years ago must reflect boundaries of the census in question in order to obtain geographic consistency between current and previous place of residence. For example, when tabulating 1991 data on usual place of residence five years ago by current place of residence, all areas reflect 1991 boundaries, even when referred to as places of residence in 1986. B. Collection and Processing Changes The changes over censuses associated with each of the stages in collection and processing have not significantly affected the comparability of mobility and migration data. However, there are some changes in processing that the user should be aware of when analysing mobility data. * In 1991, autocoding (computerized coding) was introduced for converting write-ins of place names in the mobility question to Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) codes. In previous censuses, write-ins were coded manually. Some of the manual coding procedures used in 1986 for resolving duplicate place names (e.g., Kingston township vs. Kingston city, both in Ontario, but only "Kingston" reported) were automated in Edit & Imputation (E & I) as an extension of the autocoding system. The increased accuracy obtained with autocoding is expected to improve the quality of mobility data on out-migrants from CSDs, compared with previous censuses. * A significant change in E & I from earlier censuses occurred in 1981. Prior to 1981, non-response (partial/total) to the question on previous place of residence was reported as "not stated". However, for 1981, this "not stated" category was dropped. Non-response to the question on previous place of residence was changed to a specific response via a combination of deterministic, family and hot-deck imputation assignments. This imputation was achieved using the SPIDER program, which was introduced in 1981. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census ________________________________________________________________ Figure 13. Relationship Between the Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Conceptual Framework and the 1991 Cenus Question on Place of Residence 5 Years Ago PART 1: 1991 CENSUS QUESTION (see Part 2) 21 Did this person live at this present address 5 years ago, that is, on June 4, 1986? () Yes, lived at the same address as now: [1] Go to Question 23 () No, lived at a different address: [2] Go to question 22 22 Where did this person live 5 years ago, that is, June 4, 1986? Mark one circle () only. () Lived in the same city, town, village, township, municipality or Indian reserve: [2,3] OR () Lived in a different city, town village, township, municipality or Indian reserve in Canada: [2,4,5] Print below. City, town, village, township, municipality or Indian reserve _____________________________ County (if known) _____________________________ Province/territory _____________________________ OR () Lived outside Canada: [2,4,6] Print name of country ____________________________ _____________________________________ PART 2: CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK Mobility Status [1] Non-mover [2] Mover (migration status) [3] Non-migrant [4] Migrant [5] Internal Migrant [6] External Migrant 2085 MOBILITY 5: POPULATION SIZE OF CENSUS SUBDIVISION OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the current population of the municipality or census subdivision (CSD) where the person usually resided on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Derived variable: Question 22, population counts Responses: This variable refers to the 1991 population size of the census subdivision where the person usually resided five years ago on June 4, 1986. Remarks: The size of the CSD is based on the 1991 population. It is possible to have CSDs where persons resided five years ago with zero population in 1991. For non-movers and non-migrants, CSD of residence 5 years ago is the same as current CSD of residence. Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago is not applicable to external migrants. For a definition of Census Subdivision (CSD), refer to the section on geography. See also corresponding variable Mobility 5: Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence, "Remarks" under Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2086 MOBILITY 5: POPULATION SIZE OF CURRENT CENSUS SUBDIVISION OF RESIDENCE Refers to the 1991 population of the municipality or census subdivision (CSD) where the person usually resided on Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Derived variable: Question 22, population counts Responses: This variable refers to the 1991 population size of the census subdivision where the person currently resides on Census Day (June 4, 1991). Remarks: Some CSD population sizes are zero. In censuses previous to 1986, population size was grouped into size categories. For a definition of Census Subdivision (CSD), refer to the section on geography. See also corresponding variable Mobility 5: Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago, "Remarks" under Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2087 MOBILITY 5: PROVINCE/TERRITORY OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the person's usual province or territory of residence on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only . Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Direct variable: Question 22 Responses: The five-year ago mobility question requests a write-in response of name of "municipality, county and province" which is subsequently converted to a seven-digit code according to the Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) - see the section on geography. The two-digit province/territory code is a substring of the seven-digit SGC code. Remarks: Respondents who indicated that they had lived in a different "city, town, village, township, municipality or Indian reserve in Canada" five years ago (internal migrants) provided the name of the municipality, county and province. The municipality and county correspond to the census subdivision (CSD) and census division (CD) respectively. For non-movers and non-migrants, province or territory of residence 5 years ago is the same as current province or territory of residence. Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago is not applicable to external migrants. For the corresponding current province/territory of residence, refer to the variables Province and Territory in the section on geography. See also "Remarks" under Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 11, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2088 MOBILITY 5: RURAL/URBAN CLASSIFICATION OF PLACE OF RESIDENCE 5 YEARS AGO Refers to the rural or urban classification of the municipality or census subdivision (CSD) where the person usually resided on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. This concept applies to the Mobility Status (5 Years Ago) subuniverse only . Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 5 years of age and over residing in Canada, excluding institutional residents and Canadians (military and government personnel) in households outside Canada Question No.: Derived variable: Question 22, rural/urban classification Responses: Refers to the 1991 rural or urban classification of the CSD where the person usually resided on June 4, 1986, five years prior to Census Day. Remarks: The assignment of either rural or urban place of residence five years ago is based on the 1991 rural/urban classification of the CSD of residence 5 years ago. While the majority of CSDs are classified as either rural or urban, some CSDs have mixed rural/urban components. In these cases, rural or urban place of residence five years ago is assigned proportionately to migrants according to the 1991 ratio of rural to urban population of the "mixed" CSD that they lived in five years ago. For non-movers and non-migrants, CSD of residence 5 years ago is the same as current CSD of residence. Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago is not applicable to external migrants. For a definition of Rural Area and Urban Area (UA), see the section on geography. See also "Remarks" under Mobility 5: Mobility Status - Place of Residence 5 Years Ago and Figure 11 at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 11 in the User Documentation or to Figure 11 in publication 92-301E, page 85, to view this figure in its original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 11. 1991 Census Mobility Variables Mobility 1 variables* Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 1 Year Ago Province/Territory of Residence 1 Year Ago Country of Residence 1 Year Ago Mobility 5 variables Mobility Status Ä Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Division of Residence 5 Years Ago Province/Territory of Residence 5 Years Ago Country of Residence 5 Years Ago* Census Metropolitan Area or Census Agglomeration of Residence 5 Years Ago Census Subdivision Type of Residence 5 Years Ago* Rural/Urban Classification of Place of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Census Subdivision of Residence 5 Years Ago Population Size of Current Census Subdivision of Residence __________________________ * New variables for 1991 Census 2089 PLACE OF BIRTH Refers to specific provinces or territories if born in Canada, or to specific countries if born outside Canada. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 11 Responses: View Figure 14 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 14 on page 100 for its original format. For an alphabetical listing of places of birth and for a comparison of places of birth available in 1991, 1986 and 1981, see text at end of definition. Remarks: Respondents were asked to indicate their place of birth according to boundaries in existence on Census Day, June 4, 1991. Respondents born in an area of Canada which was part of the Northwest Territories at the time of their birth, but which has since become a province of Canada, were to report their place of birth according to present provincial boundaries. Persons born in Newfoundland and Labrador before that province joined Confederation in 1949 were to report "Newfoundland". Persons born in the six counties of Northern Ireland were to report "United Kingdom", while persons born in any of the other counties of the Republic of Ireland were to write in "Eire" in the space provided. If the respondent was not sure of the country of birth because of boundary changes, the name of the nearest city or district was to be written in the space provided. When the questionnaires were printed, East Germany and West Germany were separate countries. Respondents were instructed to mark either East Germany or West Germany. As a result of German reunification in 1990, all mark-in responses of West Germany and East Germany received during the 1991 Census were combined into one code, the Federal Republic of Germany. The countries for which data are available, and their 1986 and 1981 counterparts, are shown in the text below. It should be noted that data are not published for all places of birth. Unpublished data are available upon special request, subject to confidentiality constraints. -------------------------- Comparison of Places of Birth Available in 1991, 1986 and 1981 1991 Classification 1986 Classification 1981 Classification Born in Canada Newfoundland Newfoundland Newfoundland Prince Edward Prince Edward Prince Edward Island Island Island Nova Scotia Nova Scotia Nova Scotia New Brunswick New Brunswick New Brunswick Quebec Quebec Quebec Ontario Ontario Ontario Manitoba Manitoba Manitoba Saskatchewan Saskatchewan Saskatchewan Alberta Alberta Alberta British Columbia British Columbia British Columbia Yukon Yukon Yukon Northwest Northwest Northwest Territories Territories Territories Born Outside Canada North America Greenland Greenland Denmark St. Pierre and St. Pierre and St. Pierre and Miquelon Miquelon Miquelon United States of United States of United States of America America America Central America Belize Belize Belize Costa Rica Costa Rica Costa Rica El Salvador El Salvador El Salvador Guatemala Guatemala Guatemala Honduras Honduras Honduras Mexico Mexico Mexico Nicaragua Nicaragua Nicaragua Panama Panama Panama, Panama (Canal Zone) Caribbean and Bermuda Anguilla Anguilla Anguilla Antigua Antigua Antigua Aruba Netherlands Netherlands Antilles Antilles Bahamas Bahamas Bahamas Barbados Barbados Barbados Bermuda Bermuda Bermuda Cayman Islands Cayman Islands Cayman Islands Cuba Cuba Cuba Dominica Dominica Dominica Dominican Republic Dominican Republic Dominican Republic Grenada Grenada Grenada Guadeloupe Guadeloupe Guadeloupe Haiti Haiti Haiti Jamaica Jamaica Jamaica Martinique Martinique Martinique Montserrat Montserrat Montserrat Netherlands Netherlands Netherlands Antilles Antilles Antilles Puerto Rico Puerto Rico Puerto Rico St. Christopher St. Christopher St. Kitts, Nevis and Nevis and Nevis St. Lucia St. Lucia St. Lucia St. Vincent and St. Vincent and St. Vincent the Grenadines the Grenadines Trinidad and Tobago Trinidad and Tobago Trinidad and Tobago Turks and Caicos Turks and Caicos Turks and Caicos Islands Islands Islands Virgin Islands Virgin Islands Virgin Islands (British) (British) (British) Virgin Islands Virgin Islands Virgin Islands (U.S.A.) (U.S.A.) (U.S.A.) South America Argentina Argentina Argentina Bolivia Bolivia Bolivia Brazil Brazil Brazil Chile Chile Chile Colombia Colombia Colombia Ecuador Ecuador Ecuador Falkland Islands Falkland Islands Falkland Islands French Guiana French Guiana French Guiana Guyana Guyana Guyana Paraguay Paraguay Paraguay Peru Peru Peru Suriname Suriname Surinam Uruguay Uruguay Uruguay Venezuela Venezuela Venezuela Europe Western Europe Austria Austria Austria Belgium Belgium Belgium France France France Germany, Federated West Germany, West Germany, Republic of East Germany East Germany Liechtenstein Liechtenstein Liechtenstein Luxembourg Luxembourg Luxembourg Monaco Monaco Monaco Netherlands Netherlands Netherlands Switzerland Switzerland Switzerland Eastern Europe Bulgaria Bulgaria Bulgaria Czechoslovakia Czechoslovakia Czechoslovakia Hungary Hungary Hungary Poland Poland Poland Romania Romania Romania Union of Soviet Union of Soviet Union of Soviet Socialist Republics Socialist Republics Socialist Republics Northern Europe Republic of Ireland Republic of Ireland Eire (Eire) (Eire) United Kingdom United Kingdom United Kingdom Scandinavia Denmark Denmark Denmark Finland Finland Finland Iceland Iceland Iceland Norway Norway Norway Sweden Sweden Sweden Southern Europe Albania Albania Albania Andorra Andorra Andorra Cyprus Cyprus Cyprus Gibraltar Gibraltar Gibraltar Greece Greece Greece Italy Italy Italy Malta Malta Malta Portugal Portugal Portugal San Marino San Marino San Marino Spain Spain Spain Vatican City State Vatican City State Vatican City State Yugoslavia Yugoslavia Yugoslavia Africa Western Africa Benin Benin Benin Burkina Faso Burkina Faso Upper Volta Cape Verde Islands Cape Verde Islands Cape Verde Islands Gambia Gambia Gambia Ghana Ghana Ghana Guinea Guinea Guinea Guinea-Bissau Guinea-Bissau Guinea-Bissau Ivory Coast Ivory Coast Ivory Coast Liberia Liberia Liberia Mali Mali Mali Mauritania Mauritania Mauritania Niger Niger Niger Nigeria Nigeria Nigeria Senegal Senegal Senegal Sierra Leone Sierra Leone Sierra Leone St. Helena and St. Helena and St. Helena Ascension Ascension Togo Togo Togo Eastern Africa Burundi Burundi Burundi Comoros Comoros Comoros Djibouti, Djibouti, Djibouti, Republic of Republic of Republic of Ethiopia Ethiopia Ethiopia Kenya Kenya Kenya Madagascar Madagascar Madagascar Malawi Malawi Malawi Mauritius Mauritius Mauritius Mayotte Mayotte Mayotte Mozambique Mozambique Mozambique Reunion, Reunion Other, n.e.s., n.o.s. Rwanda Rwanda Rwanda Seychelles Seychelles Seychelles Somali Democratic Somali Democratic Somalia Republic Republic Tanzania Tanzania Tanzania Uganda Uganda Uganda Zambia Zambia Zambia Zimbabwe Zimbabwe Zimbabwe (Rhodesia) Northern Africa Algeria Algeria Algeria Egypt Egypt Egypt Libya Libya Libya Morocco Morocco Morocco Sudan Sudan Sudan Tunisia Tunisia Tunisia Western Sahara Western Sahara Western Sahara (D.S.A.R.) Central Africa Angola Angola Angola Cameroon Cameroon Cameroon Central African Central African Central African Republic Republic Republic (Empire) Chad Chad Chad Congo Congo Congo Equatorial Guinea Equatorial Guinea Equatorial Guinea Gabon Gabon Gabon Sao Tome and Sao Tome and Sao Tome and Principe Principe Principe Zaire Zaire Zaire Southern Africa Botswana Botswana Botswana Lesotho Lesotho Lesotho Namibia Namibia Namibia South Africa, South Africa, South West Africa Republic of Republic of Swaziland Swaziland Swaziland Asia Western Asia Afghanistan Afghanistan Afghanistan Turkey Turkey Turkey Middle East Bahrain Bahrain Bahrain Iran Iran Iran Iraq Iraq Iraq Israel Israel Israel Jordan Jordan Jordan Kuwait Kuwait Kuwait Lebanon Lebanon Lebanon Oman Oman Oman Qatar Qatar Qatar Saudi Arabia Saudi Arabia Saudi Arabia Syria Syria Syria United Arab United Arab United Arab Emirates Emirates Emirates Yemen, Republic of People's Democratic People's Democratic Republic of Yemen, Republic of Yemen, Yemen Arab Republic Yemen Arab Republic Eastern Asia China, People's China, People's China, People's Democratic Democratic Republic of Republic of Republic of Hong Kong Hong Kong Hong Kong Japan Japan Japan Korea, North Korea, North Korea, North Korea, South Korea, South Korea, South Macao Macao China, People's Republic of Mongolia Mongolia Mongolia Taiwan Taiwan Taiwan South East Asia Brunei Brunei Brunei Union of Myanmar Burma Burma Indonesia Indonesia Indonesia Kampuchea Kampuchea Kampuchea (Cambodia) Laos Laos Laos Malaysia Malaysia Malaysia Philippines Philippines Philippines Singapore Singapore Singapore Thailand Thailand Thailand Viet Nam Viet Nam Viet Nam Southern Asia Bangladesh Bangladesh Bangladesh Bhutan Bhutan Bhutan India India India Maldives, Maldives, Maldives, Republic of Republic of Republic of Nepal Nepal Nepal Pakistan Pakistan Pakistan Sri Lanka Sri Lanka Sri Lanka Oceania American Samoa American Samoa United States of America Australia Australia Australia Belau, Republic of Belau, Republic of Not included Cook Islands Cook Islands New Zealand Fiji Fiji Fiji French Polynesia French Polynesia Other, n.e.s., n.o.s. Guam (U.S.A.) United States of United States of America America Kiribati Kiribati Gilbert Islands Marshall Islands Marshall Islands Other, n.e.s., n.o.s. Micronesia, Micronesia, Not included Federated Federated States of States of Nauru Nauru Nauru New Caledonia New Caledonia New Caledonia New Zealand New Zealand New Zealand Papua New Guinea Papua New Guinea Papua New Guinea Pitcairn Island Pitcairn Island Pitcairn Solomon Islands Solomon Islands Solomon Islands Tonga Tonga Tonga Tuvalu Tuvalu Tuvalu U.S. Pacific Trust Other Other, n.e.s., Territories n.o.s Vanuata Vanuata New Hebrides Wallis and Futuna Wallis and Futuna Not included Western Samoa Western Samoa Western Samoa Other Other Other, n.e.s., n.o.s. Note: n.e.s. = not elsewhere specified n.o.s. = not otherwise specified --------------------------------------- Figure 14. Place of Birth --------------- Canada Newfoundland Prince Edward Island Nova Scotia New Brunswick Quebec Ontario Manitoba Saskatchewan Alberta British Columbia Yukon Northwest Territories Other countries Afghanistan Albania Algeria American Samoa Andorra Angola Anguilla Antigua Argentina Aruba Australia Austria Bahamas Bahrain Bangladesh Barbados Belau, Republic of Belgium Belize Benin Bermuda Bhutan Bolivia Botswana Brazil Brunei Bulgaria Burkina Faso Burundi Cameroon Cape Verde Islands Cayman Islands Central African Republic Chad Chile China, People's Democratic Republic of Colombia Comoros Congo Cook Islands Costa Rica Cuba Cyprus Czechoslovakia Denmark Dominica Dominican Republic Djibouti, Republic of Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Equatorial Guinea Ethiopia Falkland Islands Fiji Finland France French Guiana French Polynesia Gabon Gambia Germany, Federal Republic of Ghana Gibraltar Greece Greenland Grenada Guadeloupe Guam (U.S.A.) Guatemala Guinea Guinea-Bissau Guyana Haiti Honduras Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Indonesia Iran Iraq Ireland (Eire), Republic of Israel Italy Ivory Coast Jamaica Japan Jordan Kampuchea Kenya Kiribati Korea, North Korea, South Kuwait Laos Lebanon Lesotho Liberia Libya Liechtenstein Luxembourg Macao Madagascar Malawi Malaysia Maldives, Republic of Mali Malta Marshall Islands Martinique Mauritania Mauritius Mayotte Mexico Micronesia, Federated States of Monaco Mongolia Montserrat Morocco Mozambique Myanmar, Union of Namibia Nauru Nepal Netherlands Netherlands Antilles New Caledonia New Zealand Nicaragua Niger Nigeria Norway Oman Other Pakistan Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay Peru Philippines Pitcairn Island Poland Portugal Puerto Rico Qatar Reunion Romania Rwanda San Marino Sao Tome and Principe Saudi Arabia Senegal Seychelles Sierra Leone Singapore Soloman Islands Somali Democratic Republic South Africa, Republic of Spain Sri Lanka St. Christopher and Nevis St. Helena and Ascension St. Lucia St. Pierre and Miquelon St. Vincent and the Grenadines Sudan Suriname Swaziland Sweden Switzerland Syria Taiwan Tanzania Thailand Togo Tonga Trinidad and Tobago Tunisia Turkey Turks and Caicos Islands Tuvalu Uganda Union of Soviet Socialist Republics United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States of America United States Pacific Trust Territories Uruguay Vanuatu Vatican City State Venezuela Viet Nam Virgin Islands (British) Virgin Islands (U.S.A.) Wallis and Futuna Western Sahara Western Samoa Yemen, Republic of Yugoslavia Zaire Zambia Zimbabwe 2090 RELATIONSHIP TO HOUSEHOLD REFERENCE PERSON (PERSON 1) Refers to the relationship of household members to the household reference person (Person 1). A person may be related to Person 1 through blood, marriage, common-law or adoption (e.g., husband or wife, common-law partner, son or daughter, father or mother) or unrelated (e.g., lodger, room-mate, employee). Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981,* 1976,** 1971*** Reported for: Total population Question No.: Direct variable: Question 2 Responses: Person 1 Related to Person 1 - husband or wife, common-law partner of Person 1, son or daughter, father or mother, brother or sister, son-in-law or daughter- in-law, father-in-law or mother-in-law, brother-in- law or sister-in-law, grandfather or grandmother, grandchild, nephew or niece, other relative of Person 1 (not identified elsewhere) and their spouses, common-law partners, sons or daughters Unrelated to Person 1 - lodger, lodger's husband or wife, lodger's common-law partner, lodger's son or daughter, room-mate, room-mate's husband or wife, room-mate's common-law partner, room-mate's son or daughter, employee, employee's husband or wife, employee's common-law partner, employee's son or daughter, Hutterite, Hutterite husband or wife, Hutterite son or daughter, institutional resident Remarks: * In the 1981 Census, the term used to identify the household reference person was changed from "head of household" to "Person 1". Person 1 may be any one of the following: either the husband or the wife in any married couple living in the dwelling; either partner in a common-law relationship; the parent, where one parent only lives with his or her never-married son(s) or daughter(s) of any age. If none of the above applies, any adult member of the household may be identified as Person 1. ** In the 1976 Census, the head of household was defined as: either the husband or the wife; the parent where there was one parent only, with never-married children; any member of a group sharing a dwelling equally. *** In the 1971 Census, the head of household was defined as: the husband rather than the wife; the parent where there was one parent only, with unmarried children; any member of a group sharing a dwelling equally. 2091 RELIGION Refers to specific religious denominations, groups or bodies as well as sects, cults, or other religiously defined communities or systems of belief. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample),* 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 17 Responses: For the classification structure and its comparability to 1981 and to 1971, see text at the end of definition. Remarks: Respondents were instructed to indicate a specific denomination or religion even if they were not practising members of their group. For infants or children, respondents were instructed to indicate the denomination or religion in which they will be raised. In most cases, this would normally be the religion of their parents (or guardians). Persons who are members of a specific group within a larger religion were instructed to specify the particular name or term for this group. An example of this would be a person specifying "Ukrainian Orthodox" as a more specific category of the Eastern Orthodox religion. Persons who had no connection or affiliation with any religious group or denomination were instructed to mark the circle for "No religion". However, if respondents considered terms such as "atheist" or "agnostic" to be applicable to them, they were instructed to specify them in the write-in area of the question. The classification structure of the religion data is organized or grouped under seven main headings. The first is that of Catholic which consists of two main groups - Roman Catholic and Ukrainian Catholic - and smaller Catholic groups. The second major category is Protestant which encompasses "mainline" groups such as United Church, Anglican and Lutheran and smaller denominations such as Adventist and Moravian. The third major group is Eastern Orthodox whose primary component is Greek Orthodox, but which also contains a number of smaller national or ethnic Orthodox groups. The fourth category refers to persons of the Jewish religion. The fifth group is the Eastern Non-Christian religions whose main components are Islam, Buddhist, Hindu and Sikh, and a number of smaller groups such as Baha'i, Confucian and Taoist. The sixth category is the Para-religious group which includes a number of diverse sects, cults or religions such as New Thought-Unity-Metaphysical, Pagan and Fourth Way. The seventh and final main group refers to persons with no (reported) religious affiliation. The vast majority in this category are those who simply indicated "No religion". There is a final residual category for responses that can not be classified in any of the above categories. * The 1991 Census religion question was in the form of a totally open-ended write-in, with a mark circle for "No religion". This new format may result in slight historical differences. ______________________________________________________________ Comparison of Religious Code Values, 1991, 1981 and 1971 1991 1981 1971 CATHOLIC Other Catholic Not included Not included Polish National Polish National Other Catholic Church Catholic Church Roman Catholic Roman Catholic Roman Catholic Ukrainian Catholic Ukrainian Catholic Ukrainian Catholic PROTESTANT Adventist Adventist Adventist Anglican Anglican Anglican Apostolic Christian Apostolic Christian Other Associated Gospel Associated Gospel Other Baptist Baptist Baptist Brethren in Christ Brethren in Christ Brethren in Christ Canadian Reformed Canadian Reformed Not included Church Church Charismatic Renewal Charismatic Renewal Not included Christadelphian Christadelphian Other Christian and Christian and Christian and Missionary Missionary Missionary Alliance Alliance Alliance Christian Assembly Christian Assembly Other Christian Christian Other Congregation Congregation Christian, n.o.s. Christian, n.o.s. Other Christian Reformed Christian Reformed Christian Reformed Church of God Church of God Other Church of Latter Church of Latter Mormon Day Saints Day Saints Church of the Church of the Church of the Nazarene Nazarene Nazarene Churches of Christ, Churches of Christ, Churches of Christ, Disciples Disciples Disciples Dutch Reformed Dutch Reformed Christian Reformed Church Church Evangelical Evangelical United Church Evangelical Free Evangelical Free United Church Church Church Free Methodist Free Methodist Free Methodist Hutterite Hutterite Hutterite Interdenominational Interdenominational Other Jehovah's Witnesses Jehovah's Witnesses Jehovah's Witnesses Lutheran Lutheran Lutheran Mennonite Mennonite Mennonite Methodist Episcopal Methodist Episcopal Not included Methodist, n.o.s. Methodist, n.o.s. Clerically assigned to Free Methodist or Wesleyan Methodist during the coding operation Mission Covenant Mission Covenant Other Mission de l'Esprit Mission de l'Esprit Other Saint Saint Missionary Church Missionary Church Other Moravian Moravian Other New Apostolic New Apostolic Other New Church New Church Other Non-denominational Non-denominational Other Orthodox Doukhobors Orthodox Doukhobors Doukhobors Other Christian Other Christian Other Other Reformed Other Reformed Other Pentecostal Pentecostal Pentecostal People's Church People's Church Other Plymouth Brethren Plymouth Brethren Plymouth Brethren Presbyterian Presbyterian Presbyterian Protestant, n.o.s. Protestant, n.o.s. Clerically assigned to United Church or Anglican or Presbyterian or Baptist or Lutheran during the coding operation Quakers Quakers Other Reformed Church of Reformed Church of Other America America Reformed Doukhobors Reformed Doukhobors Doukhobors Reorganised Church Reorganised Church Mormon of Latter Saints of Latter Saints Salvation Army Salvation Army Salvation Army Spiritualist Spiritualist Other Standard Church Standard Church Other Unitarian Unitarian Unitarian United Church United Church United Church Wesleyan Wesleyan Other Worldwide Church Worldwide Church Not included of God of God ORTHODOX Antiochian Orthodox Antiochian Orthodox Not included Christian Christian Armenian Orthodox Armenian Orthodox Greek Orthodox Coptic Orthodox Orthodox, n.o.s. Not included Greek Orthodox Greek Orthodox Greek Orthodox Orthodox, n.o.s. Orthodox, n.o.s. Greek Orthodox Romanian Orthodox Romanian Orthodox Greek Orthodox Russian Orthodox Russian Orthodox Greek Orthodox Serbian Orthodox Serbian Orthodox Greek Orthodox Ukrainian Orthodox Ukrainian Orthodox Greek Orthodox JEWISH Jewish Jewish Jewish EASTERN NON-CHRISTIAN Baha'i Baha'i Other Buddhist Buddhist Buddhist Confucian Confucian Confucian Hindu Hindu Other Islam Islam Other Jains Other Eastern Non- Other Christian Other Eastern Non- Other Non-Christian Other Christian Shinto Other Eastern Non- Other Christian Sikh Sikh Other Taoist Taoist Other PARA-RELIGIOUS GROUPS Fourth Way Fourth Way Not included Kabalarian Pagan Other Native Indian Native Indian Not included or Inuit or Inuit New Age Not included Not included New Thought-Unity- New Thought-Unity- Other/Not included Metaphysical Metaphysical Other Para- Other Para- Other/Not included Religious Religious Groups Groups Pagan Pagan Other Rastafarian Other Para- Not included Religious Groups Satanism Pagan Not included Scientology Fourth Way Not included Theosophical Groups Theosophical Groups Other NO RELIGIOUS AFFILIATION Agnostic Agnostic Other Atheist Atheist No Religion Free Thinker Other, Non- Other Religious Humanist Other, Non- Not included Religious No religion No religion No religion Other, Non- Other, Non- Other/No religion Religious Religious Other, not Other, not Other/Not included elsewhere elsewhere classified classified Note: n.o.s. = not otherwise specified 2092 RURAL FARM POPULATION Refers to all persons living in rural areas who are members of the households of farm operators living on their farms for any length of time during the 12-month period prior to the census. Censuses: 1991, 1986,* 1981,* 1976,** 1971,** 1966,** 1961** Reported for: Rural population Question No.: Derived variable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: * Prior to the 1991 Census, the farm operator was the person responsible for the day-to-day decisions made in the agricultural operation of a holding. In 1991, the farm operator refers to those persons responsible for the day-to-day decisions made in the agricultural operation of a holding. Because of the change in the farm operator definition, the rural farm population count now includes, in addition to all persons that were included based on the previous definition of farm operator, all persons living on a farm in a dwelling that did not include a farm operator according to the old definition but does now because of the new definition. ** Prior to the 1981 Census, rural farm population was defined as all persons living in rural areas in dwellings situated on census farms. 2093 SCHOOLING: DEGREE IN MEDICINE, DENTISTRY, VETERINARY MEDICINE OR OPTOMETRY Refers to the possession of a degree in medicine, dentistry, veterinary medicine or optometry, regardless of whether higher educational qualifications (i.e. master's or earned doctorate degrees) were held or not. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for:Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.:Derived variable: Question 28 Responses: No medical degree; Medical degree (M.D., D.D.S., D.M.D., D.V.M., O.D.); Medical and master's degrees; Medical and earned doctorate degrees Remarks: This derived variable complements the Schooling: Highest Degree, Certificate or Diploma variable by providing additional counts of medical degrees for persons with both medical and either master's or earned doctorate degree(s). Thus this variable provides a more complete measure of the total medical resources in Canada than that provided by the counts in the derived variable Schooling: Highest Degree, Certificate or Diploma. The additional counts for persons with either a master's and a medical degree, or an earned doctorate and a medical degree would, for example, apply to persons in occupations such as in natural science or medical engineering research, and also university teaching. When cross-classifying this variable with the Schooling: Major Field of Study (MFS) variable, it should be noted that, for the medical and master's degree combination, the major field relates to the medical degree. However, for the medical and earned doctorate combination, the major field relates to the doctorate. 2094 SCHOOLING: HIGHEST DEGREE, CERTIFICATE OR DIPLOMA Refers to the highest degree, certificate or diploma obtained. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample),* 1971 (1/3 sample),** 1961*** Reported for:Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.:Derived variable: Question 28 Responses: No degree, certificate or diploma; Secondary/high school graduation certificate or equivalent; Trades certificate or diploma; Other non-university certificate or diploma; University certificate or diploma below bachelor level; Bachelor's degree(s); University certificate or diploma above bachelor level; Degree in medicine, dentistry, veterinary medicine or optometry; Master's degree(s); Earned doctorate Remarks: This is a derived variable obtained from the educational qualifications question which asked for all degrees, certificates or diplomas to be reported. Although the sequence is more or less hierarchical, it is nonetheless a general, rather than an absolute, gradient measure of academic achievement. The following qualifications are to be noted: (i) a secondary (high) school graduation certificate is one which is classifiable as junior or senior matriculation, general or technical-commercial; (ii) a trades certificate or diploma is obtained through apprenticeship (journeyman's) training and/or in-school training in trades-level vocational and pre-vocational courses at community colleges, institutes of technology and similar institutions where the minimum entrance requirement was less than secondary (high) school, junior or senior matriculation, or its equivalent; (iii) an "other non-university certificate or diploma" is obtained in a community college (both transfer and semi-professional career programs), CEGEP (both general and professional), institute of technology, or any other non-degree-granting educational institution. Also included in this category are teaching certificates awarded by provincial departments of education, with the exception of teachers' qualifications at the bachelor level obtained at university-affiliated faculties of education; (iv) university certificates or diplomas are normally connected with professional associations in fields such as accounting, banking or insurance. If a bachelor's degree is a normal prerequisite for a university certificate or diploma course, then the latter is classified as a university certificate above the bachelor level. * In 1976, "trades certificate or diploma" and "university certificate or diploma above bachelor level" were not included. ** In 1971, this question related only to university degrees, certificates or diplomas. The responses in 1971 were: No university degree, certificate or diploma; University certificate or diploma (below bachelor level); Bachelor degree; First professional degree; Master's or equivalent, or earned doctorate. *** In 1961, "University degree" only was obtained without classification by type. 2095 SCHOOLING: HIGHEST GRADE OF ELEMENTARY OR SECONDARY Refers to the highest grade or year of elementary or secondary school attended according to the province where the education was obtained, or according to the province of residence in the event this education was received outside Canada. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample),* 1971 (1/3 sample),** 1961*** Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 24 Responses: Never attended school or attended kindergarten only OR highest grade or year (1 to 13) of secondary and/or elementary school Remarks: Persons who were enrolled at the time of the census reported the grade or year they were attending. Levels of education as expressed in grades (or years) vary from province to province and also over the years. If elementary or secondary schooling was obtained by private instruction, correspondence or part-time attendance at class, then the equivalent grade or year in the regular day-time program was reported. Persons in ungraded or "subject promotion" school settings had the option of reporting an estimated grade level, or the number of actual years they had been attending school. * In 1976, the highest level of secondary schooling in the province of Quebec was reported as Grade 12, in contrast to Grade 11 in 1981 and 1986. Also, in 1976 as well as in 1971 and 1961, no schooling and kindergarten were reported as separate categories. ** In 1971, the sample data for the elementary or secondary level were reported for the total population 5 years of age and over. *** In 1961, the data were also reported for the total population 5 years of age and over, and grades or years on the enumeration documents were shown as: no schooling; kindergarten; elementary 1 to 4; elementary 5+; and secondary 1; 2; 3; 4; 5. 2096 SCHOOLING: HIGHEST LEVEL OF Refers to the highest grade or year of elementary or secondary school attended, or the highest year of university or other non- university completed. University education is considered to be above other non-university. Also, the attainment of a degree, certificate or diploma is considered to be at a higher level than years completed or attended without an educational qualification. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample),* 1971 (1/3 sample),* 1961** Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 24, 25, 26 and 28 Responses: Highest level of schooling is depicted in 1991 Census output in a variety of forms. The general listing is as follows: Elementary-secondary only Never attended school or attended kindergarten only Grades 1-4 Grades 5-8 Grades 9-10 Grades 11-13 Secondary (high) school graduation certificate Trades certificate or diploma Other non-university education only Without other non-university or trades certificate or diploma With trades certificate or diploma With other non-university certificate or diploma University University, without university degree Without other non-university education Without certificate, diploma or degree With trades certificate or diploma With university certificate or diploma below bachelor level With other non-university education Without certificate, diploma or degree With trades certificate or diploma With other non-university certificate or diploma With university certificate or diploma below bachelor level University, with university degree With bachelor or first professional degree With university certificate above bachelor level With master's degree With earned doctorate Remarks: Although this variable is described as Highest Level of Schooling, implying a hierarchy of educational attainment, there are in fact a number of instances which violate the hierarchy. For example, the placement of "trades certificate or diploma" above the "secondary (high) school graduation certificate" is justified on the basis of the fact that this educational qualification is obtained primarily for employment/occupational purposes by persons who were, on the whole, beyond the secondary school age level at the time. The fact remains, however, that a sizeable proportion of this group did not obtain their secondary school graduation certificate. This proportion would, therefore, be strictly speaking "out of line" in the hierarchy. In any event, placing this whole category below secondary would not necessarily resolve the problem, since at least some part of this group does have secondary school graduation. It is for this reason that the data for trades (and other non-university) certificates are separately disaggregated in the variable Schooling: Trades and Other Non-university Certificates. Another example in which the hierarchical element of this variable is rendered slightly askew is in the cases of persons who have completed both university and non-university education. In terms of a specific instance, a person, say, with less than one year (of completed courses) of university and likewise for non-university, but with no degrees, certificates or diplomas, would nonetheless be situated at a "higher" level than a person who has other non-university education only, but with a certificate or diploma. * In 1976 and 1971, this variable was denoted as "Level of Schooling". In 1971, it was defined as "the highest grade or year of elementary, secondary school or university ever attended and whether or not additional training in the form of vocational or postsecondary non-university was present". In 1976, the definition was slightly revised to emphasize completion (rather than attendance) beyond the secondary level: "Level of schooling" referred to the highest grade or year of elementary/secondary school attended, or the highest year of postsecondary non-university or university completed by the person. ** In 1961, the elementary, secondary and university levels were combined directly in one question, and the question referred to "the highest grade or year of schooling ever attended", not necessarily completed. The variable itself was called "Highest Grade Attended". 2097 SCHOOLING: MAJOR FIELD OF STUDY (MFS) Refers to the predominant discipline or area of learning or training of a person's highest postsecondary degree, certificate or diploma. The major field of study classification structure consists of 10 broad or major categories: educational, recreational and counselling services; fine and applied arts; humanities and related fields; social sciences and related fields; commerce, management and business administration; agricultural and biological sciences/technologies; engineering and applied sciences; engineering and applied science technologies and trades; health professions, sciences and technologies; and mathematics and physical sciences. This structure is, in turn, subdivided into over 100 "minor" classification categories and about 425 "unit" groups. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) - vocational training and apprenticeship only Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over with a postsecondary degree, certificate or diploma, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 29 Responses: For the classification structure, see text at end of this definition. Remarks: The classification structure of the MFS variable can be used either independently or in conjunction with the Schooling: Highest Degree, Certificate or Diploma variable. When the latter is utilized with MFS, it should be noted that each of the postsecondary qualifications ranging from the trades certificate or diploma to earned doctorate display differing patterns or distributions. Therefore, varying disaggregations of MFS can be employed based primarily on the numerical representativeness of unit groups within each level of qualification. When the medical degree level of qualification is cross-classified with MFS, it is advisable to use the separate variable Schooling: Degree in Medicine, Dentistry, Veterinary Medicine or Optometry rather than the code value for highest degree. The reason for this is that the former variable indicates a medical degree regardless of whether a master's or earned doctorate was also held. This variable also shows persons with combined medical and earned doctorate degrees. It should also be noted that the field of study concept entails the notion of subfield or specialization. Respondents were instructed in the Guide which accompanied the questionnaire to be as specific as possible in indicating a subfield of specialization within a broader discipline or area of training, especially in the case of graduate studies or other advanced training. The degree to which respondents answered according to this criterion is reflected in the frequency of counts for the MFS "unit" groups. In general, higher degrees of specialization tend to be reported for master's, medical and earned doctorate degrees. Finally, it should be noted that the MFS database can be linked to other comparable databases. The 1971 Census vocational and apprenticeship training is one. Others include the 1973 Highly Qualified Manpower Survey, the 1975 and 1984 Postsecondary Student Surveys, the 1978, 1984, 1988 and 1991 National Graduates Surveys, the 1982 Current Population Profile, the International Standard Classification of Education, and the annual enrol- ment data for graduates classified according to the University Student Information System and the Community College Student Information System. ----------------------------- Major Field of Study - Final Classification Structure EDUCATIONAL, RECREATIONAL AND COUNSELLING SERVICES (001-046) Education - General (001) 001 Education - General COLL_UNIV Elementary - Primary Education (002-004) 002 Elementary School Teaching - General COLL_UNIV 003 Elementary School Teaching - COLL_UNIV Specialized 004 Pre-school, Kindergarten and Early COLL_UNIV Childhood Education Secondary Education (Basic) (005-012) 005 Secondary School Teaching COLL_UNIV 006 English Language Teaching COLL_UNIV 007 French Language Teaching COLL_UNIV 008 Other Language Teaching COLL_UNIV 009 Mathematics - Science Teaching(1) COLL_UNIV 011 Social Studies Teaching COLL_UNIV 012 Secondary Basic Curriculum - Other(2) COLL_UNIV Secondary Education (Specialized) (013-019) 013 Adult/Continuing Education COLL_UNIV 014 Art and Fine Art Education COLL_UNIV 015 Commercial/Business Education COLL_UNIV 016 Family/Life Education COLL_UNIV 017 Industrial/Vocational Education COLL_UNIV 018 Music Education COLL_UNIV 019 Religious Education COLL_UNIV Special Education (021-026) 021 Special Education Teaching COLL_UNIV 022 Highly Gifted or Exceptional Children COLL_UNIV 026 Special Education - Other(3) COLL_UNIV Non-teaching Educational Fields (027-032) 027 Audio-visual Educational Media ALL_UCT 028 Educational Administration and COLL_UNIV Organization 029 Educational Psychology COLL_UNIV 030 Educational Statistics and Sociology COLL_UNIV 031 History, Philosophy and Theory of COLL_UNIV Education 032 Paraprofessional Teacher Aide/ TRADE_COLL Educational Support Physical Education, Health and Recreation (033-039) 033 Physical Education and Health COLL_UNIV 034 Kinesiology and Kinanthropology COLL_UNIV 035 Recreology, Recreation and COLL_UNIV Leisure Services 036 Parks/Forest/Wildlife Recreation COLL_UNIV 037 Travel and Tourism TRADE_COLL 038 Sports Technology ALL_UCT 039 Physical Education, Health and - Other ALL_UCT Recreation Counselling Services and Personal Development (040-044) 040 Counselling Services - General COLL_UNIV 041 Counselling Psychology COLL_UNIV 042 Marriage/Family/Life Skills Counselling COLL_UNIV 043 Vocational Guidance and Counselling ALL_UCT 044 Counselling Services and Personal ALL_UCT Development - Other Other Education (045-046) 045 Education, n.e.c. - Other ALL_UCT 046 Postsecondary Teacher Training COLL_UNIV FINE AND APPLIED ARTS (047-079) Fine Arts (047-052) 047 Fine Arts - General COLL_UNIV 048 Aesthetics and Art Appreciation, COLL_UNIV Art Studies 049 Art History COLL_UNIV 050 Painting and Drawing ALL_UCT 051 Pottery and Ceramics ALL_UCT 052 Sculpture ALL_UCT Music (053-057) 053 Music, Musicology ALL_UCT 054 Composition and Conducting COLL_UNIV 055 Musical Instruments ALL_UCT 056 Music History and Music Theory COLL_UNIV 057 Vocal Music, Singing, Opera ALL_UCT Other Performing Arts (058-061) 058 Performing Arts - General ALL_UCT 059 Dance COLL_UNIV 060 Drama COLL_UNIV 061 Theatre COLL_UNIV Commercial and Promotional Arts (062-064) 062 Commercial Art/Promotional Art - TRADE_COLL General 063 Advertising Art TRADE_COLL 064 Modelling TRADE_COLL Graphic and Audio-visual Arts (065-070) 065 Graphic Art and Design ALL_UCT 066 Lithography and Print Making TRADE_COLL 067 Photography TRADE_COLL 069 Printing and Publishing TRADE_COLL 070 Audio-visual Arts ALL_UCT includes recorded music arts Creative and Design Arts (071-073) 071 Creative and Design Arts - General ALL_UCT 072 Handicrafts (Arts and Crafts) TRADE_COLL 073 Interior Design and Decorating ALL_UCT Other Applied Arts (074-079) 074 Applied Arts - General TRADE_COLL 075 Barbering TRADE_COLL 076 Beauty Culture and Cosmetology TRADE_COLL 077 Hairdressing TRADE_COLL 078 Upholstery and Furniture TRADE_COLL 079 Applied Arts - Repair and Renovation TRADE_COLL HUMANITIES AND RELATED FIELDS (080-124) Classics, Classical and Dead Languages (080-082) 080 Classics, Classical Studies COLL_UNIV 081 Ancient Greek, Latin and Roman COLL_UNIV 082 Classical Languages - Other COLL_UNIV History (083-087) 083 History - General COLL_UNIV 084 Canadian History COLL_UNIV 085 Medieval and Ancient History COLL_UNIV 087 History - Other COLL_UNIV (includes modern history) Library and Records Science (088-089) 088 Library/Documentation Science ALL_UCT 089 Museology, Museum Technology ALL_UCT Mass Media Studies (090-093) 090 Mass Media Studies - General COLL_UNIV 091 Cinematography, Film Studies COLL_UNIV 092 Radio-television COLL_UNIV 093 Journalism, News Reporting ALL_UCT English Language and Literature (094-098) 094 English Language and Literature - COLL_UNIV General 098 English Language and Literature - COLL_UNIV Specialized (includes American, British and Canadian(English) literature) French Language and Literature (099-102) 099 French Language and Literature - COLL_UNIV General 102 French Language and Literature - COLL_UNIV Specialized (includes French Canadian and European French literature) Other Languages and Literature (103-109) 103 Comparative Literature COLL_UNIV 104 Asian Languages and Literature COLL_UNIV 105 Germanic Language and Literature COLL_UNIV 106 Italian Language and Literature COLL_UNIV 107 Slavic or East European Languages COLL_UNIV and Literature 108 Linguistics COLL_UNIV 109 Languages and Literature - Other COLL_UNIV Philosophy (110-114) 110 Philosophy - General COLL_UNIV 113 Political Philosophy COLL_UNIV 114 Philosophy - Specialized (includes COLL_UNIV ethical and modern philosophy) Religious Studies (115-119) 115 Religion, Religious Studies COLL_UNIV 116 Comparative Religion COLL_UNIV 117 Divinity COLL_UNIV 118 Theology COLL_UNIV 119 Religious Studies - Other COLL_UNIV Other Humanities and Related Fields (120-124) 120 Humanities - General (General Arts) COLL_UNIV 121 Second Language Training ALL_UCT 122 Translation and Interpretation COLL_UNIV 123 Creative Writing COLL_UNIV 124 Humanities and Related Fields, ALL_UCT n.e.c. - Other SOCIAL SCIENCES AND RELATED FIELDS (125-187) Anthropology (125-129) 125 Anthropology - General COLL_UNIV 128 Social and Cultural Anthropology COLL_UNIV 129 Anthropology - Specialized (includes COLL_UNIV ethnology and related fields, physical anthropology and anthropometry) Archeology (130) 130 Archeology COLL_UNIV Area Studies (Non-languages or Literature) (131-137) 131 Asian Studies COLL_UNIV 132 Canadian Studies COLL_UNIV 136 Germanic, Slavic and East European COLL_UNIV Studies 137 Area Studies - Other includes Latin COLL_UNIV American, Caribbean, Near and Middle Eastern studies) Economics (138-143) 138 Economics - General COLL_UNIV 139 Agricultural Economics COLL_UNIV 143 Economics - Other (includes COLL_UNIV econometrics, international economics and labour/human resources economics) Geography (144-152) 144 Geography - General COLL_UNIV 145 Cartography ALL_UCT 146 Economic Geography COLL_UNIV 147 Historical and Political Geography COLL_UNIV 149 Natural Resources Geography COLL_UNIV 150 Physical Geography COLL_UNIV 151 Urban/Rural Geography COLL_UNIV 152 Geography - Other (includes human COLL_UNIV geography) Law and Jurisprudence (153-157) 153 Law and Jurisprudence - General COLL_UNIV 154 Civil, Criminal, Family, Common Law COLL_UNIV 155 Commercial/Business, Company Law COLL_UNIV 156 Constitutional/International Law COLL_UNIV 157 Law - Other COLL_UNIV Man/Environment Studies (158-161) 158 Man/Environment Studies - General COLL_UNIV 159 Human Ecology COLL_UNIV 160 Resource Planning and Management COLL_UNIV 161 Urban, Rural, Regional Planning and COLL_UNIV Development Political Science (162-166) 162 Political Science - General COLL_UNIV 165 International Relations, Foreign Policy COLL_UNIV 166 Political Science - Specialized COLL_UNIV (includes Canadian and comparitive politics) Psychology (167-171) 167 Psychology - General COLL_UNIV 168 Child, Adolescent, Developmental COLL_UNIV Psychology 169 Clinical Psychology COLL_UNIV 170 Social Psychology COLL_UNIV 171 Psychology - Other COLL_UNIV Sociology (172-177) 172 Sociology - General COLL_UNIV 173 Criminology, Penology, Deviance COLL_UNIV 176 Family Sociology COLL_UNIV 177 Sociology - Other (includes demography, COLL_UNIV population studies and ethnic sociology) Social Work and Social Services (178-184) 178 Social Work/Welfare - General COLL_UNIV 179 Child Care Services, Youth Services ALL_UCT 180 Correctional Technologies TRADE_COLL 181 Gerontology, Applied ALL_UCT 182 Police and Para-legal Technologies TRADE_COLL 183 Protection Services TRADE_COLL 184 Social Services and Welfare ALL_UCT Technologies - Other War and Military Studies (185) 185 War and Military Studies COLL_UNIV Other Social Sciences and Related Fields (186-187) 186 Social Sciences - General COLL_UNIV 187 Social Sciences and Related, ALL_UCT n.e.c. - Other COMMERCE, MANAGEMENT AND BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (188-220) Business and Commerce (188-191) 188 Business and Commerce - General COLL_UNIV 189 Business Administration COLL_UNIV 190 International Business and Commerce COLL_UNIV 191 Business and Commerce - Other ALL_UCT Financial Management (192-195) 192 Financial Management - General COLL_UNIV 193 Accounting and Auditing COLL_UNIV 194 Assessment and Appraisal COLL_UNIV 195 Financial Management - Other ALL_UCT Industrial Management and Administration (196-200) 196 Industrial Management and Relations ALL_UCT 197 Labour Management and Relations ALL_UCT 198 Public Administration COLL_UNIV 199 Personnel/Human Resources Management COLL_UNIV 200 Industrial Management and ALL_UCT Administration - Other Institutional Management and Administration (201-205) 201 Health Care and Services Management COLL_UNIV 202 Hotel and Food Administration ALL_UCT 203 Funeral Directing and Embalming ALL_UCT 204 Tourism and Resort Management ALL_UCT 205 Institutional Management - Other ALL_UCT Marketing, Merchandising, Retailing and Sales (206-210) 206 Customer/Public Relations ALL_UCT 207 Marketing COLL_UNIV 208 Merchandising ALL_UCT 209 Retailing and Sales ALL_UCT 210 Marketing and Sales - Other ALL_UCT Secretarial Science - General Fields (211-220) 211 Secretarial Science - General ALL_UCT 212 Bank and Financial Clerk TRADE_COLL 213 Business Machine Operations TRADE_COLL 214 Court Reporting and Recording ALL_UCT 215 Health/Medical Records Technology ALL_UCT 216 Legal Secretary ALL_UCT 217 Medical Secretary ALL_UCT 218 Office Accounting/Bookkeeping TRADE_COLL 219 Word Processing TRADE_COLL 220 Secretarial/Clerical - Other TRADE_COLL AGRICULTURAL AND BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES/TECHNOLOGIES (221-266) Agricultural Science (221-229) 221 Agricultural Science COLL_UNIV 222 Animal Science - General COLL_UNIV 223 Crop Science, Crops, Crop Farming COLL_UNIV 224 Food Science COLL_UNIV 225 Horticulture COLL_UNIV 226 Plant Science - General COLL_UNIV 228 Soil Science COLL_UNIV 229 Agricultural Science - Other (includes COLL_UNIV poultry science) Agricultural Technology (230-233) 230 Agricultural Technology TRADE_COLL 231 Agricultural Business ALL_UCT 232 General Farming Technology TRADE_COLL 233 Agricultural Technology - Other TRADE_COLL Animal Science Technologies (234-238) 234 Animal Science/Health Technology TRADE_COLL 235 Cattle/Swine Technology TRADE_COLL 236 Equine Studies/Horse Husbandry TRADE_COLL 237 Veterinary Technologies/Animal TRADE_COLL Health and Care 238 Animal Science Technologies - Other TRADE_COLL Biochemistry (239) 239 Biochemistry COLL_UNIV Biology (240-244) 240 Biology - General COLL_UNIV 241 Genetic and Developmental Biology UNIV_ONLY 242 Microbiology COLL_UNIV 243 Molecular Biology UNIV_ONLY 244 Biology - Other COLL_UNIV Biophysics (245) 245 Biophysics UNIV_ONLY Botany (246-248) 246 Botany - General ALL_UCT 247 Botany - Other COLL_UNIV 248 Plant Sciences - Specialized COLL_UNIV Household Science and Related Fields (249-254) 249 Household and Domestic Science ALL_UCT 250 Consumer Studies ALL_UCT 251 Clothing and Textiles TRADE_COLL 252 Food Nutrition, Dietetics and ALL_UCT Dietary Technology 253 Food Services and Preparation TRADE_COLL 254 Home Economics ALL_UCT Veterinary Medicine/Science (255-256) 255 Veterinary Medicine COLL_UNIV 256 Veterinary Science COLL_UNIV Zoology (257-262) 257 Zoology - General COLL_UNIV 258 Animal Anatomy, Ecology, Genetics or COLL_UNIV Histology 259 Entomology COLL_UNIV 260 Fisheries Biology COLL_UNIV 261 Marine/Ocean Biology COLL_UNIV 262 Zoology - Other COLL_UNIV Other Agricultural and Biological (263-266) Sciences/Technologies 263 Fish Farming, Fish Technologies and TRADE_COLL Processing 264 Food Processing Technologies - General TRADE_COLL 265 Hunting and Trapping TRADE_COLL 266 Agricultural and Biological Sciences/ ALL_UCT Technologies - Other ENGINEERING AND APPLIED SCIENCES (267-301) Architecture and Architectural Engineering (267-269) 267 Architecture - General COLL_UNIV 268 Architectural Engineering Design COLL_UNIV 269 Architecture - Other COLL_UNIV Aeronautical and Aerospace Engineering (270) 270 Aeronautical and Aerospace Engineering COLL_UNIV Biological and Chemical Engineering (272-273) 272 Biomedical, Biological or Clinical COLL_UNIV Engineering 273 Chemical Engineering COLL_UNIV Civil Engineering (274) 274 Civil Engineering COLL_UNIV Design/Systems Engineering (275) 275 Design/Systems Engineering COLL_UNIV Electrical/Electronic Engineering (276-278) 276 Computer Engineering COLL_UNIV 277 Electrical/Electronic Engineering COLL_UNIV 278 Music and Recording Engineering COLL_UNIV Industrial Engineering (279) 279 Industrial/Manufacturing Engineering COLL_UNIV Mechanical Engineering (280-282) 280 Mechanical Engineering - General COLL_UNIV (includes instrumentation engineering) 282 Power Engineering COLL_UNIV Mining, Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineering (283-286) 283 Geological Engineering COLL_UNIV 284 Metallurgical Engineering COLL_UNIV 285 Mining Engineering COLL_UNIV 286 Petroleum Engineering COLL_UNIV Resources and Environmental Engineering (287-289) 287 Agricultural Engineering COLL_UNIV 288 Environmental/Resource Engineering COLL_UNIV (includes water resources and watershed engineering) 289 Fisheries, Marine, Ocean Engineering COLL_UNIV Engineering Science (291-292) 291 Engineering Science UNIV_ONLY 292 Engineering Physics UNIV_ONLY Engineering, n.e.c. (293) 293 Engineering, n.e.c. COLL_UNIV Forestry (294-298) 294 Forestry COLL_UNIV 295 Forest Harvesting, Management, COLL_UNIV Protection 296 Forest Wildlife Management COLL_UNIV 298 Forestry - Other(includes silviculture) COLL_UNIV Landscape Architecture (299-301) 299 Landscape Architecture COLL_UNIV 300 Garden Design ALL_UCT 301 Landscape Technology TRADE_COLL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED SCIENCE TECHNOLOGIES AND TRADES (302-369) Architectural Technology (302-303) 302 Architectural Technology TRADE_COLL 303 Architectural Drafting TRADE_COLL Chemical Technology (304-307) 304 Chemical Technology TRADE_COLL 305 Biochemical Technology TRADE_COLL 306 Plastics, Fibreglass and Rubber TRADE_COLL Technology 307 Textile Processing Technology (Dyes) TRADE_COLL Building Technologies (308-317) 308 Boat, Shipbuilding and Naval ALL_UCT Architecture 309 Building Technology TRADE_COLL 310 Construction Electrician TRADE_COLL 311 Drywall, Plastering, Lathing TRADE_COLL 312 Heat and Insulation TRADE_COLL 313 Interior Finishing TRADE_COLL 314 Masonry (Brick, Stone, Concrete) TRADE_COLL 315 Plumbing and Pipe Trades TRADE_COLL 316 Welding Technology TRADE_COLL 317 Woodworking, Carpentry TRADE_COLL Data Processing and Computer Science Technologies (318-321) 318 Data Processing - General TRADE_COLL 319 Computer Science Technology TRADE_COLL 320 Computer Programming and Software TRADE_COLL 321 Microcomputer and Information Systems TRADE_COLL Electronic and Electrical Technologies (322-327) 322 Electronic Technology TRADE_COLL 323 Electrical Technology TRADE_COLL 324 Microwave and Radar Technology ALL_UCT 325 Radio and Television TRADE_COLL 326 Telecommunications Technology ALL_UCT 327 Electronic and Electrical Technologies TRADE_COLL - Other Environmental and Conservation Technologies (328-332) 328 Environmental Technology - General TRADE_COLL 329 Earth Resources Technology TRADE_COLL 330 Forest Conservation Technology TRADE_COLL 331 Renewable Resources Technology TRADE_COLL 332 Wildlife and Fisheries Conservation TRADE_COLL General and Civil Engineering Technologies (333-339) 333 Civil Engineering Technologies TRADE_COLL - General 334 Construction Technologies TRADE_COLL 335 Drafting - General TRADE_COLL 336 Drafting - Specialized TRADE_COLL 337 Engineering Design and Instrumentation TRADE_COLL Technology 338 Piping Technologies (Non-plumbing) TRADE_COLL 339 Surveying and Photogrammetric TRADE_COLL Technology Industrial Engineering Technologies (340-348) 340 Industrial Engineering Technology TRADE_COLL - General 341 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration ALL_UCT 342 Clothing/Fabric Product Manufacturing TRADE_COLL 343 Machinist/Machine Shop TRADE_COLL 344 Pattern Making TRADE_COLL 345 Power Sewing TRADE_COLL 346 Sheet Metal TRADE_COLL 347 Tool and Die TRADE_COLL 348 Industrial Technologies - Other ALL_UCT Mechanical Engineering Technologies (349-358) 349 Mechanical Engineering Technology TRADE_COLL - General 350 Aeronautical Engineering Technology TRADE_COLL 351 Agricultural Equipment Mechanics TRADE_COLL 352 Aircraft and Flight Mechanics TRADE_COLL Technology 353 Automobile Mechanics Technology TRADE_COLL 354 Heavy Equipment Mechanics TRADE_COLL 355 Marine Mechanics Engineering TRADE_COLL 356 Office/Business Machine Technology TRADE_COLL 357 Small Engine Repairs TRADE_COLL 358 Power/Stationary Engineering Technology TRADE_COLL Primary Industries/Resource Processing Technology (359-362) 359 Forest Products Technology TRADE_COLL 360 Mining and Metal Processing TRADE_COLL 361 Petroleum Technologies TRADE_COLL 362 Primary Industries/Resource Processing TRADE_COLL Technologies - Other Transportation Technologies (363-368) 363 Transportation Technology - General TRADE_COLL 364 Air Transportation Technology TRADE_COLL 365 Marine Transportation Technology TRADE_COLL 366 Motor - Commercial/Public Vehicle TRADE_COLL Transportation 367 Motor - Other Motor Transportation TRADE_COLL 368 Rail Transportation Technology TRADE_COLL Other Engineering/Applied Science Technologies, n.e.c. (369) 369 Engineering/Applied Science ALL_UCT Technologies, n.e.c. - Other HEALTH PROFESSIONS, SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGIES (370-441) Dentistry (370) 370 Dentistry or Dental Medicine UNIV_ONLY (includes dental science, orthodontics, paedodontics and dentistry specialities - other) Medicine - General (375) 375 General Practice Medicine UNIV_ONLY Medicine - Basic Medical Science (376-383) 376 Medical Anatomy UNIV_ONLY 377 Medical Biochemistry and Medical COLL_UNIV Biophysics 380 Medical Neurophysiology UNIV_ONLY 381 Medical Pharmacology COLL_UNIV 382 Medical Physiology UNIV_ONLY 383 Basic Medical Sciences - Other COLL_UNIV (includes medical embryology/genetics) Medical Specializations (Non-surgical) (384-388) 384 Neurology UNIV_ONLY 385 Paediatrics UNIV_ONLY 386 Psychiatry UNIV_ONLY 387 Radiology COLL_UNIV 388 Medical Specializations (Non-surgical) COLL_UNIV - Other Paraclinical Sciences (390-393) 390 Medical Immunology UNIV_ONLY 391 Medical Microbiology UNIV_ONLY 392 Medical Pathology UNIV_ONLY 393 Medical Parasitology, Virology and UNIV_ONLY Bacteriology and Other Paraclinical Sciences Surgery and Surgical Specializations (394-398) 394 Surgery - General UNIV_ONLY 395 Obstetrics and Gynaecology UNIV_ONLY 396 Orthopaedic Surgery UNIV_ONLY 398 Surgical Specialties - Other(includes UNIV_ONLY plastic surgery) Nursing (399-406) 399 Nursing - General COLL_UNIV 402 Medical, Surgical, Hospital Nursing COLL_UNIV 403 Obstetric Nursing COLL_UNIV 404 Psychiatric Nursing and Mental Health COLL_UNIV Care 405 Public Health and Community Nursing COLL_UNIV 406 Nursing - Other (includes critical care COLL_UNIV and geriatric nursing) Nursing Assistance (407-410) 407 Nursing Assistant, Assistant Nursing TRADE_COLL 408 Health Care Aide/Support TRADE_COLL 409 Long-term Care Aide TRADE_COLL 410 Nursing Aide, Orderly TRADE_COLL Optometry (411) 411 Optometry COLL_UNIV Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical Sciences (412-413) 412 Pharmacy COLL_UNIV 413 Pharmaceutical Sciences/Technology COLL_UNIV Public Health (414-418) 414 Public Health (includes preventive ALL_UCT and veterinary public health) 415 Community Medicine and Health ALL_UCT 416 Dental Public Health and Hygiene COLL_UNIV 417 Epidemiology and Biostatistics COLL_UNIV 418 Industrial Health, Medicine and Hygiene ALL_UCT Rehabilitation Medicine (421-424) 421 Rehabilitation Medicine - General COLL_UNIV 422 Audiology and Speech Pathology and COLL_UNIV Therapy 423 Occupational and Physical Therapy COLL_UNIV 424 Physiotherapy COLL_UNIV Medical Laboratory and Diagnostic Technology (425-429) 425 Medical Laboratory Technology COLL_UNIV 426 Biological Laboratory Technology ALL_UCT 427 Biomedical Electronic Technology ALL_UCT 428 Dental Laboratory Technology ALL_UCT 429 Radiological Technology COLL_UNIV Medical Treatment Technologies (431-439) 431 Chiropractic Technology COLL_UNIV 432 Dental Assistant TRADE_COLL 433 Emergency Paramedical Technology TRADE_COLL 434 Mental Health and Retardation TRADE_COLL Technology 435 Respiratory Technology TRADE_COLL 436 Ultrasound and Ultrasonagraphy TRADE_COLL 437 X-ray - Medical Technology/Radiography TRADE_COLL 438 X-ray - Radiotherapy/Nuclear Medicine TRADE_COLL 439 Medical Treatment Technologies - Other TRADE_COLL (includes cardio-pulmonary resucitation) Medical Equipment and Prosthetics (440) 440 Medical Equipment and Prosthetics ALL_UCT Other Health Professions, Sciences and (441) Technologies, n.e.c. 441 Health Professions, Sciences and ALL_UCT Technologies, n.e.c. - Other MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICAL SCIENCES (442-480) Actuarial Science (442) 442 Actuarial Science COLL_UNIV Applied Mathematics (443-447) 443 Applied Mathematics - General COLL_UNIV 444 Computer Science - General COLL_UNIV 445 Computer Science - Systems Design and COLL_UNIV Analysis 446 Operations Research COLL_UNIV 447 Applied Mathematics - Other COLL_UNIV Chemistry (448-454) 448 Chemistry - General COLL_UNIV 449 Analytical Chemistry COLL_UNIV 451 Organic and Inorganic Chemistry COLL_UNIV 452 Physical Chemistry COLL_UNIV 454 Chemistry Specialties - Other (includes COLL_UNIV spectroscopy) Geology and Related Fields (455-462) 455 Geology, Geological and Earth Sciences COLL_UNIV 456 Geochemistry and Geochronology COLL_UNIV 457 Geophysics and Geomorphology COLL_UNIV 459 Mineral Geology COLL_UNIV 462 Geology and Related Fields, n.e.c. COLL_UNIV (includes hydrogeology, hydrology, petrology, petrography, stratigraphy and sedimentology) Mathematical Statistics (463) 463 Mathematical Statistics UNIV_ONLY Mathematics (464) 464 Mathematics COLL_UNIV Metallurgy and Materials Science (465) 465 Metallurgy and Materials Science COLL_UNIV Meteorology (466) 466 Meteorology COLL_UNIV Oceanography and Marine Sciences (467) 467 Oceanography and Marine Sciences COLL_UNIV (includes biological oceanography, fisheries oceanography and marine sciences, n.e.c. - other) Physics (471-478) 471 Physics - General COLL_UNIV 472 Astrophysics and Astronomy UNIV_ONLY 473 Atomic and Nuclear Physics UNIV_ONLY 474 Chemical Physics UNIV_ONLY 477 Theoretical and Mathematical Physics COLL_UNIV 478 Physics, n.e.c. - Other (includes high COLL_UNIV energy, particle and solid state physics) General Science (479-480) 479 General Science COLL_UNIV 480 Science Lab Technology TRADE_COLL ALL OTHER, N.E.C. (481) 481 All Other, n.e.c. ALL_UCT (481) NO SPECIALIZATION (482) 482 No Specialization ALL_UCT (482) NO POSTSECONDARY QUALIFICATION (485) 485 No Postsecondary Qualification (485) ________________________________________ 1) Includes Computer Science Teaching. 2) Includes Secondary School Specialities - Other. 3) Includes Multicultural Education (Native, Other) and Remedial Reading 4) Includes Recorded Music Arts. 5) Includes Modern History. 6) Includes American, British and Canadian (English) Literature. 7) Includes French Canadian and European French Literature. 8) Includes Ethical and Modern Philosophy. 9) Includes Ethnology and Related Fields, Physical Anthropology and Anthropometry. 10) Includes Latin American, Caribbean, Near and Middle Eastern Studies. 11) Includes Econometrics, International Economics and Labour/Human Resources Economics. 12) Includes Human Geography. 13) Includes Canadian and Comparative Politics. 14) Includes Demography, Population Studies and Ethnic Sociology. 15) Includes Poultry Science. 16) Includes Instrumentation Engineering. 17) Includes Water Resources and Watershed Engineering. 18) Includes Silviculture. 19) Includes Dental Science, Orthodontic, Paedodontics and Dentistry Specialties - Other. 20) Includes Medical Embryology/Genetics. 21) Includes Plastic Surgery. 22) Includes Critical Care and Geriatric Nursing. 23) Includes Preventive Medicine and Veterinary Public Health. 24) Includes Cardio-pulmonary Resuscitation. 25) Includes Spectroscopy. 26) Includes Hydrogeology, Hydrology, Petrology, Petrography, Stratigraphy and Sedimentology. 27) Includes Biological Oceanography, Fisheries Oceanography and Marine Sciences, n.e.c. - Other. 28) Includes High Energy, Particle and Solid State Physics. ___________________________________ * LEVEL-LEGEND ALL_UCT All (all postsecondary) TRADE_COLL Trade - College COLL_UNIV College - University UNIV_ONLY University only Note: n.e.c. = not elsewhere classified 2098 SCHOOLING: SCHOOL ATTENDANCE Refers to either full-time or part-time (day or evening) attendance at school, college or university during the nine-month period between September 1990 and June 4, 1991. Attendance is counted only for courses which could be used as credits towards a certificate, diploma or degree. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1976 (1/3 sample),* 1971 (1/3 sample),** 1961 *** Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 27 Responses: No, did not attend in past nine months; Yes, full time; Yes, part time, day or evening Remarks: Attendance is excluded for courses taken for leisure, recreation or personal interest. Attendance is considered to be full time if the person was taking 75% or more of the normal course load in the grade or year in which the person is registered. Short-term courses of six weeks or less taken during the day are considered to be part-time attendance. If the person attended both full time and part time during the reference period, then only full time is to be recorded. * A significant response error bias in the 1976 school attendance data renders any comparisons for secondary school attendance inappropriate, particularly in the 15-19 age group; however, 1976 estimates for university and postsecondary non- university attendance were not affected. ** In 1971, the term "school or university" was used rather than "educational institution" and the phrase "at any time" was not employed. Information on kind of institution attended was not requested. Reported for the total population. *** In 1961, data for part-time attendance were not collected. The question was: "Since last September, did you attend school or university? Yes (any regular day-time attendance); No". Reported for the total population. The 1961 concept of school attendance did not include attendance at such institutions as technical institutes, community colleges, teachers' colleges, CEGEPs, schools of nursing, trade schools and business schools. 2099 SCHOOLING: SECONDARY SCHOOL GRADUATION CERTIFICATE Refers to the possession of a secondary school graduation certificate or its equivalent regardless of whether other educational qualifications were held or not. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 25, 26 and 28 (not resident on the database) Responses: Total Without secondary certificate Without further training With further training With trades certificate With other non-university With secondary certificate Without further training With further training Remarks: This is a summary variable first published in 1986 Census output (see Table 7, Catalogue No. 93-110) that essentially dichotomizes the population into those without and with a secondary school graduation certificate or its equivalent. Further information is provided on whether further training was undertaken or not. The derivation procedure for this variable utilized the Schooling: Trades and Other Non-university Certificates variable in conjunction with the Schooling: Years of University and Schooling: Years of Other Non-university Education variables. Persons with some reported years of university schooling were assumed to have a secondary graduation certificate or its equivalent. In the 1986 Census, there was some evidence that secondary school graduation was being underestimated, particularly for respondents with trades certificates or other non-university schooling. However, improvements in the wording of the 1991 Census qualification question (Q. 28) should minimize if not eliminate this underestimate. The major source of this underestimate appeared to reside in the term "graduation" where some respondents associated the term with actual attendance or participation in a graduation ceremony. * This variable was not published in 1981, but can be reconstructed from the 1981 database in the form of special tabulations employing standard algorithms. 2100 SCHOOLING: TOTAL YEARS OF SCHOOLING Refers to the total sum of the years (or grades) of schooling at the elementary, secondary, university and other non-university levels. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample),* 1976 (1/3 sample),* 1971 (1/3 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 24, 25 and 26 (not resident on the database) Responses: 0 to 31 years Remarks: This variable is shown primarily in summary data aggregations (such as 0, 1-4, 5-8, 9-10, 11-13, 14- 17 and 18 and more) and also in the form of second- order derivatives such as average and median years of schooling. Average years of schooling is the weighted arithmetic mean of the total number of years of schooling. It is calculated by summing the integer values and dividing by the number of values. Median years of schooling is defined as that value of the distribution of total years of schooling that divides the frequency of values into two equal values, one half falling below the median value, and the other exceeding it. For a total frequency of 2N + 1 cases (odd number), the median is the value of the (N + 1)th case; for 2N case (even number), the median is the average of the Nth and the (N + 1)th case. In the calculation of the above derivatives, it is recommended that unrounded frequencies be utilized. Also, the convention of ascribing a 1/2 value for the "less than 1 year of completed courses" for both university and other non-university is recommended. The convention for the upper bound is to use 13 years for the 11-15 value for years of university and 5 years for the 4 years or more value for years of other non- university. The concept of average and median years can also be applied to years of postsecondary schooling in like fashion. * In the 1981, 1976 and 1971 Censuses, this variable was not published. However, the variable can be derived from the database using special tabulations. 2101 SCHOOLING: TRADES AND OTHER NON-UNIVERSITY CERTIFICATES Refers to the possession of either a trades certificate or diploma, or an other non-university certificate or diploma, or both, regardless of whether other educational qualifications are held or not. This variable also indicates whether a secondary school graduation certificate was reported or not. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample)* Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable: Question 28, cells 08, 09 and 10 Responses: Neither trades nor other non-university certificate; Trades certificate, without secondary certificate; Other non-university certificate, without secondary certificate; Both trades and other non-university certificates, without secondary certificate; Trades certificate, with secondary certificate; Other non-university certificate, with secondary certificate; Both trades and other non-university certificates, with secondary certificate Remarks: This derived variable indicates all of the possible combinations in conjunction with trades and other non-university certificates or diplomas and the presence or absence of the secondary school graduation certificate. This information is very useful in indicating the possible overlap and the interrelations between the two areas. A trades certificate is usually obtained through apprenticeship or journeyman's training over several years, in trade occupations such as welding, plumbing and carpentry; this may also be accompanied by periods of in-school training in trade schools, community colleges or other such institutions. Alternatively, trades certificates may also be acquired exclusively through in-school (as opposed to on-the-job) training at trade or vocational schools, manpower training centres or trades divisions of community colleges. A non-university certificate or diploma is obtained from institutions which do not grant degrees, such as nursing schools, community colleges, CEGEPs, institutes of technology, or private business colleges. * In 1971, a special series of questions and data were related to Apprenticeship and Vocational Training. The 1991, 1986 and 1981 data for trades certificates are not directly comparable to the 1971 vocational course data, which were defined as full-time courses of three months' duration or longer. In addition, the 1971 data allowed for the distinction between apprenticeship and full-time vocational training, as well as indicating the length and the date of completion of the training. The 1981 trades certificate data, however, may allow for rough comparisons with 1971, particularly when combined with occupation information. The 1991 and 1986 trades certificate data can be compared with 1971 particularly when combined either with occupation, major field of study information, or years of other non-university education. 2102 SCHOOLING: UNIVERSITY CERTIFICATE ABOVE BACHELOR LEVEL Refers to the possession of a university certificate or diploma above the bachelor level, regardless of whether other educational qualifications are held or not. Normally, this type of certificate is obtained following a first degree in the same field of study, or following a master's or first professional degree. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable: Question 28, cell 13 Responses: No certificate or diploma above bachelor level; Certificate or diploma above bachelor level Remarks: This derived variable provides a more complete count of all persons with university certificates above the bachelor level, regardless of what other qualifications were obtained. Diplomas or certificates obtained following a first degree in the same field of study (e.g., a diploma in education) are counted in the Schooling: Highest Degree, Certificate or Diploma variable. However, these types of certificates or diplomas are also granted following either a master's or first professional degree (e.g., in medicine). In these cases, the higher degrees take precedence in the highest degree variable, and no count is available for persons with these higher degrees and the university certificate above the bachelor level. Examples of such certificates can be found in university programs or courses in medical specializations or applied engineering and high technology areas. 2103 SCHOOLING: YEARS OF OTHER NON-UNIVERSITY EDUCATION Refers to the total number of completed years (or less than one year of completed courses) of training at educational institutions which do not grant degrees and are not at the elementary-secondary level. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample),* 1976 (1/3 sample),** 1971 (1/3 sample)*** Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 26 Responses: None; Less than 1 year (of completed courses); 1 year; 2 years; 3 years; 4 years or more Remarks: Schooling in all institutions other than universities or secondary or elementary schools is included here, whether or not these institutions require a secondary (high) school certificate for entrance. Leisure or recreation courses are not intended to be included. As in 1986, for the 1991 Census, the Belles-Lettres and Rh‚torique levels of classical colleges in Quebec are intended to be included as "1 year" and "2 years" of "other non-university" education respectively. The number of academic years successfully completed is reported regardless of the actual length of time it may have taken. If other non-university training was received by correspondence or through part-time (day or evening) attendance, then the accumulated credits are to be converted to the equivalent number of years in the regular full-time program. CEGEP (general) and CEGEP (professional) courses are both included in this category. In 1976, university transfer courses of community colleges were intended to be counted at the university level. In 1981, the intent was that these courses be indicated at the "other non- university" level. The 1981 situation has been replicated in 1986 and 1991. No explicit reference therefore was made to convert "university transfer courses" taken at community colleges to the university level. The reason for this is that there are no Canada-wide standards for defining "university transfer courses" and differences exist within provinces as well. The defining feature of education in this area is thus the institution where the education was obtained (i.e. CEGEPs and community colleges are non-university institutions). * In 1981, the Belles-Lettres and Rh‚torique levels of classical colleges in Quebec were to be included as "1 year" and "2 years" of "university" education respectively. ** In 1976, CEGEP (general) courses were intended to be included at the university level; most respondents, however, were not consistent in the application of this definition. The responses in 1976 were: None; 1 year or less; 2 years; 3 years or more. *** In 1971, this area was referred to as "schooling since secondary". The responses were: None; 1; 2; 3+ for "other than university". In 1961, this category was not included. 2104 SCHOOLING: YEARS OF UNIVERSITY Refers to the total number of completed years (or less than one year of completed courses) of education at educational institutions which confer a degree, certificate or diploma upon successful completion of a program of studies. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample),* 1976 (1/3 sample),** 1971 (1/3 sample),*** 1961*** Reported for: Population 15 years of age and over, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Direct variable: Question 25 Responses: None; Less than 1 year (of completed courses); 1 year; 2 years; 3 years; 4 years; 5 years; 6 years; 7 years; 8 years; 9 years; 10 years; 11-15 years Remarks: The number of years refers to academic years completed, regardless of the actual length of time it may have taken. Two semesters with the normal course load are considered equivalent to one academic year. If university training was completed through correspondence, or through part-time (day or evening) study, then the accumulated credits are to be converted to the equivalent number of years in the regular full-time university program. As in 1986, for the 1991 Census, the Philo I and Philo II levels of classical colleges in Quebec are intended to be included as "1 year" and "2 years" of "university" education respectively. Persons who received teacher training in a faculty of education associated with a university are to indicate such training at the university level. Otherwise, if the teacher training either presently or in past years was in a non-university affiliated setting, then such training is considered "other non-university" schooling. * In 1981, the Philo I and Philo II levels of classical colleges in Quebec were to be included as "3 years" and "4 years" of "university" education respectively. ** In 1976, university transfer and CEGEP (general) courses were intended to be included at the university level. In the case of CEGEP (general), this definition was not consistently applied by respondents. Responses in 1976 were: None; 1 year or less; 2 years; 3 years; 4 years; 5 years; and 6 years or more. *** In 1971, the responses were: None; 1; 2; 3; 4; 5; and 6+. In 1961, the responses were: 1-2; 3; 4+; Degree, and referred to the highest year attended, not necessarily completed. In both 1971 and 1961, there were no explicit instructions related to university transfer courses. 2105 SEX Refers to the gender of the respondent. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: Total population Question No.: Direct variable: Question 4 Responses: Male; Female Remarks: Since a person's first name is not always a sufficient indication of gender (e.g., Jean, Leslie, Francis), respondents were required to specify "Male" or "Female". 2106 VISIBLE MINORITIES According to the Employment Equity Act (1986), visible minorities are persons (other than aboriginal persons), who are non-Caucasian in race or non-white in colour. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Total population, excluding institutional residents Question No.: Derived variable* Responses: This is a derived variable with the following groups (reported in response to the ethnic origin question) generally regarded as comprising visible minorities in Canada: Blacks, Chinese, Japanese, Koreans, Filipinos, Indo-Pakistanis, West Asians and Arabs, Southeast Asians, Latin Americans, Indonesians and Pacific Islanders. Remarks: * Because there is no question on race or colour in the census, data on visible minorities are derived from responses to the ethnic origin question, in conjunction with other ethno-cultural information, such as language, place of birth and religion. To address employment equity requirements, data on visible minorities have been derived from the 1986 and 1981 Censuses. Because of changes to the ethnic origin question and processing between 1981 and 1986, information on visible minorities is not directly comparable for these census years. The 1991 approach to derivation of visible minority information will be based largely on strategies put in place for both the 1986 and 1981 Censuses. 3000 FAMILY UNIVERSE Within the Family Universe, two general categories are identified: census families and economic families. See Figure 15 below for an listing of family universes and subuniverses. Figure 16 "Economic and Census Family Membership and Family Status", is only available in printed form. Refer to the User Documentation or publication 92-301E, pages 117 and 118, to view these figures in their original format. ________________________________________________________________ Figure 15. Census and Economic Family Universes and Subuniverses Census families Census families in private households Census family composition Census family household composition Census family structure Census family type Census family total income Population in private households Census family living arrangements Census family status Economic families Economic families in private households Economic family structure Economic family type Economic family total income Population in private households Economic family status Economic families and unattached individuals Income status 3001 CENSUS FAMILY Refers to a now-married couple (with or without never-married sons and/or daughters of either or both spouses), a couple living common-law (again with or without never-married sons and/or daughters of either or both partners), or a lone parent of any marital status, with at least one never-married son or daughter living in the same dwelling. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: Population in private households and Hutterite collectives Question Nos.: This concept is based on information provided in response to Questions 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. It is a derived variable and does not reside on the census database. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: In censuses prior to 1991, the families of now- married couples and those of common-law couples together constituted "husband-wife families" and appeared as such in most census family tables. The census family and its associated classifications and variables are derived based on responses to the questions on relationship to Person 1, sex, date of birth and marital status. In addition, consideration is given to the order in which household members are listed on the questionnaire and responses to a question on common-law status, which is new for the 1991 Census. For a summary of the various classifications for census families, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 17 on page 120 for its original format. _____________________________________________________________ Figure 17. Overview of Census Family Variables Census Family Composition Number of never-married sons and/or daughters at home Age groups of never-married sons and/or daughters at home Household composition Presence and number of additional persons in the household Living arrangements Family households -family persons -non-family persons Non-family households Status Family persons [husband, wife, common-law partner (male or female), male or female lone parent, never-married son or daughter] Non-family persons [related or unrelated to the household reference person (Person 1)] Type Maintaining family -primary -other Non-maintaining family Structure Families of now-married couples (with/without never- married sons and/or daughters) Families of common-law couples (with/without never- married sons and/or daughters) Lone-parent families (male or female) 3002 CENSUS FAMILY COMPOSITION Refers to the classification of census families according to the number and/or age groups of never-married sons and/or daughters at home. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Reported for: Census families in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which does not reside on the census database. Responses: Families by Number of Never-married Sons and/or Daughters at Home Here, families are classified to indicate those without never-married sons and daughters at home through to those with eight or more, as applicable. Families by Age Groups of Never-married Sons and/or Daughters at Home Here, families with never-married sons and/or daughters at home are classified to indicate those with: all never-married sons and/or daughters aged 18 or over; at least one aged 18 or over and at least one aged 17 or under; all never-married sons and/or daughters aged 17 or under. This last category may be further subdivided to show, for example, the following age groups of never-married sons and/or daughters at home. All under 6 years All 6-14 years All 15-17 years Some under 6 and some 6-14 years Some under 6 and some 15-17 years Some 6-14 and some 15-17 years Some under 6, some 6-14 and some 15-17 years (Some refers to at least one son or one daughter in each age group.) Remarks: In previous censuses, census family composition referred to the number and/or age groups of children at home. In the 1991 Census, the reference is to never-married sons and/or daughters; these persons may be of any age. This terminological change does not affect historical comparability. In the 1971 Census, figures were published according to the number of children under 25 years of age only. 3003 CENSUS FAMILY HOUSEHOLD COMPOSITION Refers to the classification of census families according to the presence and number of "additional persons" in the household. Additional persons refers to any household member who is not a member of the census family being considered. These additional persons may be either members of another census family or non- family persons. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981 Reported for: Census families in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which does not reside on the census database. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: This variable is designed to provide data on household composition from the census family perspective. 3004 CENSUS FAMILY LIVING ARRANGEMENTS Refers to the classification of persons in terms of whether they are members of a family household or a non-family household,* and whether they are family or non-family persons.* Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981 Reported for: Population in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which does not reside on the census database. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: This variable is designed to provide data on household living arrangements at the population level. It may be classified as follows: Total persons in private households Total persons in family households Husbands, wives, common-law partners or lone parents Never-married sons and/or daughters in families of now-married couples Never-married sons and/or daughters in families of common-law couples Never-married sons and/or daughters in lone- parent families Non-family persons Living with relatives only Living with relatives and other persons Living with non-relatives only** Total persons in non-family households Living with relatives only Living with non-relatives only Living with relatives and other persons Living alone * See also Household Type and Census Family Status. ** Since this is a family household, at least two of these non-relatives must constitute a census family. 3005 CENSUS FAMILY STATUS Refers to the classification of the population according to whether or not they are members of a census family. See in the User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 16 " Economic and Census Family Membership and Family Status" on page 118 for additional information on family membership and status. Family persons refer to household members who belong to a census family. They, in turn, are further classified as follows: Husband and wife refer to persons of opposite sex who are legally married to each other and living in the same dwelling. Common-law partners are two persons of opposite sex who are not legally married to each other but live together as husband and wife in the same dwelling. Lone parent refers to a mother or a father, with no spouse or common-law partner present, living in a dwelling with one or more never-married sons and/or daughters. Never-married sons and/or daughters refers to blood, step or adopted sons and daughters who have never married (regardless of age) and are living in the same dwelling as their parent(s). Sons and daughters who are currently or were previously married, or who are living common-law, are not considered to be members of their parent(s)' census family even if they are living in the same dwelling. In addition, those never-married sons and daughters who do not live in the same dwelling as their parent(s) are not considered members of their parent(s)' census family. Non-family persons refer to household members who do not belong to a census family. They may be related to Person 1 (the household reference person) (e.g., Person 1's divorced brother, brother-in-law, cousin, grandparent) or unrelated (e.g., lodger, room-mate, employee). A person living alone is always a non-family person. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976,* 1971** Reported for: Population in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which resides on the census database. Responses: Husband, male common-law partner; wife, female common-law partner; male lone parent; female lone parent; never-married son, never-married daughter; non-family person Remarks: Common-law partners may be of any marital status other than "legally married and not separated". In previous censuses, the term child (children) was used in reference to never-married sons and/or daughters, regardless of age. * As of the 1976 Census, unrelated wards, foster and guardianship children, whether or not pay is received, are classified and tabulated as lodgers rather than as children in families (as had been the previous census practice), in order to adhere more closely to the literal definition and meaning of children (i.e. sons and daughters) in census families. ** The published data for census family status for 1971, 1976, 1981 and 1986 are comparable, although census family status as defined in the Dictionary of the 1971 Census terms corresponds to the current definition of census family structure. 3006 CENSUS FAMILY STRUCTURE Refers to the classification of census families into families of now-married couples (with or without never-married sons or daughters of either or both spouses), families of common-law couples (with or without never-married sons or daughters of either or both partners) and lone-parent families by sex of parent. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Reported for: Census families in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which does not reside on the census database. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: In previous censuses, the term "husband-wife families" covered both the families of now-married couples and those of common-law couples. 3007 CENSUS FAMILY TYPE Refers to the classification of census families according to whether or not any family member is responsible for household payments, i.e. rent, or mortgage, or taxes, or electricity, etc. Primary maintaining family refers to any census family of which the person responsible for household payments is a member. Other maintaining family refers to any census family which contains a household maintainer other than the person responsible for household payments. Non-maintaining family refers to a census family which does not contain any person who is responsible for household payments. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981,* 1976, 1971 Reported for: Census families in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which resides on the census database. In addition to the information used to determine families, this concept uses responses to Question H1. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: In the 1986 and 1981 Censuses, the "family type" classification identified primary and secondary families. The primary maintaining family of the 1991 Census is equivalent to the primary families of 1986 and 1981. Other maintaining and non- maintaining families combined are equivalent to the secondary families in 1986 and 1981. The classification into primary maintaining, other maintaining and non-maintaining families applies to family persons only. * In 1981, the criterion for determining family type was changed. A new question was added to the census questionnaire to determine a person responsible for paying the rent, or mortgage, or taxes, or electricity, and was used to identify primary and secondary families. For 1986, this criterion was maintained. In previous censuses, the primary family was defined as the family of the head of the household. 3008 ECONOMIC FAMILY Refers to a group of two or more persons who live in the same dwelling and are related to each other by blood, marriage, common-law or adoption. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Reported for: Population in private households and Hutterite collectives Question Nos.: This concept is based on information provided in response to Questions 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. It is a derived variable and does not reside on the census database. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: The economic family concept requires only that family members be related by blood, marriage, common-law or adoption. By contrast, the census family concept requires that family members be either husband or wife, male or female common-law partner or never-married son or daughter with a parent present. The concept of economic family may therefore refer to a larger group of persons than does the census family concept. For example: a widowed mother living with her married son and daughter-in-law would be treated as a non-family person under the definition of a census family. That same person would, however, be counted as a member of an economic family along with her son and daughter-in-law. Two or more related families living together also constitute one economic family, as for example, a man and his wife living with their married son and daughter-in-law. Two or more brothers or sisters living together, apart from their parents, will form an economic family, but not a census family since they do not meet the requirements for the latter. The economic family and its associated classifications and variables are derived based on responses to the questions on relationship to Person 1, sex, date of birth and marital status. In addition, consideration is given to the order in which household members are listed on the questionnaire and to responses to a question on common-law status, which is new for the 1991 Census. 3009 ECONOMIC FAMILY STATUS Refers to the classification of population according to whether or not they are members of an economic family. (See Figure 15 at end of this definition for further information. Refer to Figure 15 in the User Documentation or to Figure 15 in publication 92-301E, page 117, to view this figure in its original format. Economic family persons refer to two or more household members who are related to each other by blood, marriage, common-law or adoption and thereby constitute an economic family. Unattached individuals refer to household members who are not members of an economic family. A person living alone is always an unattached individual. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Reported for: Population in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which does not reside on the census database. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Not applicable ____________________________________________________________ Figure 15. Census and Economic Family Universes and Subuniverses Census families Census families in private households Census family composition Census family household composition Census family structure Census family type Census family total income Population in private households Census family living arrangements Census family status Economic families Economic families in private households Economic family structure Economic family type Economic family total income Population in private households Economic family status Economic families and unattached individuals Income status 3010 ECONOMIC FAMILY STRUCTURE Refers to the classification of economic families into those of now-married couples, common-law couples and other economic families. Economic families of now-married couples are those in which one of two spouses, either the husband or the wife, is the economic family reference person. Economic families of common-law couples are those in which one of two common-law partners is the economic family reference person. Other economic families are of two kinds: those in which either a male or female lone parent is the economic family reference person, or those in which a non-census family person is the economic family reference person. Censuses: 1991, 1986,* 1981* Reported for: Economic families in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which does not reside on the census database. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: While there is only one household reference person per household, there may be more than one economic family in a household and each one will contain an economic family reference person. * In the 1986 and 1981 Censuses, economic families of now-married couples and economic families of common-law couples together constituted husband-wife economic families. 3011 ECONOMIC FAMILY TYPE Refers to the classification of economic families according to whether or not any family member is responsible for household payments, i.e. rent, or mortgage, or taxes, or electricity, etc. Primary economic family refers to the economic family of which the person responsible for household payments is a member. Secondary economic family refers to any economic family which does not contain the person responsible for household payments. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981,* 1976, 1971 Reported for: Economic families in private households Question Nos.: Not directly captured. This is a derived variable which resides on the census database. In addition to the information used to determine families, this concept uses responses to Question H1. Responses: Not applicable Remarks: If the first person listed is an unattached individual, or resides elsewhere, no primary economic family will exist in the household, regardless of whether or not Person 1 is an economic family member. Accordingly, any economic family in such a household will be classified as a secondary economic family. * In 1981, the criterion for determining family type was changed. A new question was added to the census questionnaire to determine a person responsible for paying the rent, or mortgage, or taxes, or electricity, and was used to identify primary and secondary economic families. For 1986, this criterion was maintained. In previous censuses, the primary economic family was defined as the economic family of the head of the household. While we anticipate that in the majority of cases the person responsible for household payments will also be considered as the household reference person (Person 1), this will not always be the case. 3012 INCOME: AVERAGE INCOME OF CENSUS FAMILIES AND NON-FAMILY PERSONS 15 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER Average census family income refers to the weighted mean total income of census families in 1990. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Census families and non-family persons 15 years of age and over Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: Average income is calculated from unrounded data by dividing the aggregate income of a specified group of families (e.g., husband-wife families with working wives) by the number of families in that group whether or not they reported income. Similarly, the average income of a group of non- family persons is calculated from unrounded data by dividing the aggregate income of the specified group by the number of all non-family persons 15 years of age and over in the group whether or not they reported income. This statistic is not resident on the database. It is calculated for any group as follows: _ the sum of (YiWi) Y = ------------------, where the sum of Wi _ Y = Average income of the group Yi = Actual income of each census family/non- family person in the group Wi = Weight of each census family/non-family person in the group Average and median incomes of census families and non-family persons and the corresponding standard errors for average income are normally calculated for all units in the specified group, whether or not they reported income. 3013 INCOME: AVERAGE INCOME OF ECONOMIC FAMILIES AND UNATTACHED INDIVIDUALS 15 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER Average economic family income refers to the weighted mean total income of economic families in 1990. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Economic families and unattached individuals 15 years of age and over Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: Average income is calculated from unrounded data by dividing the aggregate income of a specified group of families (e.g., husband-wife families with working wives) by the number of families in that group whether or not they reported income. Similarly, the average income of a group of unattached individuals is calculated from unrounded data by dividing the aggregate income of the specified group by the number of all unattached individuals 15 years of age and over in the group, whether or not they reported income. See "Remarks" under Income: Average Income of Census Families and Non-family Persons 15 Years of Age and Over for the method of calculation employed to derive this statistic. 3014 INCOME: CENSUS FAMILY TOTAL INCOME The total income of a census family is the sum of the total incomes of all members of that family. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Census families in private households Question No.: Derived variable Responses: Positive or negative dollar value or nil Remarks: For details on the components of total income and on the intercensal comparability of the concept, coverage, methodology and reference period for income data, see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 3015 INCOME: ECONOMIC FAMILY TOTAL INCOME The total income of an economic family is the sum of the total incomes of all members of that family. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Economic families in private households Question No.: Derived variable Responses: Positive or negative dollar value or nil Remarks: For details on the components of total income and on the intercensal comparability of the concept, coverage, methodology and reference period for income data, see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income. 3016 INCOME: INCIDENCE OF LOW INCOME The incidence of low income is the proportion or percentage of economic families or unattached individuals in a given classification below the low income cut-offs. These incidence rates are calculated from unrounded estimates of economic families and unattached individuals 15 years of age and over. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Economic families and unattached individuals 15 years of age and over in private households Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Percentage values Remarks: (1) Incidence of low income can also be derived for census families, non-family persons and the population in private households. See Low Income Statistics for Census Families and Households, Staff Report No. 1991-1, Labour and Household Surveys Analysis Division, Statistics Canada. (2) Incidence rates are calculated from estimates of families and unattached individuals prior to rounding. (3) See also Income: Low Income Cut-offs (LICOs) and Income: Income Status. 3017 INCOME: INCOME STATUS Refers to the position of an economic family or an unattached individual 15 years of age and over in relation to Statistics Canada's low income cut-offs (LICOs). Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Economic families and unattached individuals 15 years of age and over in private households Question No.: Derived variable Responses: ABOVELINE; BELOWLINE; NOTAPPCBL Remarks: (1) The three derived code values indicate the following for each economic family/unat- tached individual. ABOVELINE: The total income of the economic family or unattached individual was not below the low income cut-off point for it. BELOWLINE: The total income of the economic family or unattached individual was below the low income cut-off point for it. NOTAPPCBL: The low income concept does not apply to the economic family or unattached individual. (2) For the purposes of low income statistics, economic families and unattached individuals in the Yukon and Northwest Territories and on Indian reserves were excluded from the census database. The low income cut-offs were based on certain expenditure-income patterns which were not available from survey data for the entire population. In view of the persistent requests from users, consideration is being given to extend the application of the cut-offs to the previously excluded population. However, the results, if published, must be viewed in the light of the original constraint that the existing cut-offs are conceptually not applicable to the Yukon, Northwest Territories and the Indian Reserves. (3) Although this variable is derived for economic families and unattached individuals, it can be applied to census families, non-family persons and the population in private households. See Low Income Statistics for Census Families and Households, Staff Report No. 1991-1, Labour and Household Surveys Analysis Division, Statistics Canada. (4) See also Income: Incidence of Low Income and Income: Low Income Cut-offs (LICOs). 3018 INCOME: LOW INCOME CUT-OFFS (LICOs) Measures of low income known as low income cut-offs (LICOs) were first introduced in Canada in 1968 based on 1961 Census income data and 1959 family expenditure patterns. At that time, expenditure patterns indicated that Canadian families spent about 50% of their income on food, shelter and clothing. It was arbitrarily estimated that families spending 70% or more of their income on these basic necessities would be in "straitened" circumstances. With this assumption, low income cut-off points were set for five different sizes of families. Subsequent to these initial cut-offs, revised low income cut-offs were established based on national family expenditure data from 1969, 1978 and 1986. These data indicated that Canadian families spent, on average, 42% in 1969, 38.5% in 1978 and 36.2% in 1986 of their income on basic necessities. By adding the original difference of 20 percentage points to the basic level of expenditure on necessities, new low income cut-offs were set at income levels differentiated by family size and degree of urbanization. Since then, these cut-offs have been updated yearly by changes in the consumer price index. The following is the 1990 matrix of low income cut-offs: Low Income Cut-offs for Economic Families and Unattached Individuals, 1990 Size of area of residence 100,000 30,000 small Rural 500,000 to to urban (farm and Family size or more 499,999 99,999 regions non-farm) 1 14,155 12,433 12,146 11,072 9,637 2 19,187 16,854 16,464 15,008 13,064 3 24,389 21,421 20,926 19,076 16,605 4 28,081 24,662 24,094 21,964 19,117 5 30,680 26,946 26,324 23,997 20,887 6 33,303 29,248 28,573 26,047 22,672 7 or more 35,818 31,460 30,734 28,017 24,385 For further details on conceptual and coverage aspects, see the relevant 1991 Census publications. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample) Reported for: Economic families and unattached individuals 15 years of age and over in private households Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: See also Income: Income Status and Income: Incidence of Low Income. At the time of this writing, Statistics Canada was in the process of conducting a review of the low income cut-offs and the methodology underlying them. This review will lead to changes in the method of calculation of the cut-offs. For details, see Income Distributions by Size in Canada, 1990, Catalogue No. 13-207 (annual). 3019 INCOME: MEDIAN INCOME OF CENSUS FAMILIES AND NON-FAMILY PERSONS 15 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER The median income of a specified group of census families or non-family persons 15 years of age and over is that amount which divides their income size distribution into two halves, i.e. the incomes of the first half of the families or non-family persons are below the median, while those of the second half are above the median. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Census families and non-family persons 15 years of age and over Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value (1) This statistic is not resident on the database. For an income size distribution, the median is usually estimated as follows: M = Lm + cm (d/fm) , where M = Median value, Lm = Lower boundary of the income group in which one half of the total weighted count of census families/non-family persons falls, cm = Size (range) of the median income group, d = Number of census families/non-family persons necessary from the median income group to reach the middle, i.e. one half of all census families/non-family persons less the cumulative number of census families/non-family persons up to the median income group, fm = Number of census families/non-family persons in the median income group. (2) The procedure to calculate medians from census data is under review and the final method may vary from that used in the previous censuses. (3) Average and median incomes of census families and non-family persons and the corresponding standard errors for average income are normally calculated for all units in the specified group, whether or not they reported income. 3020 INCOME: MEDIAN INCOME OF ECONOMIC FAMILIES AND UNATTACHED INDIVIDUALS 15 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER The median income of a specified group of economic families or unattached individuals 15 years of age and over is that amount which divides their income size distribution into two halves, i.e. the incomes of the first half of the families or unattached individuals are below the median, while those of the second half are above the median. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Economic families and unattached individuals 15 years of age and over Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: See "Remarks" under Income: Median Income of Census Families and Non-family Persons 15 Years of Age and Over for the method of calculation employed to derive this statistic. 4000 HOUSEHOLD UNIVERSE The Household Universe is composed of subuniverses and variables which pertain to a person or a group of persons (other than temporary or foreign residents) who occupy a dwelling. Household variables are distinct from dwelling variables, in that the latter ones pertain to dwelling characteristics, not persons occupying dwellings. (See the figures below for further information. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figures 18 and 19 on pages 135 and 136 for their original format.) ___________________________________________________________ Figure 18. Household Universe Total households Private households Farm Non-farm Collective households Households outside Canada ____________________ Refer to Figure 19 for a graphic representation of the household subuniverses for which variables are available. ___________________________________________________________ Figure 19. Household Universe and Subuniverses Households Private households Household maintainer(s) Household size Household total income Household type Number of household maintainers Number of persons per room Primary household maintainer Tenure Private households in owner-occupied non-farm dwellings Owner's major payments: Annual payment for electricity* Annual payment for oil, gas, coal, wood, etc.* Annual payment for water and other municipal services* Annual property taxes* Condominium fees* Monthly mortgage payment* Property taxes included in mortgage payments* Owner's major payments as a percentage of household income Tenure - Condominium Private households in tenant-occupied non-farm dwellings Gross rent: Annual payment for electricity* Annual payment for oil, gas, coal, wood, etc.* Annual payment for water and other municipal services* Monthly cash rent Gross rent as a percentage of household income Private households in farm dwellings ____________________ * These shelter cost components are aggregated to form owner's major payments and gross rent. Individually, they are not published but may be obtained through special request. 4001 ANNUAL PAYMENT FOR ELECTRICITY Refers to yearly payments (last 12 months) for electricity. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample),* 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Private households in non-farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H6(a) Responses: None; Included in rent or other payments; dollar value Remarks: See "Remarks" under Owner's Major Payments and Rent, Gross. Before the 1991 Census, the response categories "None" and "Included in rent or other payments" were grouped into a single category. * In 1961 and 1971, data were collected for the variable "Average Monthly Payment for Electricity" for tenant households only. 4002 ANNUAL PAYMENT FOR OIL, GAS, COAL, WOOD OR OTHER FUELS Refers to yearly payments (last 12 months) for oil, gas, coal, wood or other fuels. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample),* 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Private households in non-farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H6(b) Responses: None; Included in rent or other payments; dollar value Remarks: See "Remarks" under Owner's Major Payments and Rent, Gross. Before the 1991 Census, the response categories "None" and "Included in rent or other payments" were grouped into a single category. * In 1961 and 1971, data were collected for the variables "Average Monthly Payment for Gas" and "Average Yearly Payment for Oil, Coal, Wood or Kerosene" for tenant households only. 4003 ANNUAL PAYMENT FOR WATER AND OTHER MUNICIPAL SERVICES Refers to yearly payments (last 12 months) for water and other municipal services. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample),* 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Private households in non-farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H6(c) Responses: None; Included in rent or other payments; dollar value Remarks: See "Remarks" under Owner's Major Payments and Rent, Gross. Before the 1991 Census, the response categories "None" and "Included in rent or other payments" were grouped into a single category. * In 1961 and 1971, data were collected for the variable "Average Monthly Payment for Water" for tenant households only. 4004 ANNUAL PROPERTY TAXES Refers to yearly property taxes (municipal and school) for an owner-occupied dwelling. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households in owner-occupied non-farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H8(c) Responses: None or dollar value Remarks: Includes local improvement taxes as well, even if billed separately. See "Remarks" under Owner's Major Payments. 4005 CONDOMINIUM FEES Refers to monthly payments for maintenance and various condominium services. Census: 1991 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households in owner-occupied non-farm dwellings and forming part of a registered condominium Question No.: Direct variable: Question H8(f) Responses: None or dollar value Remarks: See "Remarks" under Tenure - Condominium. 4006 HOUSEHOLD Refers to a person or group of persons (other than foreign residents), who occupy the same dwelling and do not have a usual place of residence elsewhere in Canada. It may consist of a family group (census family) with or without other non-family persons, of two or more families sharing a dwelling, of a group of unrelated persons, or of one person living alone. Household members who are temporarily absent on Census Day (e.g., temporary residents elsewhere) are considered as part of their usual household. For census purposes, every person is a member of one and only one household. Unless otherwise specified, all data in household reports are for private households only. Households are classified into three groups: private households, collective households and households outside Canada. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: Not applicable Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: See Household Outside Canada. 4007 HOUSEHOLD, COLLECTIVE Refers to a person or group of persons who occupy a collective dwelling and do not have a usual place of residence elsewhere in Canada. Data for collective households with foreign and/or temporary residents only are not shown. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Reported for: Collective households Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: See Dwelling, Collective. 4008 HOUSEHOLD MAINTAINER(S) Refers to the person or persons in the household who pay the rent, or the mortgage, or the taxes, or the electricity, etc., for the dwelling. If no person in the household is responsible for such payments, Person 1 is considered to be the only household maintainer. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981 Reported for: Private households Question No.: Derived variable: Question H1 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: A major conceptual modification was introduced in this variable for the 1991 Census: for the first time, respondents in private households will be able to identify more than one person as responsible for the shelter expenses. The maximum allowable number is six. In the 1981 and 1986 Censuses, only one person could be counted as the household maintainer. Comparisons with the 1991 Census can be made using the Primary Household Maintainer variable. In order for a person identified as being responsible for the household payments to be considered as the household maintainer, that person must be 15 years of age or older and be related to Person 1 in terms other than as a lodger or an employee (or as a member of a lodger's or an employee's census family). 4009 HOUSEHOLD OUTSIDE CANADA Refers to a person or group of persons residing together outside Canada on government, military or diplomatic postings. Only limited data are available for these households. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: Households outside Canada Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: In 1971, the term households abroad was used. Prior to the 1971 Census, these households were included in the count of private households, and housing data were imputed to them. In 1971, they were included in the count of private households to which housing data were not imputed. Since 1976, both households outside Canada and their dwellings have been excluded from the counts of private households and occupied private dwellings. 4010 HOUSEHOLD, PRIVATE Refers to a person or group of persons (other than foreign residents) who occupy a private dwelling and do not have a usual place of residence elsewhere in Canada. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: Private households Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: See Household Outside Canada. The number of private households is equal to the number of occupied private dwellings in the 1991, 1986, 1981 and 1976 Censuses (see Dwellings, Occupied Private). 4011 HOUSEHOLD SIZE Refers to the number of persons in a private household. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: Private households Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Collective households and households outside Canada were not taken into account in the calculations used to establish household size. 4012 HOUSEHOLD TYPE Refers to the basic division of private households into family and non-family households. Family household refers to a household that contains at least one census family, that is a married couple with or without never-married sons or daughters, or a couple living common-law with or without never-married sons or daughters, or a lone parent living with one or more never-married sons or daughters (single-parent family). One-family household refers to a single census family (with or without other non-family persons) that occupies a private dwelling. Multiple-family household refers to one in which two or more census families (with or without additional non-family persons) occupy the same private dwelling. Non-family household refers to either one person living alone in a private dwelling or to a group of two or more people who share a private dwelling, but who do not constitute a census family. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: Private households Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: In the 1991 Census publications, the most detailed legend of the variable is as follows: All households Family households One-family households All couples Now-married couples Without never-married sons or daughters Without additional persons With never-married sons or daughters Without additional persons Common-law couples Without never-married sons or daughters Without additional persons With never-married sons or daughters Without additional persons Lone-parent families Without additional persons Multiple-family households Non-family households One person only Two or more persons Contrary to previous censuses, the legend is not apportioned in accordance with the type of family; however, historical comparisons are still possible (see "Remarks" under Census Family Type). On the other hand, we are, for the first time, making a distinction between couples who are now married and couples who are living common-law. 4013 INCOME: AVERAGE INCOME OF HOUSEHOLDS Average household income refers to the weighted mean total income of households in 1990. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Households Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: Average income is calculated from unrounded data by dividing the aggregate income of a specified group of households (e.g., family households) by the number of households in that group, whether or not they reported income. This statistic is not resident on the database. It is calculated for any group as follows: _ the sum of (Yi times Wi) Y = ------------------------- , where the sum of Wi _ Y = Average income of the group Yi = Actual income of each household in the group Wi = Weight of each household in the group Average and median incomes of households and the corresponding standard error for average income are normally calculated for all units in the specified group, whether or not they reported income. 4014 INCOME: HOUSEHOLD TOTAL INCOME The total income of a household is the sum of the total incomes of all members of that household. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households Question No.: Derived variable Responses: Positive or negative dollar value or nil Remarks: For details on the components of total income and on the intercensal comparability of the concept, coverage, methodology and reference period for income data, see "Remarks" under Income: Total Income, Population Universe. 4015 INCOME: MEDIAN INCOME OF HOUSEHOLDS The median income of a specified group of households is that amount which divides their income size distribution into two halves, i.e. the incomes of the first half of households are below the median, while those of the second half are above the median. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Households Question No.: Derived statistic Responses: Dollar value Remarks: (1) This statistic is not resident on the database. For an income size distribution, the median is usually estimated as follows: M = Lm + cm (d/fm) , where M = Median value, Lm = Lower boundary of the income group in which one half of the total weighted count of households falls, cm = Size (range) of the median income group, d = Number of households necessary from the median income group to reach the middle, i.e. one half of all households less the cumulative number of households up to the median income group, fm = Number of households in the median income group. (2) The procedure to calculate medians from census data is presently under review and the final method may vary from that used in the previous censuses. (3) Average and median incomes of households and the corresponding standard error for average income are normally calculated for all units in the specified group, whether or not they reported income. 4016 MONTHLY MORTGAGE PAYMENT Refers to regular monthly mortgage or debt payments for the dwelling. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households in owner-occupied non-farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H8(a) Responses: None or dollar value Remarks: In cases where mortgage payments are made in other than monthly instalments (e.g., once or twice a year or every three months), all payments made in that year are added and then divided by 12, to obtain the average monthly amount paid. "Remarks" under Owner's Major Payments. 4017 NUMBER OF HOUSEHOLD MAINTAINERS Refers to the number of persons of the same household who have been identified as household maintainers. Census: 1991 Reported for: Private households Question No.: Derived variable: Question H1 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: This variable may have the following values: One maintainer Two maintainers Three maintainers Four maintainers Five maintainers Six maintainers 4018 NUMBER OF PERSONS PER ROOM Refers to the number of persons per room in a dwelling. (See definition of Rooms) Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households Question No.: Derived variable: Question H3(a) Responses: 0.5 or less; 0.6-1.0; 1.1-1.5; 1.6-2.0; 2.1 or more Remarks: Not applicable 4019 OWNER'S MAJOR PAYMENTS Refers to the total average monthly payments made by owner households to secure shelter. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample),* 1981 (1/5 sample)** Reported for: Private households in owner-occupied non-farm dwellings Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions H6(a), (b), (c), H8(a), (c) and (f) Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Owner's major payments include payments for electricity, oil, gas, coal, wood or other fuels, water and other municipal services, monthly mortgage payments, property taxes (municipal and school) and, for 1991 only, condominium fees. No data are available on the individual components of this variable; only the total of the main expenses is published. These data are not available for band housing on Indian reserves, since this variable does not apply to this type of dwelling (see "Remarks" under Tenure). * In 1986, no distinction was made between band housing and other types of tenure on Indian reserves. For this reason, all reserve dwellings were grouped under the "on reserve" category, and no data were published for these areas. ** In 1981, reserve dwellings were included in the universe for this variable. 4020 OWNER'S MAJOR PAYMENTS OR GROSS RENT AS A PERCENTAGE OF HOUSEHOLD INCOME Refers to the proportion of average monthly 1990 total household income which is spent on owner's major payments (in the case of owner-occupied dwellings) or on gross rent (in the case of tenant- occupied dwellings). This concept is illustrated below: (a) Owner-occupied non-farm dwellings: Owner's major payments _________________________________________ times 100 = ___% (1990 total annual household income) /12 (b) Tenant-occupied non-farm dwellings: Gross rent _________________________________________ times 100 = ___% (1990 total annual household income) /12 Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households in owner-/tenant-occupied non- farm dwellings Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions 45, H6(a), (b), (c), H7, H8(a), (c) and (f) Responses: Not applicable Remarks: The response categories used in the census publications are as follows: less than 15%; 15- 19%; 20-24%; 25-29%; 30-34%; 35-39%; 40-49%; 50% and over. Excludes households who reported a loss in their total household income, or had no income in 1990. The category "less than 15%" includes households with income who incurred no owner's major payments / gross rent. See "Remarks" under Owner's Major Payments and Rent, Gross. 4021 PRIMARY HOUSEHOLD MAINTAINER The first person in the household identified as being the household maintainer. Census: 1991 Reported for: Private households Question No.: Derived variable: Question H1 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: This variable identifies the first household maintainer entered in Question H1. This will normally be the person who contributes the greatest amount toward the payments for shelter expenses; in the case of a household where two people share these expenses equally, the first person listed in Question H1 is chosen as the main household maintainer. In the 1981 and 1986 Censuses, only one person could be counted as being the household maintainer. Comparisons with the 1991 Census can be carried out using the Primary Household Maintainer variable. 4022 PROPERTY TAXES INCLUDED IN MORTGAGE PAYMENTS Refers to whether property taxes (municipal and school) are included in the total regular monthly mortgage or debt payments for a dwelling. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households in owner-occupied non-farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H8(b) Responses: Yes; No Remarks: See "Remarks" under Owner's Major Payments. 4023 RENT, GROSS Refers to the total average monthly payments paid by tenant households to secure shelter. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample),* 1981 (1/5 sample),** 1971 (1/3 sample),** 1961 (1/5 sample)** Reported for: Private households in tenant-occupied non-farm dwellings Question Nos.: Derived variable: Questions H6(a), (b), (c) and H7 Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Gross rent includes payments for electricity, oil, gas, coal, wood or other fuels, water and other municipal services and monthly cash rent. No data are available on the individual components of this variable (except for the monthly cash rent). Only data on the total of the main rental expenses (gross rent) are published. These data are not available for band housing on Indian reserves, since this variable does not apply to this type of dwelling (see "Remarks" under Tenure). * In 1986, no distinction was made between band housing and other types of tenure on Indian reserves. For this reason, all reserve dwellings were grouped under the "on reserve" category, and no data were published for these areas. ** In 1961, 1971 and 1981, reserve dwellings were included in the universe for this variable. 4024 RENT, MONTHLY CASH Refers to the regular monthly cash rent paid by tenant households. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households in tenant-occupied non-farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H7 Responses: None or dollar value Remarks: Also included are parking fees paid with the rent, if any. See "Remarks" under Rent, Gross. 4025 TENURE Refers to whether some member of the household owns or rents the dwelling, or whether the dwelling is bandhousing (on an Indian reserve or settlement). Censuses: 1991, 1986,* 1981,** 1976,** 1971,** 1966,** 1961 (1/5 sample)** Reported for: Private households Question No.: Direct variable: Question H2 Responses: Owned; Rented; Band housing Remarks: A dwelling is classified as "owned" even if it is not fully paid for, such as one which has a mortgage or some other claim on it. The dwelling may be situated on rented or leased land or be part of a condominium (whether registered or unregistered). A dwelling is classified as "rented" even if it is provided without cash rent or at a reduced rent or if the dwelling is part of a co-operative. For census purposes, in a co-operative all members jointly own the co-operative and occupy their dwelling units under a lease agreement. For historical and statutory reasons, shelter occupancy on reserves does not lend itself to the usual classification by standard tenure categories. Therefore, a special category, band housing, has been created for 1991 Census products. * In 1986, dwellings on Indian reserves were all classified in the "on reserve" category. In some publications or through special tabulations, it is possible to obtain comparable data for 1986 and 1991, by grouping together the data referring to Indian reserves or settlements. ** In 1961, 1966, 1971, 1976 and 1981, dwellings on Indian reserves were classified as being "owned" or "rented". 4026 TENURE - CONDOMINIUM Refers to whether or not the dwelling is part of a registered condominium. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample),* 1981 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Private households in owner-occupied private non- farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H8(e) Responses: Yes; No Remarks: A condominium is a residential complex in which dwellings are owned individually while land is held in joint ownership with others. * In 1986, the variable "Tenure - Condominium" did not include dwellings on reserves. 5000 DWELLING UNIVERSE The Dwelling Universe is composed of subuniverses and variables pertaining to characteristics of dwellings in Canada. Dwellings are distinct from households. Dwelling characteristics refer to the physical attributes of a set of living quarters, whereas household characteristics pertain to the person or group of persons (other than foreign and/or temporary residents) who occupy a dwelling. (View Figure 20 below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format.) _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5001 BEDROOMS Refers to all rooms designed and furnished as bedrooms and used mainly for sleeping purposes, even though the use may be occasional (i.e. spare bedroom). Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Occupied private dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H3(b) Responses: 0; 1; 2; 3; 4; 5 or more Remarks: Rooms used for one purpose during the day and for bedrooms at night (for example, a living-room used as a bedroom during the night) are not included. By definition, one-room dwellings or bachelor apartments have zero bedrooms. 5002 CONDITION OF DWELLING Refers to whether, in the judgement of the respondent, the dwelling requires any repairs (excluding desirable remodelling or additions). Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample)* Reported for: Occupied private dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H5 Responses: No, only regular maintenance is needed; Yes, minor repairs are needed; Yes, major repairs are needed Remarks: Regular maintenance refers to painting, furnace cleaning, etc. Minor repairs refers to missing or loose floor tiles, bricks or shingles, defective steps, railing or siding, etc. Major repairs refers to defective plumbing or electrical wiring, structural repairs to walls, floors or ceilings, etc. * In 1961, the responses for the condition of dwelling were that the dwelling was in good condition, in need of minor repairs or in need of major repairs. The condition of dwelling was determined by the census enumerator. 5003 DWELLING Refers to a set of living quarters in which a person or group of persons resides or could reside. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see figure below. See User Documentation or catalogue 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Not applicable _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5004 DWELLING, COLLECTIVE Refers to a dwelling of a commercial, institutional or communal nature. It may be identified by a sign on the premises or by a census representative speaking with the person in charge or with a resident or a neighbour, etc. Included are rooming- or lodging-houses, hotels, motels, tourist homes, nursing homes, hospitals, staff residences, communal quarters of military camps, work camps, jails, missions, group homes, and so on. Collective dwellings may be occupied by usual residents or solely by foreign and/or temporary residents. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Collective Dwelling Types Hotels, Motels and Tourist Homes A commercial establishment generally purpose-built to provide temporary accommodation for persons on business or pleasure trips. Lodging- and Rooming-houses A commercial establishment which may originally have been a private dwelling, having furnished rooms for rent, and identified by a sign or by a census representative speaking with a person in charge, a resident, a neighbour, etc., or which is occupied on Census Day by at least 10 persons unrelated to the person designated as Person 1. School Residences and Residences for Training Centres One or more buildings which usually accommodate students attending an educational institution or training centre, such as boarding schools, colleges and universities. These buildings may be located on or off the grounds of the institution and at the time of the census may accommodate non-students. YM/YWCAs, Missions and Hostels A building or other facility providing accommodation to transient persons or to persons with no fixed address. (It may also contain usual residents, if such individuals consider themselves as not having any usual place of residence.) Campgrounds and Parks A facility usually providing temporary accommodation for persons on pleasure trips. Soup Kitchens Soup kitchens are facilities providing meals at little or no cost for persons in need. They are usually operated by a church or social service agency and do not normally provide sleeping quarters. Work Camps Accommodation provided to employees of an industry such as mining, logging or hydro construction, and generally located in a remote area. A work camp usually consists of bunk-houses, tents, trailers, etc. Religious Institutions An institution such as a convent or a seminary which provides accommodation to members of a religious group. Children's Group Homes (Orphanages) An institution providing accommodation to orphans or children who are wards of the court. Chronic Care Hospitals Chronic care hospitals provide continuous medical, nursing and professional health care supervision for long-term patients who are dependent in all activities of daily living and are unable to perform most or all personal care tasks. Nursing Homes Nursing homes are long-term care facilities which provide moderate assistance and periodic to regular nursing supervision for elderly residents. Residences for Senior Citizens Residences for senior citizens provide minimal assistance and supervision for elderly residents who are independent in most activities of daily living. Hospitals An institution providing medical or surgical diagnosis and treatment to the ill or injured. Included are general hospitals, hospitals for children, maternity hospitals, etc. Psychiatric Institutions An institution providing psychiatric diagnosis or treatment. Treatment Centres and Institutions for the Physically Handicapped An institution providing care and treatment to the physically handicapped. Hutterite Colonies A group of people of the Hutterite religion who live in communal dwellings and use their land for agricultural purposes. Correctional and Penal Institutions Any federal or provincial penal institution where institutional residents (mostly adults) are confined for an extended period of time and where some form of rehabilitation program exists. Young Offenders Facilities An institution or home for the secure or open custody of minors, who are awaiting trial, are under court order or who have been convicted of an offence. Jails Any municipal or county institution where institutional residents (mostly adults) are detained for a short period of time. Jails may be operated by a police force or by a municipality. Military Camps Any communal building on a military base in Canada belonging to the Canadian Armed Forces. Other A dwelling that meets the criteria of the collective dwelling definition but does not fall into any specified type. Included are race-tracks, outfitter lodges, carnival/circus camps, non- religious communes, etc. Merchant and Coast Guard Vessels* Merchant vessels over 1,000 tons, coast guard vessels, and oil rigs at sea whose occupants, on Census Day, reported no place of residence other than the ship on which they served. Naval Vessels* Canadian Armed Forces vessels whose occupants, on Census Day, are enumerated at sea or in port. Remarks: Only data for occupied collective dwellings are published and limited information is available. * The population of Canadian merchant, naval and coast guard vessels is assigned to special collective enumeration areas in port areas. The overall number of such enumeration areas is one per port. _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5005 DWELLING, MARGINAL An occupied private dwelling which, because it was not built, maintained or converted for year-round use, does not meet all three conditions for year-round occupancy (a source of heat or power, year-round access to drinking water and shelter from the elements). To be included in the census, the marginal dwelling must be permanently occupied by a person or a group of persons who have no other usual place of residence. Examples of marginal dwellings are non-winterized cottages or cabins, and unconverted barns or garages. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981* Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: * The 1991 and 1986 marginal dwellings and dwellings under construction correspond to the 1981 variable "Dwelling, seasonal/marginal". _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5006 DWELLING, OCCUPIED PRIVATE Refers to a private dwelling in which a person or group of persons are permanently residing. Also included are private dwellings whose usual residents are temporarily absent on Census Day. Unless otherwise specified, all data in housing reports are for occupied private dwellings rather than unoccupied private dwellings or dwellings occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.:Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: The number of occupied private dwellings is equal to the number of private households in the 1991, 1986, 1981 and 1976 Censuses (see Household, Private). _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5007 DWELLING, OWNER-OCCUPIED PRIVATE, NON-FARM Refers to a private dwelling, other than one situated on a farm and occupied by a farm operator, which is owned or being bought by some member of the household. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.:Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: A dwelling is classified as "owned" even if it is not fully paid for, such as one which has a mortgage or some other claim on it. The dwelling may be situated on rented or leased land or be part of a condominium (whether registered or unregistered). For the definition of condominium, see Tenure - Condominium. _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5008 DWELLING, PRIVATE Refers to a separate set of living quarters with a private entrance either from outside or from a common hall, lobby, vestibule or stairway inside the building. The entrance to the dwelling must be one which can be used without passing through the living quarters of someone else. The dwelling must meet the three conditions necessary for year-round use: (1) a source of heat or power (as evidenced by chimneys, power lines, oil or gas pipes or meters, generators, woodpiles, electric lights, solar heating panels, etc.); (2) access to a source of drinking water throughout the year (as evidenced by faucets, drain pipes, wells, water pumps, etc.); (3) an enclosed space that provides shelter from the elements (as evidenced by complete and enclosed walls, by a roof, and by doors and windows that provide protection from wind, rain and snow). The census classifies private dwellings into regular private dwellings, marginal dwellings and dwellings under construction. Regular private dwellings are further classified into three major groups: occupied dwellings (occupied by usual residents), unoccupied dwellings and dwellings occupied by foreign and/or temporary residents. Marginal dwellings and dwellings under construction are classified as occupied by usual residents or by foreign and/or temporary residents. Marginal dwellings and dwellings under construction that were unoccupied on Census Day are not counted in the housing stock. Censuses: 1991,* 1986,* 1981,* 1976, 1971,** 1966,** 1961** Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: In certain instances, there may be private households occupying structurally separate dwellings in a collective dwelling or on its premises (e.g., separate dwelling quarters for staff or employees living with their families). In these cases, the living quarters are enumerated as private dwellings inhabited by private households. * The classification of private dwellings into regular private dwellings and seasonal/marginal dwellings appears in the 1981 Census only. For the 1991 and 1986 Censuses, the "seasonal/marginal" variable was replaced by the variables Dwelling, Marginal and Dwelling, Under Construction (including conversion and extensive renovation). ** The counts of dwellings occupied by foreign and/or temporary residents do not appear in the 1971, 1966 and 1961 Censuses. _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5009 DWELLING, PRIVATE, OCCUPIED BY FOREIGN AND/OR TEMPORARY RESIDENTS Refers to a private dwelling occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents on Census Day. A temporary resident of a dwelling is a person who resides there on Census Day, but has a usual place of residence elsewhere in Canada. A foreign resident is a person whose usual place of residence is outside Canada. These dwellings are classified into regular dwellings, marginal dwellings and dwellings under construction. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976* Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: * In 1976, private dwellings occupied by foreign and/or temporary residents were not classified into regular dwellings and seasonal/marginal dwellings. _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5010 DWELLING, REGULAR Refers to a private dwelling which was built or converted and meets all three conditions for year-round occupancy: a source of heat or power, year-round access to drinking water and shelter from the elements. These dwellings are classified into occupied dwellings, unoccupied dwellings and dwellings occupied by foreign and/or temporary residents. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981 Reported for: For illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see list at end of this definition. A graphic depiction of this list exists in the printed version of the dictionary publication 92-301E and can be found as Figure 20 on page 153. A copy of this graphic is included in your documentation package for the Electronic Dictionary. Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Not applicable _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5011 DWELLING, TENANT-OCCUPIED PRIVATE, NON-FARM Refers to a private dwelling, other than one situated on a farm and occupied by a farm operator, which is not owned by some member of the household. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.:Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Included are dwellings provided without cash rent or at a reduced rent and dwellings that are part of a co-operative. For census purposes, in a co- operative all members jointly own the co-operative and occupy their dwelling units under a lease agreement. _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5012 DWELLING UNDER CONSTRUCTION, RENOVATION OR CONVERSION* A dwelling under construction is a new dwelling which, because it is not yet complete, does not meet all three of the conditions necessary for year-round occupancy: a source of heat or power, year-round access to drinking water and shelter from the elements. The dwelling is considered complete when services such as electricity, plumbing and water have been connected and the dwelling's structural parts, such as doors, windows, roof and walls, and in the case of high-rise apartments, passenger elevators, are installed. Painting, driveway paving, trim and landscaping need not be finished for the dwelling to be considered complete. A dwelling under renovation or conversion is one which, because it is undergoing extensive renovation or conversion (e.g., from a single to a multiple dwelling or vice versa), does not meet all three of the conditions necessary for year-round occupancy: a source of heat or power, year-round access to drinking water and shelter from the elements. Censuses: 1991, 1986,1981 Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.:Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: The 1991 and 1986 marginal dwellings and dwellings under construction correspond to the 1981 variable "Dwelling, seasonal/marginal". * Enumerated only when occupied on Census Day. _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5013 DWELLING, UNOCCUPIED PRIVATE Refers to a private dwelling which meets all three conditions necessary for year-round occupancy (a source of heat or power, year-round access to drinking water and shelter from the elements), but in which no usual, temporary or foreign resident is living on Census Day. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971,* 1966, 1961 Reported for: For an illustration of the 1991 Dwelling Universe, see the figure below. See User Documentation or publication 92-301E, Figure 20 on page 153 for its original format. Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Not applicable Remarks: Marginal dwellings and dwellings under construction that were unoccupied on Census Day are not included in the housing stock. * In 1971, the term vacant dwelling was used. This referred to a dwelling, not a seasonal or vacation home, which was suitable and available for immediate occupancy, but which was not inhabited on Census Day. Newly constructed dwellings, completed and ready for occupancy, but as yet unoccupied at the census date were counted as vacant. This did not refer, however, to dwellings whose occupants were temporarily away. _____________________________________________________________ Figure 20. Dwelling Universe Dwellings Collective Occupied Occupied by usual residents Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied (not published) Private Regular Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents Unoccupied Occupied marginal and under construction Occupied by usual resident Occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents 5014 PERIOD OF CONSTRUCTION Refers to the period in time during which the building or dwelling was originally constructed. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Occupied private dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H4 Responses: 1920 or before; 1921-1945; 1946-1960; 1961-1970; 1971-1980; 1981-1985; 1986-1990; 1991* Remarks: This refers to the period in which the building was originally built, not the time of any later remodelling, additions or conversions. Respondents were asked to indicate the period of construction, to the best of their knowledge. * Refers to the first 5 months. 5015 ROOMS Refers to the number of rooms in a dwelling. A room is an enclosed area within a dwelling which is finished and suitable for year-round living. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971, 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Occupied private dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H3(a) Responses: 1; 2; 3; ... 10 or more Remarks: Partially divided L-shaped rooms are considered to be separate rooms if they are considered as such by the respondent (e.g., L-shaped dining-room living-room arrangements). Not counted as rooms are bathrooms, halls, vestibules and rooms used solely for business purposes. 5016 STRUCTURAL TYPE OF DWELLING Refers to the structural characteristics and/or dwelling configuration, that is, whether the dwelling is a detached single house, apartment in a high-rise building, a row house, a mobile home, etc. Censuses: 1991,* 1986,* 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Occupied private dwellings Question Nos.: Not applicable Responses: Single-detached house - A single dwelling not attached to any other dwelling or structure (except its own garage or shed). A single-detached house has open space on all sides, and has no dwellings either above or below it. Semi-detached house - One of two dwellings attached side by side (or back to front) to each other, but not to any other dwelling or structure (except its own garage or shed). A semi-detached dwelling has no dwellings either above it or below it and the two units together have open space on all sides. Row house - One of three or more dwellings joined side by side (or occasionally side to back), such as a town house or garden home, but not having any other dwellings either above or below. Apartment or flat in a detached duplex - One of two dwellings, located one above the other, but not attached to any other dwelling or structure (except its own garage or shed). The two units together have no other dwellings attached to the back, front, or sides, and have open space on all sides. Apartment in a building that has five or more storeys - A dwelling unit in a high-rise building which has five or more storeys. Apartment in a building that has fewer than five storeys - A dwelling unit attached to other dwelling units, commercial units, or other non- residential space in a building that has less than five storeys. Other single-attached house - A single dwelling that is attached to another building and that does not fall into any of the other categories. Examples are a single dwelling attached to a non- residential structure (e.g., store or church) or occasionally to another residential structure (e.g., apartment building). Mobile home - A single dwelling, designed and constructed to be transported on its own chassis, and capable of being moved on short notice. It may be placed on a temporary foundation such as blocks, posts or a prepared pad. Other movable dwelling - A single dwelling, other than a mobile home, used as a place of residence, but capable of being moved on short notice, such as a tent, recreational vehicle, travel trailer, or houseboat. Structural Type of Dwelling: 1991 Census Publication Categories The categories published from the 1991 Census for structural type will be dependent on data quality. In 1986, four categories were published (single- detached house, apartment in a building that has five or more storeys, movable dwelling and other dwelling). The detailed data were collected on a cost-recovery basis and tabulations showing the nine-category breakdowns were available on a special request basis. Remarks: A linked home (a single house which is not attached to any other dwelling above ground) is classified as a "single-detached house". Two dwellings, one above the other, attached to other dwellings or buildings are classified as "apartment in a building that has fewer than five storeys" and not as "apartment or flat in a detached duplex". Floors in apartment buildings that are used solely for parking, storage or laundry and recreational facilities are not counted as storeys. * In 1991 and 1986, type of dwelling was coded by census representatives in the field. The coverage was: occupied private dwellings, unoccupied private dwellings and dwellings occupied solely by foreign and/or temporary residents. In 1971 and 1976, type of dwelling was reported for occupied private dwellings and vacant (unoccupied) dwellings. In 1991 and 1986, the term single-detached house replaced "single-detached" and "single house", as used in previous censuses. In 1991 and 1986, the term semi-detached house replaced "semi-detached or double house". In 1991 and 1986, the category other single- attached house was introduced to cover types similar to the previous category, "house attached to a non-residential building", and to account as well for single houses attached to multi-unit or multi-purpose buildings. In 1991 and 1986, the type earlier known as "duplex" was renamed "apartment or flat in a detached duplex" in order to be consistent with the definition. In 1981, the category apartment or multiple dwelling was expanded to two categories, "apartment in a building that has five or more storeys" and "apartment in a building that has fewer than five storeys". In 1971, 1966 and 1961, the term apartment and flats was used with the subcategories "duplex" and "other". In 1991, 1986, 1981 and 1976, the term movable dwelling referred to mobile homes and other movable dwellings. 5017 VALUE OF DWELLING Refers to the dollar amount expected by the owner if the dwelling were to be sold. Censuses: 1991 (1/5 sample), 1986 (1/5 sample), 1981 (1/5 sample), 1971 (1/3 sample), 1961 (1/5 sample) Reported for: Owner-occupied non-farm dwellings Question No.: Direct variable: Question H8(d) Responses: Dollar value Remarks: "Value of dwelling" refers to the value of the entire dwelling, including the value of the land it is on and of any other structure such as a garage which is on the property. If the dwelling is located in a building which contains several dwellings, or a combination of residential and business premises, all of which the household owns, the value is estimated as a portion of the market value that applies only to the dwelling in which the household resides. Alternatively, the value of the dwelling is estimated by multiplying by 100 the amount of rent per month which could be obtained for that one dwelling. To be consistent with changes introduced in the 1986 Census to the "Tenure" classification of dwellings on reserves, for the 1991 Census and in all 1991 Census reports, the variable Value of Dwelling refers to non-reserve dwellings only. 6000 GEOGRAPHY UNIVERSE The terms related to the geography of the 1991 Census are defined in this section. They describe concepts related to geographic areas and census cartography. Geographic Areas Standard Areas Census data are disseminated for a number of standard geographic areas. These areas are of two types: legislative/administrative and statistical. Legislative/administrative areas are defined, with a few exceptions, by Canadian federal and provincial statutes. These include: Provinces and territories Federal electoral districts (FEDs) Census divisions (CDs) Census subdivisions (CSDs) Subprovincial regions (SPRs) Statistical areas are defined by Statistics Canada as part of the spatial frame used to collect and disseminate census data. These include: Agricultural regions Census consolidated subdivisions (CCSs) Census metropolitan areas (CMAs) Census agglomerations (CAs) Primary census metropolitan areas (PCMAs) Primary census agglomerations (PCAs) Census tracts (CTs) Provincial census tracts (PCTs) Urban areas (UAs) Rural areas CMA/CA parts CMA/CA components Enumeration areas (EAs) The hierarchy of standard geographic areas is presented as Figure 21 of the User Documentation and as Figure 21 on page 171 of publication 92-301E. Other geographic units of quasi-standard nature are also defined in this section. These include unincorporated place (UP), township, range and meridian and postal code. For more information, see Figure 22 in the User Documentation or in publication 92-301E on page 172. In addition to the standard and quasi-standard geographic areas, other related terms defined in this section include: census farm, census subdivision type, geographic reference date, geographical names, place names, Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) and urban population size group. User-defined Areas Census data can also be produced for areas other than the standard geographic areas, that is, for user-defined areas. These are of two types: aggregation of standard geographic areas and custom query areas. The latter are created by aggregating small building-block geographical units: block-faces in large urban areas (generated from machine-readable street maps called Area Master Files) and enumeration areas elsewhere. A co-ordinate (centroid) is assigned to every enumeration area in Canada and to each block-face in most of the large urban areas (50,000 population and over). With the geocoding system, households and the associated data are geographically coded or "geocoded" to the corresponding centroid. Census data for user-defined areas are then retrieved by aggregating EA or block-face centroids within each area. The geographic infrastructure and hierarchies supporting data retrieval for user-defined geographic areas are shown as Figure 22 of the User Documentation and as Figure 22 in publication 92-301E, page 172. Census Cartography Maps are used extensively to portray the geographic concepts and census data, as well as to support geographic calculations (e.g., land area and population density). In order to describe these maps, certain basic terms such as map projection are defined. Two types of maps are provided in support of census data dissemination: reference maps and thematic maps. Reference maps show the boundaries and spatial relationships of the standard geographic areas. A number of thematic maps are produced as part of the census publication program, depicting census data for a number of the standard geographic areas. Ecumene is a concept used to improve the accuracy of portrayal of spatial data on thematic maps, by limiting the placement of symbolization (e.g. shading patterns) to inhabited areas. CARTLIB digital boundary files, available for most of the standard geographic areas, enable users to produce their own thematic maps. Geographic terms are defined in the Geography universe, these definitions are numbered 6000 to 6042. The number of geographic areas by province and territory is shown in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. To view Figure 23A in its original format, see the User Documentation or Figure 23A, page 173, publication 92-301E. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6001 AGRICULTURAL REGION An agricultural region is a subprovincial geographic area utilized by the census of agriculture for disseminating agricultural statistics. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981 Rules and Operational Procedures: In all provinces except Prince Edward Island and Saskatchewan, an agricultural region is a contiguous group of census divisions. In Saskatchewan, agricultural regions are groupings of census consolidated subdivisions, but these groupings do not necessarily respect census division boundaries. For Prince Edward Island, Yukon Territory and Northwest Territories, agricultural regions have not been defined. Remarks: In the Prairie provinces, agricultural regions are commonly referred to as crop districts. The number of agricultural regions by province and territory is shown in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. To view Figure 23A in its original format, see the User Documentation or Figure 23A, page 173, publication 92-301E. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6002 AREA MASTER FILE (AMF) The AMF is a computer-readable file that geographically references the street network and selected other non-street features (such as rivers, lakes, railways and municipal limits) within a geographic area, usually a census subdivision. The Universal Transverse Mercator projection system is used for co-ordinates (a system specifying point locations on the globe). Two other important components of the AMF are: (a) the names for all street and non-street features; (b) for addressable streets, the intersection (corner) civic address ranges, and block-face centroids which are computer- generated. AMFs are generally created for urban municipalities which had a population of 50,000 or more at the previous census and for which census tracts have been defined. AMFs generally correspond to one census subdivision (CSD). However, for operational efficiency, some AMFs cover more than one CSD. Censuses: 1991,* 1986,** 1981,*** 1976,*** 1971*** Rules and Operational Procedures: (1) Streets are represented by their approximate centre line. (2) Major buildings stored in the AMF are generally represented by a single point co-ordinate. (3) The representation of compound or curved features (such as highway ramps and railway yards) is generalized and standardized to deal with a variety of representations supplied by different source documents. (4) For further rules and operational procedures, refer to the AMF User Guide, 1988, Geography Division. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: (1) The positional accuracy of the AMF does not generally support applications such as engineering or surveying, which require a higher degree of accuracy in the co-ordinates. (2) Individual AMFs are normally updated every two to five years based on maps received from local government contacts. Therefore, at the time of the census, any given AMF may not be up to date. (3) AMFs support a range of census applications including: - geocoding, through assignment of households to AMF block- faces; - computer-assisted collection mapping - For the 1991 Census, 267 AMFs, corresponding to 342 census subdivisions, were used to produce approximately 23,500 enumeration area (EA) collection maps. (4) Many agencies have found the AMF useful for a variety of applications such as transportation planning, mapping, geo- referencing, computer-aided dispatching and routing. (5) See definitions of Block-face, Centroid, Query Area and Geocoding for other related terms. Remarks: * For the 1991 Census, non-street features referred to as "EA splits" were, in some cases, added to the AMF network where needed to accommodate the encoding of enumeration area boundaries; AMFs can be obtained with or without these EA splits. When the 1991 Census AMF is used to produce a census product or when it is used in conjunction with a census product, the AMF containing the EA splits should be used. Refer to Figure 23A at the end of this definition for the 1991 Census AMF coverage. To view Figure 23A in its original format, see the User Documentation or Figure 23A, page 173, publication 92-301E. ** Prior to the 1986 Census, the cartographic content was enhanced to better support the production of collection maps. As part of this enhancement, additional non-street features were defined and the overall shape of features including curves was improved. (Note: For the 1986 Census, 38 AMFs were used to produce 1,200 census tract area maps, corresponding to roughly 7,000 enumeration area collection maps.) *** AMFs were initially created for the 1971 Census, for the sole purpose of providing small units (block-faces), to which census households would be linked as the basis for user-defined area data retrievals. Since positional accuracy was not a priority, feature representation was highly generalized in some cases. The AMF files also contained a limited number of non-street features (such as creeks and railways). ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6003 BLOCK-FACE The general concept of a block-face is one of a small recognizable geographical unit to which census data can be associated. The goal is to approximate, through aggregation, user-defined query areas for census data extraction and tabulation. The block-face refers to one side of a city street, normally between consecutive intersections with streets or other physical features (such as creeks or railways). Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: (1) Census data other than household and population counts are not given out for individual block-faces due to confidentiality constraints. (2) For greater accuracy of retrieval, it is recommended that query areas conform to Area Master File (AMF) block-faces. For the 1991 Census, there were over 400,000 block-face centroids with associated population counts. The number of block-faces by province and territory is shown in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. To view Figure 23A in its original format, see the User Documentation or Figure 23A, page 173, publication 92-301E. (3) For further details, refer to Facts by Small Areas or the AMF User Guide; also refer to the Area Master File (AMF), Centroid, Query Area and Geocoding definitions. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6004 CARTLIB (CARTOGRAPHIC LIBRARY) CARTLIB is a digital file of census geographic area boundaries designed for computer-assisted thematic mapping. Each CARTLIB file includes the boundaries and major hydrographic features (rivers, lakes, etc.). Censuses: The following CARTLIB boundary files are available: Census geographic areas Year Enumeration areas (EAs) 1991 Census divisions (CDs) 1991, 1986, 1981 Census subdivisions (CSDs) 1991, 1986 Census consolidated subdivisions (CCSs) 1991, 1986 Federal electoral districts (FEDs) 1986, 1976 Census tracts (CTs) 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976 Ecumene (national) 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976 Ecumene (urban) 1991, 1986 Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: (1) CARTLIB files are intended for thematic mapping purposes only. Their positional accuracy may not support other uses, such as cadastral mapping or data retrieval. (2) CARTLIB files can be used with the census of population and housing, the census of agriculture or other data available from Statistics Canada. Data linkage to the correct geographic area is made possible through geographic codes. (3) CARTLIB files are available on magnetic tape or diskette. 6005 CENSUS AGGLOMERATION (CA) The general concept of a census agglomeration (CA) is one of a large urban area, together with adjacent urban and rural areas which have a high degree of economic and social integration with that urban area. A CA is delineated around an urban area (called the urbanized core and having a population of at least 10,000, based on the previous census). Once a CA attains an urbanized core population of at least 100,000, based on the previous census, it becomes a census metropolitan area (CMA). Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981,* 1976,** 1971,** 1966,*** 1961*** Rules and Operational Procedures: CAs are comprised of one or more census subdivisions (CSDs) which meet at least one of the following criteria: (1) The CSD falls completely or partly inside the urbanized core. (2) At least 50% of the employed labour force living in the CSD, as determined from the 1981 place of work commuting flow data, works in the urbanized core. (3) At least 25% of the employed labour force working in the CSD, as determined from the 1981 place of work commuting flow data, lives in the urbanized core. (4) If a CSD meets the criteria for inclusion, but is not contiguous to a CA, the place of work commuting flow data are aggregated for all CSDs within the census consolidated subdivision (CCS). Inclusion or exclusion of the entire CCS within a CA is then determined. (5) If the commuting flow is less than 100 persons, CSDs are excluded from the CA, even if criteria (2) or (3) apply. (6) Even if criteria (2), (3), (4) or (5) apply, CSDs may be included or excluded to maintain the contiguity of the CA. All of the above criteria have been ranked in order of priority. A CSD meeting the criteria for two or more CAs is included in the one for which it has the highest ranked criterion. If the CSD meets criteria that have the same rank, the decision is based on the actual population or on the number of commuters involved. Exceptions to the above delineation criteria may occasionally be made in certain special situations. For example, current data sources may be used to include a CSD within a CA if the 1981 place of work commuting flow percentages are close to the level of commuting flow required by the delineation criteria. CA names are usually based on the largest urban centre(s) within the CA. Regular and Consolidated CAs In some parts of the country, adjacent CAs are socially and economically interrelated. When this occurs, they are grouped into a single consolidated CA. A regular CA, on the other hand, is free-standing. It is either not adjacent to another CA or not sufficiently related to another CA to be consolidated. To be eligible for consolidation, the total commuting interchange between the adjacent CAs must be equal to at least 35% of the labour force living in the smaller CA. After consolidation, the original CAs become subregions (called primary CAs) within the consolidated CA. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Users should be aware that CA boundaries respect CSD limits. Furthermore, since CA boundaries for the 1991 Census are based on 1981 place of work commuting flow data, they may not reflect the current boundaries of economic and social integration with an urban area. CA boundaries may differ from other types of areas such as trading, marketing or regional planning areas designated by local authorities for planning or other purposes. Therefore, the CA definition should be used with caution for non-statistical activities. The delineation of CAs is designed to allow for the statistical comparison of all CAs across Canada. The number of CAs by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. To view Figure 23A in its original format, see the User Documentation or Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173. Seven CAs were created in 1991 as a result of population growth in their urbanized cores, as determined from the 1986 Census. They are: Kentville, N.S., Port Hope, Ont., Weyburn, Sask., Estevan, Sask., Grand Centre, Alta., Wetaskiwin, Alta., and Yellowknife, N.W.T. Six CAs were deleted from the program because their urbanized core populations dropped below the 10,000 minimum population requirement, as determined from the 1986 Census. They are: Carbonear, Nfld., Montmagny, Que., Chibougamau, Que., Kapuskasing, Ont., Flin Flon, Man./Sask., and Trail, B.C. Remarks: The CA concept did not change between 1986 and 1991. * Several modifications were made to the delineation criteria between 1981 and 1986. To be included in a CA, a CSD required a commuting flow of at least 50%, up from 40% in 1981. In addition, a commuting flow of at least 100 persons was required. The change to the commuting flow criterion between 1981 and 1986 was implemented in part in order to maintain historical comparability. It was also required to control differences in the processing of place of work data between the 1981 and the 1971 Censuses. Finally, adjacent CAs, which were closely interrelated, were consolidated and the subregions called PCAs. Refer to the text at the end of this definition for a complete list of CAs and their constituent PCAs. ** In 1976 and 1971, CAs were comprised of at least two adjacent municipal entities. These entities had to be at least partly urban and belong to an urbanized core having a population of 2,000 or more. The urbanized core included a largest city and the remainder of the urbanized core, each of which had a population of 1,000 or more, and a population density of at least 1,000 persons per square mile (386 per square kilometre). *** In 1966 and 1961, CAs were called major urban areas when larger than 25,000, and urbanized areas when smaller. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6006 CENSUS CONSOLIDATED SUBDIVISION (CCS) The concept of a census consolidated subdivision is a grouping of small census subdivisions within a containing census subdivision, created for the convenience and ease of geographic referencing. Census consolidated subdivisions are defined within census divisions according to the following criteria: (1) A census subdivision with a net land area greater than 25 square kilometres can form a CCS of its own. (2) A census subdivision with a net land area greater than 25 square kilometres and surrounded on more than half its perimeter by another census subdivision is usually included as part of the CCS formed by the surrounding census subdivision. (3) Census subdivisions having a net land area smaller than 25 square kilometres are usually grouped with a larger census subdivision. (4) A census subdivision with a population greater than 100,000 according to the last census usually forms a CCS on its own. (5) The census consolidated subdivision's name usually coincides with its largest census subdivision component in terms of land area. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971,* 1966* Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Census consolidated subdivisions are used primarily in the dissemination of the census of agriculture data. Census consolidated subdivisions may have changed since the last census if the component census subdivisions have changed. For 1991, several census consolidated subdivisions have been modified in the province of Quebec following the implementation of the new 1991 census division structure in that province. Remarks: The number of CCSs by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. To view Figure 23A in its original format, see the User Documentation or Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173. * In 1971 and 1966, the term "Reference Code" was used. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6007 CENSUS DIVISION (CD) Refers to the general term applying to geographic areas established by provincial law, which are intermediate geographic areas between the census subdivision and the province (e.g., divisions, counties, regional districts, regional municipalities and seven other types of geographic areas made up of groups of census subdivisions). In Newfoundland, Manitoba, Saskatchewan and Alberta, provincial law does not provide for these administrative geographic areas. Therefore, census divisions have been created by Statistics Canada in co-operation with these provinces. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: There has been an increase from 266 census divisions in 1986 to 290 for the 1991 Census. In Quebec, the number of census divisions has increased from 76 in 1986 to 99 in 1991 as a result of the implementation of the "municipalit‚s r‚gionales de comt‚ (MRC)" or their equivalent, e.g., "communaut‚s urbaines", "territoire conventionn‚". This represents a completely new census division structure within Quebec from the previous census. The following MRCs or their equivalents have been grouped to form one census division: - the "territoire conventionn‚ de la r‚gion de la Baie James" and "l'administration r‚gionale Kativik", forming the "Territoire nordique" census division; - the Minganie MRC and the "municipalit‚ de la C“te-Nord-du- Golfe Saint-Laurent", forming "Minganie - C“te-Nord-du-Golfe Saint-Laurent" census division; - the Sept-RiviŠres MRC and the Caniapiscau MRC, forming "Sept- RiviŠres - Caniapiscau" census division. In British Columbia, the Regional District of Peace River-Liard has been split into two distinct regional districts, Peace River and Fort Nelson-Liard, bringing the total number of census divisions to 30 in that province. The Regional District of Greater Vancouver has been extended to include adjacent census subdivisions. The occurrence of census division types by province/territory is as follows: Census division type Province/territory Division Newfoundland, Manitoba, Saskatchewan, Alberta and Quebec(1) County Prince Edward Island, Nova Scotia, New Brunswick(2) and Ontario District Ontario District municipality Ontario Metropolitan municipality Ontario Region British Columbia, Yukon and Northwest Territories Municipalit‚ r‚gionale Quebec de comt‚ Regional district British Columbia Regional municipality Ontario United counties Ontario Communaut‚s urbaines Quebec (1) The groupings of MRCs or their equivalent are called census divisions. (2) In order to maintain the integrity of component census subdivisions, census divisions do not respect the legal county limits in New Brunswick. Remarks: The number of CDs by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6008 CENSUS FARM Refers to a farm, ranch or other agricultural holding which produces at least one of the following products intended for sale: crops, livestock, poultry, animal products, greenhouse or nursery products, mushrooms, sod, honey and maple syrup products. Censuses: 1991, 1986,* 1981,* 1976,** 1971,*** 1966,*** 1961*** Remarks: * For the 1981 and 1986 Censuses, a census farm was defined as a farm, ranch or other agricultural holding with sales of agricultural products of $250 or more during the past 12 months. Agricultural holdings with anticipated sales of $250 or more were also included. ** For the 1976 Census, a census farm was defined as a farm, ranch or other agricultural holding of one acre or more with sales of agricultural products of $1,200 or more during the year 1975. The basic unit for which a questionnaire was collected was termed an agricultural holding. This term was defined as a farm, ranch or other agricultural holding of one acre or more with sales of agricultural products of $50 or more during the 12-month period prior to the census. *** Prior to the 1976 Census, a census farm was defined as a farm, ranch or other agricultural holding of one acre or more with sales of agricultural products of $50 or more during the 12-month period prior to the census. 6009 CENSUS METROPOLITAN AREA (CMA) The general concept of a census metropolitan area (CMA) is one of a very large urban area, together with adjacent urban and rural areas which have a high degree of economic and social integration with that urban area. A CMA is delineated around an urban area (called the urbanized core and having a population of at least 100,000, based on the previous census). Once an area becomes a CMA, it is retained in the program even if its population subsequently declines. Smaller urban areas, centred on urbanized cores of a population of at least 10,000, are included in the census agglomeration (CA) program. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981,* 1976, 1971,** 1966,*** 1961*** Rules and Operational Procedures: CMAs are comprised of one or more census subdivisions (CSDs) which meet at least one of the following criteria: (1) The CSD falls completely or partly inside the urbanized core. (2) At least 50% of the employed labour force living in the CSD, as determined from the 1981 place of work commuting flow data, works in the urbanized core. (3) At least 25% of the employed labour force working in the CSD, as determined from the 1981 place of work commuting flow data, lives in the urbanized core. (4) If a CSD meets the criteria for inclusion, but is not contiguous to a CMA, the place of work commuting flow data are aggregated for all CSDs within the census consolidated subdivision (CCS). Inclusion or exclusion of the entire CCS within a CMA is then determined. (5) If the commuting flow is less than 100 persons, CSDs are excluded from the CMA, even if criteria (2) or (3) apply. (6) Even if criteria (2), (3), (4) or (5) apply, CSDs may be included or excluded to maintain the contiguity of the CMA. All of the above criteria are ranked in order of priority. A CSD meeting the criteria for two or more CMAs is included in the one for which it has the highest ranked criterion. If the CSD meets criteria that have the same rank, the decision is based on the actual population or on the number of commuters involved. Exceptions to the above delineation criteria may occasionally be made in certain special situations. For example, current data sources may be used to include a CSD within a CMA if the 1981 place of work commuting flow percentages are close to the level of commuting flow required by the delineation criteria. CMA names are usually based on the largest urban centre(s) within the CMA. Regular and Consolidated CMAs In some parts of the country, adjacent CMAs and/or CAs are socially and economically interrelated. When this occurs, they are grouped into a single consolidated CMA. A regular CMA, on the other hand, is free-standing. It is either not adjacent to another CMA or CA or not sufficiently related to another CMA or CA to be consolidated. To be eligible for consolidation, the total commuting interchange between the adjacent CMAs and CAs must be equal to at least 35% of the labour force living in the smaller CMA or CA. After consolidation, the original CMAs and CAs become subregions (called primary CMAs and CAs) within the consolidated CMA. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Users should be aware that CMA boundaries respect CSD limits. Furthermore, since CMA boundaries for the 1991 Census are based on 1981 place of work commuting flow data, they may not reflect the current boundaries of economic and social integration with an urban area. CMA boundaries may differ from other types of areas such as trading, marketing or regional planning areas designated by local authorities for planning or other purposes. Therefore, the CMA definition should be used with caution for non-statistical activities. The delineation of CMAs is designed to allow for the statistical comparison of all CMAs across Canada. In 1989, the Unemployment Insurance (U.I.) Program adopted a new approach to the delineation of U.I. economic regions, whereby CMA boundaries were used to define these regions. No new CMAs were created in 1991, although both the Edmonton and Victoria CMAs have undergone major changes to the boundaries of their peripheral CSD components. The number of CMAs by province and territory appears at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. Remarks: The CMA concept did not change between 1986 and 1991. * Several modifications were made to the delineation criteria between 1981 and 1986. To be included in a CMA, a CSD required a commuting flow of at least 50%, up from 40% in 1981. In addition, a commuting flow of at least 100 persons was required. The change to the commuting flow criterion between 1981 and 1986 was implemented in part in order to maintain historical comparability. It was also required to control differences in the processing of place of work data between the 1981 and the 1971 Censuses. Finally, adjacent CMAs or CAs, which were closely interrelated, were consolidated and the subregions called PCMAs or PCAs. Refer to Appendix I for a complete list of CMAs and their constituent PCMAs or PCAs. ** In 1971, CMAs were defined as main labour market areas but were delineated according to alternate criteria based on labour force composition, population growth rate and accessibility. *** In 1966 and 1961, CMAs were delineated around cities with a population of 50,000 or more, provided that the population density and labour force composition criteria were met and that the total CMA population was at least 100,000. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6010 CENSUS SUBDIVISION (CSD) Refers to the general term applying to municipalities (as determined by provincial legislation) or their equivalent, e.g., Indian reserves, Indian settlements and unorganized territories. In Newfoundland, Nova Scotia and British Columbia, the term also describes geographic areas that have been created by Statistics Canada in co-operation with the provinces as equivalents for municipalities. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976,* 1971,* 1966,* 1961* Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: The 1991 Census was taken according to the census subdivision boundaries in effect on January 1, 1991 (the geographic reference date for the census), and received by Statistics Canada before March 1, 1991. It should be noted that each of the parts of a census subdivision which straddles provincial limits is treated as a separate CSD. For the 1991 Census, Indian reserves populated on June 3, 1986, June 3, 1981 and June 1, 1976 (i.e. according to the 1976, 1981 and 1986 Censuses) have been recognized as CSDs. In addition, those Indian reserves identified by Indian and Northern Affairs Canada (INAC) as having a population of 10 or more inhabitants between June 3, 1986 and January 1, 1991 have also been recognized for the 1991 Census. Indian settlements have been recognized as census subdivisions by Statistics Canada with the co-operation of the provincial or territorial authorities. In general, Indian settlements are located in unorganized territory. Summaries of the intercensal census subdivision changes to codes, names, status and boundaries are available in the form of tables found in the Standard Geographical Classification Manual (Catalogue No. 12-573). Remarks: The number of CSDs by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. * Beginning with the 1981 Census, each Indian reserve and Indian settlement recognized by the census has been treated as a separate CSD and reported separately. Prior to the 1981 Census, all Indian reserves in a census division were grouped together and reported as one census subdivision. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6011 CENSUS SUBDIVISION TYPE The type indicates the municipal status of a census subdivision. Census subdivisions (CSDs) are classified into various types, according to official designations adopted by provincial or federal authorities. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Rules and Operational Procedures: The census subdivision types generally accompany the census subdivision names in order to help distinguish CSDs from one another. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: For the 1991 Census, the census subdivision types are the same as those used for the 1986 Census, except in the following cases: - the Sechelt lands now having the CSD type of Indian Government District (IGD) in British Columbia; - some reserves in northern Quebec now being referred to as "terres r‚serv‚es (TR)". Remarks: The number of CSDs by type, province and territory appears in Figure 23B at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23B in the User Documentation or to Figure 23B in publication 92-301E, page 174, to view this figure in its original format. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23B. Census Subdivision Types by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 BOR : Borough 1 - - - - - C : City - Cit‚ 141 3 1 3 6 2 CM : County (municipality) 30 - - - - - COM : Community 184 139 45 - - - CT : Canton (municipalit‚ de) 103 - - - - 103 CU : Cantons unis (municipalit‚ de) 10 - - - - 10 DM : District municipality 48 - - - - - HAM : Hamlet 38 - - - - - ID : Improvement district 22 - - - - - IGD : Indian government district 2 - - - - - LGD : Local government district 21 - - - - - LOT : Township and royalty 68 - 68 - - - MD : Municipal district 35 - - 12 - - NH : Northern hamlet 14 - - - - - NV : Northern village 10 - - - - - P : Paroisse (municipalit‚ de) 406 - - - - 406 PAR : Parish 151 - - - 151 - R : Indian reserve - R‚serve indienne 917 1 4 23 19 27 RM : Rural municipality 403 - - - - - RV : Resort village 40 - - - - - SA : Special area 3 - - - - - SCM : Subdivision of county municipality 41 - - 41 - - SD : Sans d‚signation (municipalit‚) 485 - - - - 485 S-E : Indian settlement - tablissement indien 27 - - - - 3 SET : Settlement 35 - - - - - SRD : Subdivision of regional district 70 - - - - - SUN : Subdivision of unorganized 90 90 - - - - SV : Summer village 54 - - - - - T : Town 706 171 8 39 27 - TP : Township 475 - - - - - TR : Terres r‚serv‚es 9 - - - - 9 UNO : Unorganized - Non organis‚ 155 - - - - 117 V : Ville 255 - - - - 255 VC : Village cri 8 - - - - 8 VK : Village naskapi 1 - - - - 1 VL : Village 934 - - - 84 197 VN : Village nordique 14 - - - - 14 Figure 23B Census Subdivision Types by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 BOR : Borough 1 - - - - - - C : City - Cit‚ 51 5 13 16 39 1 1 CM : County (municipality) - - - 30 - - - COM : Community - - - - - - - CT : Canton (municipalit‚ de) - - - - - - - CU : Cantons unis (municipalit‚ de) - - - - - - - DM : District municipality - - - - 48 - - HAM : Hamlet - - - - - 3 35 ID : Improvement district 3 - - 19 - - - IGD : Indian government district - - - - 2 - - LGD : Local government district - 21 - - - - - LOT : Township and royalty - - - - - - - MD : Municipal district - - - 23 - - - NH : Northern hamlet - - 14 - - - - NV : Northern village - - 10 - - - - P : Paroisse (municipalit‚ de) - - - - - - - PAR : Parish - - - - - - - R : Indian reserve - R‚serve indienne 128 74 104 63 468 4 2 RM : Rural municipality - 105 298 - - - - RV : Resort village - - 40 - - - - SA : Special area - - - 3 - - - SCM : Subdivision of county municipality - - - - - - - SD : Sans d‚signation (municipalit‚) - - - - - - - S-E : Indian settlement - tablissement indien 9 4 1 - 3 7 - SET : Settlement - - - - - 13 22 SRD : Subdivision of regional district - - - - 70 - - SUN : Subdivision of unorganized - - - - - - - SV : Summer village - - - 54 - - - T : Town 148 35 146 109 15 3 5 TP : Township 475 - - - - - - TR : Terres r‚serv‚es - - - - - - - UNO : Unorganized - Non organis‚ 20 10 2 - - 1 5 V : Ville - - - - - - - VC : Village cri - - - - - - - VK : Village naskapi - - - - - - - VL : Village 116 39 325 121 46 4 2 VN : Village nordique - - - - - - - 6012 CENSUS TRACT (CT) The general concept of a census tract (CT) is that of a permanent, small urban neighbourhood-like or rural community-like area established in large urban-centred regions with the help of local specialists interested in urban and social science research. Census tracts are delineated jointly by a local committee and Statistics Canada according to the following criteria: (1) Wherever possible, census tract boundaries must follow permanent and easily recognizable physical features. (2) The population of a census tract must be between 2,500 and 8,000, with a preferred average of 4,000 persons, except for those census tracts in central business districts, in other major commercial and industrial zones, or in peripheral rural or urban areas that may have either a lower or higher population. (3) When first delineated, or subsequently subdivided, census tracts must be as homogeneous as possible in terms of the economic status and social living conditions of their populations. (4) Their shape must be as compact as possible. All census metropolitan areas (CMAs) and census agglomerations (CAs) in Canada containing a census subdivision (CSD), i.e. municipality, having a population of 50,000 or more at the previous census, are eligible for a census tract program. Once a census metropolitan area or census agglomeration is added to the program, it is retained even if the population subsequently decreases below 50,000. CSDs already within a tracted CMA do not qualify for a separate CT program when they reach a population of 50,000. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 and all censuses to 1941* Rules and Operational Procedures: The delineation criteria above are applied in the order listed. Rules and procedures used in the delineation of CTs are described fully in the 1991 Canadian Census Tract Manual (available on request from the Geography Division). Imaginary lines may be used as CT boundaries if there are no nearby physical features. These imaginary lines include such things as street extensions, utility or transportation easements, property lines and municipal limits. Since permanency is the most important criterion, the revision of census tract boundaries is discouraged. Boundary revisions occur rarely and only where essential; the areal extent is kept to a minimum. Such things as road construction, railroad abandonment, urban renewal and suburban growth can cause changes to census tracts and their boundaries. In order to satisfy the permanency criterion, census tract boundaries do not necessarily respect census subdivision boundaries. However, CT boundaries always respect the boundaries of census metropolitan areas (CMAs) and census agglomerations (CAs) and their constituent primary census metropolitan areas (PCMAs) and primary census agglomerations (PCAs). Therefore, while CTs do not necessarily aggregate to CSDs, they always aggregate to the PCMAs/PCAs and CMAs/CAs. The range of the population criterion was established because: - a minimum population of 2,500 permits the tabulation of statistically significant data, especially from a 1/5 sample; and - a maximum population of 8,000 provides a sufficiently wide population range to permit the delineation of homogeneous tracts of varying population sizes, allows for population growth and yields an acceptable population average of 4,000 for both the smallest and largest tracted centres. The population range and average provide a sufficiently uniform size to permit intra-urban comparability of data. The existence of CTs with populations outside the criterion range is justified on the assumptions of functional differentiation (e.g., industrial and commercial zones versus residential zones), homogeneity and population growth. The numbering of CTs within a CMA/CA is applied, as much as possible, on a sequential basis and in a serpentine manner starting from the south-east corner. Within each census-tracted CMA and CA, the core CSD is numbered first (beginning at 001), followed by the adjoining areas, and finally the peripheral areas. Census tracts are identified using a strictly numeric system that is based on a minimum of three digits (e.g., 234), representing the initial CT identifier, and a maximum of five digits (e.g., 234.01), where the suffix identifies subsequent splits. Census tract numbering is stable from one census to the next to facilitate easy historical comparability. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: For the 1991 Census, two census agglomerations have been added to the census tract program. They are Matsqui, British Columbia and Red Deer, Alberta. This brings the total number of tracted centres to 39. The figure below shows the complete list of CMAs and CAs. It also indicates whether they are included in the census tract programme. For the 1991 Census: - the Calgary CMA is comprised of the PCMA of Calgary and the PCA of Airdrie; census tracts respect these boundaries; - while Victoria is no longer a consolidated CMA and the PCA of Sidney no longer exists, there has been no resulting change to CT boundaries; - both the Edmonton and Victoria CMAs have undergone major changes to the boundaries of some peripheral CMA/CA components and this has resulted in some CT boundary changes and/or deletions. CTs should be used with caution for non-statistical purposes. CTs are designed to allow for national and historical statistical comparisons. A conversion table showing the relationship between 1991 and 1986 census tracts for each tracted centre is available on request from the Geography Division. The terms census tract number and census tract code are not synonymous. The former is the numerical name that is used to identify CTs on maps and in data products whereas the code is a four-digit non-geographic numeric identifier used to access a CT on census digital databases. Provincial census tracts (PCTs) complement census tracts and are delineated for all areas outside the census-tracted centres. Taken together, CTs and PCTs cover all of Canada. The objectives of the census tract concept include: - a nationally standard method for the subdivision of eligible centres according to select criteria; - permanent areas that permit historical data comparability; - a common small area system permitting use by many interested groups, be they local, regional or national; and - a system that is simple to understand, easy and inexpensive to use. The nature of the CT concept, along with the availability of a wide range of census data, make CTs useful in many applications. These include: - urban and regional planning and research, such as the development, evaluation and revision of official plans; - educational and research studies in high schools, community colleges and universities; - market research, such as identifying areas of opportunity, evaluating sites, and evaluating market or service potential for housing, health, educational, recreational or retailing facilities. Remarks: * Were called "Social Areas" in 1941 and 1946. ____________________________________________________________ Census Metropolitan Areas (CMAs) and Census Agglomerations (CAs) With Their Component Primary Census Metropolitan Areas (PCMAs) and Primary Census Agglomerations (PCAs), Showing Census Tract and Area Master File Coverage CMA, CA, PCMA, PCA Census Area tract Master File ______________________________________________________________ Alma (CA), Quebec Baie-Comeau (CA), Quebec Barrie (CA), Ontario Bathurst (CA), New Brunswick Belleville (CA), Ontario part Brandon (CA), Manitoba Brantford (CA), Ontario yes yes Brockville (CA), Ontario Calgary (CMA), Alberta yes part Calgary (PCMA) yes part Airdrie (PCA) yes no Campbell River (CA), British Columbia Campbellton (CA), New Brunswick-Quebec Camrose (CA), Alberta Charlottetown (CA), Prince Edward Island Chatham (CA), Ontario Chicoutimi-JonquiŠre (CMA), Quebec yes part Chicoutimi-JonquiŠre (PCMA) yes part La Baie (PCA) yes yes Chilliwack (CA), British Columbia Cobourg (CA), Ontario Collingwood (CA), Ontario Corner Brook (CA), Newfoundland Cornwall (CA), Ontario Courtenay (CA), British Columbia Cowansville (CA), Quebec Cranbrook (CA), British Columbia Dawson Creek (CA), British Columbia Dolbeau (CA), Quebec Drummondville (CA), Quebec Duncan (CA), British Columbia Edmonton (CMA), Alberta yes part Edmonton (PCMA) yes part Leduc (PCA) yes no Spruce Grove (PCA) yes no Edmundston (CA), New Brunswick Elliot Lake (CA), Ontario Estevan (CA), Saskatchewan Fort McMurray (CA), Alberta Fort St. John (CA), British Columbia Fredericton (CA), New Brunswick part Gander (CA), Newfoundland Granby (CA), Quebec Grand Centre (CA), Alberta Grand Falls-Windsor (CA), Newfoundland Grande Prairie (CA), Alberta Guelph (CA), Ontario yes yes Haileybury (CA), Ontario Halifax (CMA), Nova Scotia yes part Hamilton (CMA), Ontario yes yes Hawkesbury (CA), Ontario-Quebec Joliette (CA), Quebec Kamloops (CA), British Columbia yes part Kelowna (CA), British Columbia yes yes Central Okanagan, Subd. B (PCA) yes yes Kelowna (PCA) yes yes Kentville (CA), Nova Scotia Kenora (CA), Ontario Kingston (CA), Ontario yes part Kirkland Lake (CA), Ontario Kitchener (CMA), Ontario yes yes Kitimat (CA), British Columbia La Tuque (CA), Quebec Labrador City (CA), Newfoundland Lachute (CA), Quebec Leamington (CA), Ontario Lethbridge (CA), Alberta yes yes Lindsay (CA), Ontario Lloydminster (CA), Alberta-Saskatchewan London (CMA), Ontario yes yes London (PCMA) yes yes St. Thomas (PCA) yes yes Magog (CA), Quebec Matane (CA), Quebec Matsqui (CA), British Columbia yes yes Medicine Hat (CA), Alberta Midland (CA), Ontario Moncton (CA), New Brunswick yes yes Montr‚al (CMA), Quebec yes part Beloeil (PCA) yes yes Chateauguay (PCA) yes part Montr‚al (PCMA) yes part Moose Jaw (CA), Saskatchewan Nanaimo (CA), British Columbia New Glasgow (CA), Nova Scotia North Battleford (CA), Saskatchewan North Bay (CA), Ontario yes Orillia (CA), Ontario Oshawa (CMA), Ontario yes yes Newcastle (PCA) yes yes Oshawa (PCMA) yes yes Ottawa-Hull (CMA), Ontario-Quebec yes yes Buckingham (PCA) yes yes Kanata (PCA) yes yes Ottawa-Hull (PCMA) yes yes Owen Sound (CA), Ontario Pembroke (CA), Ontario-Quebec Penticton (CA), British Columbia Peterborough (CA), Ontario yes part Port Alberni (CA), British Columbia Port Hope (CA), Ontario yes yes Portage La Prairie (CA), Manitoba Powell River (CA), British Columbia Prince Albert (CA), Saskatchewan Prince George (CA), British Columbia yes yes Prince Rupert (CA), British Columbia Qu‚bec (CMA), Quebec yes part Quesnel (CA), British Columbia Red Deer (CA), Alberta yes yes Regina (CMA), Saskatchewan yes part Rimouski (CA), Quebec RiviŠre-du-Loup (CA), Quebec Rouyn-Noranda (CA), Quebec Saint-Georges (CA), Quebec Saint-Hyacinthe (CA), Quebec Saint-Jean-sur-Richelieu (CA), Quebec Saint-J‚r“me (CA), Quebec part Saint John (CMA), New Brunswick yes part Salaberry-de-Valleyfield (CA), Quebec Sarnia-Clearwater (CA), Ontario yes yes Saskatoon (CMA), Saskatchewan yes part Sault Ste. Marie (CA), Ontario yes yes Selkirk (CA), Manitoba Sept-Iles (CA), Quebec Shawinigan (CA), Quebec Sherbrooke (CMA), Quebec yes part Simcoe (CA), Ontario Sorel (CA), Quebec St. Catharines-Niagara (CMA), Ontario yes yes Fort Erie (PCA) yes yes St. Catharines-Niagara (PCMA) yes yes St. John's (CMA), Newfoundland yes part Conception Bay South (PCA) yes no St. John's (PCMA) yes part Stratford (CA), Ontario yes Summerside (CA), Prince Edward Island Sudbury (CMA), Ontario yes part Sudbury (PCMA) yes part Valley East (PCA) yes no Swift Current (CA), Saskatchewan Sydney (CA), Nova Scotia Sydney (PCA) Sydney Mines (PCA) Terrace (CA), British Columbia Thetford Mines (CA), Quebec Thompson (CA), Manitoba Thunder Bay (CMA), Ontario yes part Tillsonburg (CA), Ontario Timmins (CA), Ontario Toronto (CMA), Ontario yes part Halton Hills (PCA) yes part Milton (PCA) yes part Orangeville (PCA) yes no Toronto (PCMA) yes part Trois-RiviŠres (CMA), Quebec yes part Truro (CA), Nova Scotia Val-d'Or (CA), Quebec Vancouver (CMA), British Columbia yes yes Maple Ridge (PCA) yes yes Vancouver (PCMA) yes yes Vernon (CA), British Columbia Victoria (CMA), British Columbia yes yes Victoriaville (CA), Quebec Wallaceburg (CA), Ontario Wetaskiwin (CA), Alberta Weyburn (CA), Saskatchewan Whitehorse (CA), Yukon Williams Lake (CA), British Columbia Windsor (CMA), Ontario yes part Winnipeg (CMA), Manitoba yes yes Woodstock (CA), Ontario yes Yellowknife (CA), Northwest Territories Yorkton (CA), Saskatchewan 6013 CENTROID The general concept of a centroid refers to a geographic co- ordinate that is a representative central location for a geographic area. Centroids are geographic reference points to facilitate data retrieval, mapping and/or data analysis. For the 1991 Census, two types of centroids were defined to facilitate the retrieval of census data for user-specified areas: enumeration area (EA) centroids and block-face centroids. Enumeration area centroids are located at either the centre of gravity or at the assumed largest concentration of dwellings. Block-face centroids are located at the mid-point of the block- face, set back a perpendicular distance of 22 metres from the street centre line. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Rules and Operational Procedures: EA Centroids EA centroids are determined by both of the following methods: (1) At the centre of gravity. (2) At the assumed largest concentration of dwellings. For areas covered by an Area Master File (AMF), these centroids are calculated by a computer algorithm. In non-AMF areas, EA centroids are manually assigned to the largest concentration of dwellings based on map detail from topographic maps. Areas of uniform population distribution will have EA centroids close to the centre of gravity. Block-face Centroids (1) Block-face centroids are computed within all AMFs along addressable street features between two consecutive intersecting features or between the end of a street and the next intersection, wherever the intersecting feature is not a property boundary (such as a park or airport limit). (2) Block-face centroids are computed using the same rules for addressable sections of highways. (3) Because of this method of centroid computation, if the co- ordinates along the street change even slightly, the block- face centroid will usually change, even though the block-face itself does not change. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: In mathematics and geography textbooks, a centroid is normally defined as the centre of gravity of an area. Hence, the dwelling-weighted EA and block-face "centroids" as defined above are, in most cases, not centroids in the strictest sense but rather representative central points within the EA or block-face. Nevertheless, the term centroid is used for consistency with census terminology over the last four censuses. EA centroids all fall within the appropriate EA boundaries. For the census, EA and block-face centroids support the geocoding system and the production of postal code conversion files for user-defined areas. They also support computer-assisted statistical mapping and spatial analysis of EA or block-face data. Due to their method of computation, block-face centroids may not be unique; perpendicular block-faces of equal length may be assigned the same co-ordinate values. For further details, refer to the definitions Block-face, Enumeration Area (EA) and Geocoding. Remarks: Prior to 1991, the EA centroids representing the centre of gravity were not generated. Also, within the AMF coverage, EA centroids were selected by an algorithm based on the location and number of block-face centroids. 6014 CMA/CA COMPONENT Refers to the census subdivisions (CSDs) which form the building- blocks of a census metropolitan area (CMA), census agglomeration (CA), primary census metropolitan area (PCMA) or primary census agglomeration (PCA). Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966,* 1961* Remarks: * In 1966 and 1961, the term "Component Parts" was used. 6015 CMA/CA PARTS The concept of CMA/CA parts distinguishes between central and peripheral urban and rural areas within a census metropolitan area (CMA) or a census agglomeration (CA). There are three CMA/CA parts: urbanized core, urban fringe and rural fringe. Urbanized core: A large urban area around which a CMA or a CA is delineated. The urbanized core must have a population (based on the previous census) of at least 100,000 in the case of a CMA, or between 10,000 and 99,999 in the case of a CA. Urban fringe: An urban area within a CMA or CA, but outside the urbanized core. Rural fringe: All territory within a CMA or CA lying outside urban areas. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981,* 1976,** 1971,** 1966,*** 1961*** Rules and Operational Procedures: See the Urban Area (UA) definition. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: While every CMA and CA has an urbanized core, it may or may not have urban or rural fringe parts. Similarly, in those CMAs and CAs which are subdivided into primary census metropolitan areas (PCMAs) or primary census agglomerations (PCAs), each of the constituent PCMAs or PCAs has an urbanized core, but may or may not have urban or rural fringe parts. In those CMAs and CAs which are subdivided into PCMAs/PCAs, the total urbanized core, total urban fringe and total rural fringe parts are equal to the sums of the urbanized cores, urban fringes and rural fringes, respectively, of their constituent PCMAs/PCAs. Remarks: * Beginning in 1986, PCMAs and PCAs were created within some CMAs and CAs. Some urban areas which were urban fringes of 1981 CMAs or CAs became urbanized cores of 1986 PCMAs or PCAs as a result of this change. ** In 1976 and 1971, the urbanized core was further broken down into the "largest city" and "remainder". *** In 1966 and 1961, a coding system distinguished within the CMA between the urban part, divided into a metropolitan area - urban (MAU) (continuous built-up area) and a metropolitan area - outside urban (MAOU) (non-continuous built-up area), and the rural part (MAR - metropolitan area - rural). 6016 ECUMENE (POPULATION) The term ecumene is derived from the Greek and is used by geographers to mean "inhabited land". The ecumene concept is used in thematic mapping to ensure that the spatial representation of census data is limited to inhabited areas. Two levels of ecumenes have been delineated: a national ecumene and an urban ecumene. The national ecumene was created to support census division mapping at scales of 1:2,000,000 or smaller. Ecumene pockets were created within all census divisions. The same ecumene can be used for other census geographic areas; however, ecumene pockets may not exist for all areas. For example, approximately 5% of all census subdivisions (CSDs) fall outside the national ecumene, principally remote northern CSDs. The urban ecumene was created to support thematic mapping for the Metropolitan Atlas series. The compilation of scales for the urban ecumene varies between 1:65,000 and 1:200,000. Mapping at a smaller scale than the scale found in each census metropolitan area (CMA) in this series will reduce the minimum size of the pockets to the point where some pockets may become indistinguishable from surrounding areas. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976 (national ecumene) 1991, 1986 (urban ecumene) Rules and Operational Procedures: (1) National Ecumene The ecumene for the 1991 Census was created to support thematic mapping at a scale of 1:2,000,000 or smaller, and was derived using a population density threshold. The ecumenes for the 1986, 1981 and 1971 Censuses were created using local knowledge of the inhabited area. (2) Urban Ecumenes The urban ecumene was created to support thematic mapping for the Metropolitan Atlas series at scales ranging from 1:65,000 to 1:200,000. The urban ecumene for the 1991 Census represents an updated version from the 1986 Census using recent LANDSAT Thematic Mapper satellite imagery. The criteria used to delineate the ecumene was based on residential and some institutional land uses, since census data are collected at places of residence and institutions such as hospitals and prisons. Cartographic generalization of those urban ecumenes involved selecting, simplifying, exaggerating and/or merging ecumene areas. A minimum ecumene size of about 3.2 mm x 3.2 mm (1/8" x 1/8") at atlas print scales was established to ensure that data depicted would be visible. At least one ecumene pocket was created for each census tract included in each CMA. Each urban ecumene was created for use with a specific map scale: St. John's 1:130,000 Halifax 1:165,000 Qu‚bec 1:145,000 Montr‚al 1:115,000 Ottawa-Hull 1:165,000 Toronto 1:155,000 Hamilton 1:160,000 Winnipeg 1:160,000 Regina 1:165,000 Calgary 1:180,000 Edmonton 1:145,000 Vancouver 1:195,000 If the mapping scale is smaller or larger than the suggested scale noted above, then small areas may visually collapse or not provide adequate detail. Special Note An agricultural ecumene was created to map agricultural data. 6017 ENUMERATION AREA (EA) An enumeration area (EA) is the geographic area canvassed by one census representative. Censuses: 1991,* 1986,* 1981,* 1976,* 1971,** 1966,** 1961** Rules and Operational Procedures: EA criteria are defined by Survey Operations Division for field collection requirements. EAs are to be as compact as possible to minimize travel and optimize census representative work. EAs are delineated so that the census representative may locate them with as little difficulty as possible. Therefore, wherever possible, EAs follow easily recognizable physical features (such as the road network and rivers). Enumeration area (EA) criteria include: (1) Dwellings - the number of dwellings in an enumeration area generally varies between a maximum of 375 dwellings in large urban areas to a minimum of 125 in rural areas. (2) Limits - an enumeration area never cuts across any geographic area recognized by the census. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Enumeration areas (EAs) are primarily census collection units; they are not designed as dissemination areas. Nonetheless, the EA is the smallest geographic unit for which census data are usually available. EAs may change limits from census to census. Approximately 40% of the 1991 EAs remained identical to 1986 limits; however, the balance changed due to: (a) population growth; (b) a redistribution of federal electoral district (FED) boundaries in 1987; (c) changes to geographic limits recognized by the census; (d) the extension of the "mail-back" collection methodology into the 1986 "pick-up" areas; (e) changes in delineation criteria. Remarks: The number of EAs by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. * The number of dwellings per EA rarely exceeded 400. ** The number of dwellings per EA rarely exceeded 300. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6018 FEDERAL ELECTORAL DISTRICT (FED) A federal electoral district refers to any place or territorial area entitled to return a member to serve in the House of Commons (source: Canada Elections Act, 1990). There are 295 FEDs in Canada according to the 1987 Representation Order. Federal electoral districts are defined according to the following criteria: (1) the legal limits and descriptions are the responsibility of the Chief Electoral Officer and are published in the Canada Gazette; (2) FED limits are usually revised every 10 years after the results of the decennial census. Censuses: 1991, 1986,* 1981,* 1976,** 1971,** 1966,*** 1961*** Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: The Representation Order is prepared by the Chief Electoral Officer describing, naming and specifying the population of each electoral district established by the Electoral Boundaries Commission and sent to the Governor in Council. According to the 1987 Representation Order, only 13 of the 295 FEDs have the same limits as in the previous (1976) Representation Order. They are: Nova Scotia 12001 Annapolis Valley-Hants 12006 Cumberland-Colchester 12010 South Shore 12011 South West Nova New Brunswick 13005 Gloucester 13006 Madawaska-Victoria 13009 Restigouche Ontario 35037 Kingston and the Islands 35051 Niagara Falls 35072 Sarnia-Lambton Yukon 60001 Yukon Northwest Territories 61001 Nunatsiaq 61002 Western Arctic The names of FEDs may change through an act of Parliament. The geographic reference date for FED name changes to be recognized by the 1991 Census is January 1, 1991. Remarks: * The 1986 and 1981 Censuses were taken according to the 1976 Representation Order. ** The 1976 and 1971 Censuses were taken according to the 1966 Representation Order. *** The 1966 and 1961 Censuses were taken according to the 1952 Representation Order. 6019 GEOCODING Geocoding refers to the technique that is used to geographically code and link census households to small geographical units. This supports the retrieval service (commonly known as the geocoding service) by user-specified query areas. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Rules and Operational Procedures: (1) Centroid co-ordinates are computed as explained under Centroid. (2) For areas within the Area Master File (AMF) coverage, households are assigned to the appropriate block-face centroid based on their address. Households outside AMF coverage are geocoded to the corresponding enumeration area centroid. (3) Once a query area boundary is encoded, those centroids which fall within the boundary are selected by a computer algorithm. In this way, the households assigned to the selected centroids are automatically selected. The corresponding data variables can then be tabulated. Special Notes, Quality Statements, Applications and Limitations: (1) The coverage of block-face geocoding has expanded since 1971. In 1971, approximately 35% of the population of Canada was covered by block-face geocoding, and for 1991, this percentage will rise to over 61%. Longitudinal data analysis can be supported (i.e. retrieval of census data for the same query areas over five censuses) although data quality may be affected if AMF coverage is not available for each census year or if the number of EAs in the coverage areas varies significantly. (2) The geocoding system supports the user-defined query area retrieval service and also serves as a basic input to providing block-face data counts. (3) See Query Area, Centroid, Area Master File (AMF), Enumeration Area (EA) and Block-face for further notes. Remarks: The geocoding system provides increased flexibility for the retrieval and tabulation of data by user- specified areas. 6020 GEOGRAPHIC AREA Refers to geographic areas delineated or employed for the collection, compilation, analysis and dissemination of census data. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Remarks: These geographic areas, as mentioned in the Introduction, can be subdivided into administrative/legislative areas and statistical areas. Legislative/administrative areas are areas generally defined by authorities (e.g., a province) other than Statistics Canada, and with few exceptions, are defined in federal and provincial statutes in Canada: Provinces and territories Federal electoral districts (FEDs) Census divisions (CDs) Census subdivisions (CSDs) Subprovincial regions (SPRs) In some instances, legislative/administrative areas are partly defined by Statistics Canada in co- operation with provincial authorities in order to maintain national uniformity (see SPRs, CDs and CSDs). Statistical areas are defined by Statistics Canada as part of the spatial frame used to collect and disseminate census data. These include: Agricultural regions Census consolidated subdivisions (CCSs) Census metropolitan areas (CMAs) Census agglomerations (CAs) Primary census metropolitan areas (PCMAs) Primary census agglomerations (PCAs) Census tracts (CTs) Provincial census tracts (PCTs) Urban and rural areas CMA/CA parts CMA/CA components Enumeration areas (EAs) See the Hierarchy of Standard Geographic Areas for the relationship of these areas to one another and to legislative/administrative areas. Refer to Figure 21 in the User Documentation or to Figure 21 in publication 92-301E, page 171, to view this hierarchy. 6021 GEOGRAPHIC REFERENCE DATE The geographic reference date is a date determined by Statistics Canada for the purpose of establishing the geographic framework for which census data will be collected, tabulated and reported. For the 1991 Census, the geographic reference date is January 1, 1991. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976,* 1971,* 1966,* 1961* Rules and Operational Procedures: Names, boundaries and other attributes of geographic areas change frequently (for example, municipal amalgamations, annexations, name and status changes). Since the geographic framework is used for census data collection, the geographic reference date must be set sufficiently in advance of Census Day to permit all changes to be processed in time. Furthermore, notification of these changes is normally not received from the applicable federal and provincial authorities until after the changes have occurred. For these reasons, the census reports data according to the geographic areas that were in effect on January 1, 1991, provided the information on the changes was received by Statistics Canada by March 1, 1991. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Since census data refer to conditions as they existed on Census Day (June 4, 1991), while the geographic framework is established according to the geographic areas in effect as of January 1, 1991, census data may be reported for geographic areas which have subsequently changed during this period. Since the incorporation of changes is dependent on notification being received from applicable federal and provincial authorities, the geographic framework established for census purposes may not reflect the actual geographic framework in effect on January 1, 1991, if the appropriate notification was never received or was not received by March 1, 1991. Remarks: * Prior to the 1981 Census, the geographic reference date was set to the same date as Census Day. From the 1981 Census onwards, it has been set at January 1 of the census year. 6022 GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES Geographical names refer to the set of names used by Statistics Canada to identify geographic areas. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Rules and Operational Procedures: Geographical names, as they are employed by Statistics Canada, are concerned with populated places, or with places which have had a population at some time. Statistics Canada does not collect names which refer to physical features such as lakes or rivers. Users should be aware that census geographic areas are subject to change from one census to the next. Therefore, when using data from two or more censuses, the user must be aware of, and take into consideration, any changes of the geographic limits of the areas being compared. 6023 LAND AREA Gross Refers to area measurement in square kilometres, including bodies of water. All land area measurements of geographical units apply to the limits in effect on January 1, 1991, the geographic reference date for the 1991 Census of Canada. The map scales used to measure land area generally vary between 1:50,000 and 1:250,000. In densely populated urban areas and in sparsely populated areas, larger or smaller scales are sometimes used. Census: 1991 Rules and Operational Procedures: These area measurements have been derived from a digital boundary file created for enumeration areas. As a result, gross land area can be determined for all higher order standard geographical units. The area is determined by calculating the entire area found within the boundary of each enumeration area (EA) using a standard projection called Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) and an Arc/Info software area calculation function. The area calculated by the software is based on the projection initially used during the digitizing process. Transformation of ZXY co-ordinates from one projection to another is also possible. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Users should be aware that these data include bodies of water such as the offshore limits of an EA and their application in the calculation of population density should not be attempted. Net Refers to land area measurement in square kilometres and excludes discernible bodies of water as found on the maps used to calculate land area. All land area measurements apply to the limits in effect on January 1, 1991, the geographic reference date for the 1991 Census of Canada. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1976, 1971,* 1966,* 1961* Rules and Operational Procedures: The map scales used to measure land area generally vary between 1:50,000 and 1:250,000. In densely populated urban areas and in sparsely populated areas, larger or smaller scales are sometimes used. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: The census of Canada provides unofficial land area measurements for the sole purpose of calculating population density. Availability of Net Land Area, by Census Year, 1961-1991 Year EA CSD(2) CCS(3) CD(2) SPR(3) PROV(2) UA(3) CMA(2) 1991 X X X X X X X 1986 X X X X X 1981 X X X X X 1976 X X X X X 1971 X X X X X 1966 X X X X x X 1961 X X X x X Availability of Net Land Area, by Census Year, 1961-1991 - Concluded Year CA(2) PCMA(3) PCA(3) CT(3) PCT(3) FED(1) 1991 X X X X X X 1986 X X X X X X 1981 X X X X 1976 X X X X 1971 X X X X 1966 X X X 1961 X X X (1) Available only where CSDs or CTs/PCTs aggregate to a FED (2) Published (3) Available on demand Different methodologies used for the calculation of gross and net land areas do not allow precise comparison between the two figures. Remarks: * Prior to the 1976 Census, all land area data were in square miles. 6024 MAP PROJECTION Since the earth is spherical, the system employed to transform the spherical surface to a plane (flat) surface is called a map projection. This process involves some distortion in either angle, area, distance or direction. Locating points relative to one another requires use of co-ordinate systems. Two types of systems are now in general use: the geographical (earth) co-ordinate system employs latitude and longitude, and the second system uses plane rectangular co-ordinates (cartesian co-ordinates). It is important to select a projection having the properties that are suited to the mapping situation. Latitude/Longitude A system of measuring location on the surface of the earth which recognizes that the earth is spherical. The latitude measures the angle north or south of the equator from 0 degrees at the equator (normally in degrees, minutes and seconds) to 90 degrees at the poles. For the land mass of Canada, the latitudes range from roughly 42 to 83 degrees north. Longitude corresponds to the angle (normally in degrees, minutes and seconds) west of the prime meridian which runs through Greenwich, England. For the land mass of Canada, the longitude ranges from roughly 52 degrees to 141 degrees west. Censuses: 1991,* 1986,* 1981* Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Latitude/longitude is well suited for world-wide or continental applications. For this reason, it is the principal projection system used by many popular software mapping systems. If maps are produced directly on a flat surface using latitude/longitude co-ordinates as if they were cartesian co- ordinates, significant distortion in shape and area occurs. Latitude/longitude co-ordinates are available for many of the digital cartographic products, including CARTLIB boundary files and the Postal Code Conversion File (PCCF). Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) An internationally standardized grid system which involves dividing the earth into 60 separate zones of six degrees of longitude each. Canada is divided into 16 zones bearing numbers 7 to 22 from west to east. For the UTM, the Transverse Mercator projection is employed (Gauss-Kruger type). West-east positions (eastings) are measured from a separate point for each zone. Eastings are counted from the central meridian (called the 500,000-metre line), those to the west of it having an easting value of less than 500,000 and those to the east of it having a value greater than 500,000. Eastings are all greater than 0 and less than 1,000,000. South-north positions (northings) are designated by their distance in metres from the equator. Because Canada's southernmost point is about 4,620,000 metres from the equator, all points in Canada have a northing value greater than 4,620,000. Censuses: 1991,** 1986,** 1981,** 1976,** 1971** Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Shape, distance and area are quite well preserved within a single UTM zone. However, this is less true towards the east and west borders of the zone. UTM is not very suitable for national mapping, distance calculations or analysis when UTM zone boundaries must be crossed. The UTM projection system is the system utilized for most of the topographic mapping in Canada. It has also been used for many census geographic products including large scale maps and Area Master Files. Lambert Conformal Conic Projection A map projection which is widely used for mapping Canada on one sheet, since it provides good directional and shape relationships for mid-latitude regions having a mainly east-to-west extent. Standard parallels at 49ø N and 77ø N are most commonly used, as well as a central meridian at 91ø 52ø W. Locations are specified in easting and northing co-ordinates in metres relative to a pre-defined origin. Censuses: 1991,*** 1986,*** 1981*** Remarks: * For CARTLIB files (see the CARTLIB [Cartographic Library] definition), latitude/longitude is available for the 1991, 1986 and 1981 Censuses. For the Postal Code Conversion File (see the Postal Code definition), latitude/longitude is available for the 1991 and 1986 Censuses. ** For the large scale reference maps and the Area Master Files (see the Area Master File [AMF] definition), UTM projection is available for the 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976 and 1971 Censuses. For the Postal Code Conversion File (see the Postal Code definition), UTM projection is available for the 1991 and 1986 Censuses. *** For the CARTLIB files and national maps (see the CARTLIB [Cartographic Library] definition), Lambert Conformal Conic Projection is available for the 1991, 1986 and 1981 Censuses. For the Postal Code Conversion File (see the Postal Code definition), Lambert Conformal Conic Projection is available for the 1986 Census. 6025 PLACE NAMES Place name is a general term for localities, urban neighbourhoods, post offices, communities and other types of unincorporated places (UPs). Place names include the names of inhabited places, formerly inhabited places, and other names associated with some human activity. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Rules and Operational Procedures: The primary sources of Statistics Canada's information on places and the spelling of place names are: - names reported by census representatives during the census; - names approved by the provincial and territorial names authorities on the Canadian Permanent Committee on Geographical Names (CPCGN) and included in the Canadian Geographic Names Database. The CPCGN standardizes and co- ordinates policies and procedures for geographical naming in Canada. The Surveys, Mapping and Remote Sensing Sector of the department of Energy, Mines and Resources provides the committee with a secretariat. Special Notes and Applications: All of the names obtained from the sources indicated above are maintained in a single file at Statistics Canada. Most names on the file are linked to the Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) codes. Some names, retained for historical purposes, are assigned codes at the provincial level only. The link between SGC codes and place names is used internally by Statistics Canada to code responses to census or survey questions. Independent surveys can use published lists of place names and SGC codes to reference their data to Statistics Canada standard areas. Unincorporated places are a subset of all place names collected by Statistics Canada. 6026 POPULATION DENSITY Refers to the number of persons per square kilometre of net land area. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Availability of Population Density, by Census Year, 1961-1991 Year EA CSD(2) CCS(3) CD(2) SPR(3) PROV(2) UA(3) CMA(2) 1991 X X X X X X X 1986 X X X X X X 1981 X X X X X X 1976 X X X X X X 1971 X X X X X X 1966 X X X X X X 1961 X X X X X Availability of Population Density, by Census Year, 1961-1991 - Concluded Year CA(2) PCMA(3) CT(3) PCT(3) FED(1) 1991 X X X X X 1986 X X X 1981 X X X 1976 X X X 1971 X X X 1966 X X X 1961 X X X (1) Available only where CSDs or CTs/PCTs aggregate to a FED (2) Published (3) Available on demand Population densities support a variety of applications including ecumene determination and spatial analysis. Remarks: Since 1981, all population density data have been expressed in persons per square kilometre only. 6027 POSTAL CODE The postal code is a six-character alpha-numeric code defined and maintained by Canada Post Corporation for the processing (sortation and delivery) of mail. Censuses: 1991, 1986 Rules and Operational Procedures: The alpha-numeric characters are arranged in the form ANA NAN, where "A" represents a letter of the alphabet and "N" a numeric digit. The first character of a postal code (allocated in alphabetic sequence from east to west across Canada) represents a province or territory, or a major sector entirely within a province. The first three characters represent a set of well defined and stable areas known as the Forward Sortation Area (FSA). Rural FSAs are identifiable by the presence of a "0" in the second position of the FSA code. The last three characters identify the Local Delivery Unit (LDU). In established urban areas, the LDU can specify a small and easily defined area within an FSA such as a block-face (one side of a city street between consecutive intersections with streets or similar physical features), an apartment building, an office building, or a large firm or organization which does large volume business with the post office. In rural areas, the LDU denotes a service area - the area serviced by rural route delivery from a post office or postal station, e.g., a rural route, general delivery or post office box. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: The number of postal codes and FSAs which were in existence, by province and territory, as of June 1991, is listed in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. The postal code represents a spatial referencing system which allows large volumes of geographic data to be manipulated, retrieved and analyzed at the micro-level. When used as a linking tool between administrative files, the postal code protects the confidentiality of names or specific addresses, while at the same time offering a finer level of data aggregation. Postal code (FSA) boundaries were not designed to respect standard geographic boundaries (except at the provincial level). Even then, there are three cases where the FSA valid in one province will service a census subdivision (CSD) within an adjacent province. This occurs when a CSD straddles a province boundary. Manitoba FSA "R8A" services both the Manitoba and Saskatchewan portions of Flin Flon. Saskatchewan FSAs "S9V" and "S0A" service the Saskatchewan and Alberta portions of Lloydminster. The Alberta portion of Makaoo 120 Indian Reserve is serviced by the Saskatchewan rural postal code "S0M 2E0". Rural postal codes refer to the post office location. The actual service area of a rural post office is defined by the extent of its rural routes. Therefore, the inferred link to standard geography is according to the physical location of the rural post office and not the service area. It is difficult to identify where a person lives based on a rural postal code. In some northern delivery cases, a rural postal code valid for the southern part of the province is also used to service northern settlements. Urban postal codes representing a post office box also cannot be used to geo-reference a street location because the postal code is within a post office. The community mail box has introduced an expanded territory for the postal code. In new growth areas, a community mail box postal code can now represent both odd and even sides of a street and different streets within a 300-metre radius of the community mail box. Users requiring more information on applications and limitations of the postal code should refer to the Data Quality Statement found in the Detailed User Documentation of the Postal Code Conversion File available from Geography Division. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 ________________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6028 PRIMARY CENSUS AGGLOMERATION (PCA) See Primary Census Metropolitan Area (PCMA) - Primary Census Agglomeration (PCA). 6029 PRIMARY CENSUS METROPOLITAN AREA (PCMA) - PRIMARY CENSUS AGGLOMERATION (PCA) The primary census metropolitan area (PCMA) or primary census agglomeration (PCA) concept recognizes the fact that adjacent census metropolitan areas (CMAs) and census agglomerations (CAs) are socially and economically integrated within a larger consolidated CMA or CA. Adjacent CMAs and CAs are consolidated into a single CMA or CA if the total commuting interchange between the two is equal to at least 35% of the employed labour force living in the smaller CMA or CA, based on the previous census. The original CMAs or CAs are known as PCMA or PCA subregions of the CMA or CA. Censuses: 1991, 1986 Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Users should be aware that PCMA/PCA boundaries respect census subdivision (CSD) limits. Furthermore, since PCMA/PCA boundaries for the 1991 Census are based on 1981 place of work commuting flow data, they may not reflect current boundaries of economic and social integration with an urban area. PCMA/PCA boundaries may also differ from other types of areas such as trading, marketing or regional planning areas designated by local authorities for planning or other purposes. The PCMA/PCA definition should be used with caution for non-statistical activities. The delineation of PCMAs/PCAs is designed to allow for the statistical comparison of all PCMAs/PCAs across Canada. The PCA of Sidney, B.C., and the PCMA of Victoria, B.C., no longer exist since their urban cores merged. Consequently, for 1991, Victoria CMA is no longer a consolidated CMA, but is now a regular CMA. The number of PCMAs and PCAs by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. A complete list of CMAs, CAs, PCMAs and PCAs are found in the text below. ____________________________________________________________ Census Metropolitan Areas (CMAs) and Census Agglomerations (CAs) With Their Component Primary Census Metropolitan Areas (PCMAs) and Primary Census Agglomerations (PCAs), Showing Census Tract and Area Master File Coverage CMA, CA, PCMA, PCA Census Area tract Master File ______________________________________________________________ Alma (CA), Quebec Baie-Comeau (CA), Quebec Barrie (CA), Ontario Bathurst (CA), New Brunswick Belleville (CA), Ontario part Brandon (CA), Manitoba Brantford (CA), Ontario yes yes Brockville (CA), Ontario Calgary (CMA), Alberta yes part Calgary (PCMA) yes part Airdrie (PCA) yes no Campbell River (CA), British Columbia Campbellton (CA), New Brunswick-Quebec Camrose (CA), Alberta Charlottetown (CA), Prince Edward Island Chatham (CA), Ontario Chicoutimi-JonquiŠre (CMA), Quebec yes part Chicoutimi-JonquiŠre (PCMA) yes part La Baie (PCA) yes yes Chilliwack (CA), British Columbia Cobourg (CA), Ontario Collingwood (CA), Ontario Corner Brook (CA), Newfoundland Cornwall (CA), Ontario Courtenay (CA), British Columbia Cowansville (CA), Quebec Cranbrook (CA), British Columbia Dawson Creek (CA), British Columbia Dolbeau (CA), Quebec Drummondville (CA), Quebec Duncan (CA), British Columbia Edmonton (CMA), Alberta yes part Edmonton (PCMA) yes part Leduc (PCA) yes no Spruce Grove (PCA) yes no Edmundston (CA), New Brunswick Elliot Lake (CA), Ontario Estevan (CA), Saskatchewan Fort McMurray (CA), Alberta Fort St. John (CA), British Columbia Fredericton (CA), New Brunswick part Gander (CA), Newfoundland Granby (CA), Quebec Grand Centre (CA), Alberta Grand Falls-Windsor (CA), Newfoundland Grande Prairie (CA), Alberta Guelph (CA), Ontario yes yes Haileybury (CA), Ontario Halifax (CMA), Nova Scotia yes part Hamilton (CMA), Ontario yes yes Hawkesbury (CA), Ontario-Quebec Joliette (CA), Quebec Kamloops (CA), British Columbia yes part Kelowna (CA), British Columbia yes yes Central Okanagan, Subd. B (PCA) yes yes Kelowna (PCA) yes yes Kentville (CA), Nova Scotia Kenora (CA), Ontario Kingston (CA), Ontario yes part Kirkland Lake (CA), Ontario Kitchener (CMA), Ontario yes yes Kitimat (CA), British Columbia La Tuque (CA), Quebec Labrador City (CA), Newfoundland Lachute (CA), Quebec Leamington (CA), Ontario Lethbridge (CA), Alberta yes yes Lindsay (CA), Ontario Lloydminster (CA), Alberta-Saskatchewan London (CMA), Ontario yes yes London (PCMA) yes yes St. Thomas (PCA) yes yes Magog (CA), Quebec Matane (CA), Quebec Matsqui (CA), British Columbia yes yes Medicine Hat (CA), Alberta Midland (CA), Ontario Moncton (CA), New Brunswick yes yes Montr‚al (CMA), Quebec yes part Beloeil (PCA) yes yes Chateauguay (PCA) yes part Montr‚al (PCMA) yes part Moose Jaw (CA), Saskatchewan Nanaimo (CA), British Columbia New Glasgow (CA), Nova Scotia North Battleford (CA), Saskatchewan North Bay (CA), Ontario yes Orillia (CA), Ontario Oshawa (CMA), Ontario yes yes Newcastle (PCA) yes yes Oshawa (PCMA) yes yes Ottawa-Hull (CMA), Ontario-Quebec yes yes Buckingham (PCA) yes yes Kanata (PCA) yes yes Ottawa-Hull (PCMA) yes yes Owen Sound (CA), Ontario Pembroke (CA), Ontario-Quebec Penticton (CA), British Columbia Peterborough (CA), Ontario yes part Port Alberni (CA), British Columbia Port Hope (CA), Ontario yes yes Portage La Prairie (CA), Manitoba Powell River (CA), British Columbia Prince Albert (CA), Saskatchewan Prince George (CA), British Columbia yes yes Prince Rupert (CA), British Columbia Qu‚bec (CMA), Quebec yes part Quesnel (CA), British Columbia Red Deer (CA), Alberta yes yes Regina (CMA), Saskatchewan yes part Rimouski (CA), Quebec RiviŠre-du-Loup (CA), Quebec Rouyn-Noranda (CA), Quebec Saint-Georges (CA), Quebec Saint-Hyacinthe (CA), Quebec Saint-Jean-sur-Richelieu (CA), Quebec Saint-J‚r“me (CA), Quebec part Saint John (CMA), New Brunswick yes part Salaberry-de-Valleyfield (CA), Quebec Sarnia-Clearwater (CA), Ontario yes yes Saskatoon (CMA), Saskatchewan yes part Sault Ste. Marie (CA), Ontario yes yes Selkirk (CA), Manitoba Sept-Iles (CA), Quebec Shawinigan (CA), Quebec Sherbrooke (CMA), Quebec yes part Simcoe (CA), Ontario Sorel (CA), Quebec St. Catharines-Niagara (CMA), Ontario yes yes Fort Erie (PCA) yes yes St. Catharines-Niagara (PCMA) yes yes St. John's (CMA), Newfoundland yes part Conception Bay South (PCA) yes no St. John's (PCMA) yes part Stratford (CA), Ontario yes Summerside (CA), Prince Edward Island Sudbury (CMA), Ontario yes part Sudbury (PCMA) yes part Valley East (PCA) yes no Swift Current (CA), Saskatchewan Sydney (CA), Nova Scotia Sydney (PCA) Sydney Mines (PCA) Terrace (CA), British Columbia Thetford Mines (CA), Quebec Thompson (CA), Manitoba Thunder Bay (CMA), Ontario yes part Tillsonburg (CA), Ontario Timmins (CA), Ontario Toronto (CMA), Ontario yes part Halton Hills (PCA) yes part Milton (PCA) yes part Orangeville (PCA) yes no Toronto (PCMA) yes part Trois-RiviŠres (CMA), Quebec yes part Truro (CA), Nova Scotia Val-d'Or (CA), Quebec Vancouver (CMA), British Columbia yes yes Maple Ridge (PCA) yes yes Vancouver (PCMA) yes yes Vernon (CA), British Columbia Victoria (CMA), British Columbia yes yes Victoriaville (CA), Quebec Wallaceburg (CA), Ontario Wetaskiwin (CA), Alberta Weyburn (CA), Saskatchewan Whitehorse (CA), Yukon Williams Lake (CA), British Columbia Windsor (CMA), Ontario yes part Winnipeg (CMA), Manitoba yes yes Woodstock (CA), Ontario yes Yellowknife (CA), Northwest Territories Yorkton (CA), Saskatchewan ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6030 PROVINCE Refers to the major political division of Canada. From a statistical point of view, it is a basic unit for which data are tabulated and cross-classified. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 6031 PROVINCIAL CENSUS TRACT (PCT) The general concept of a provincial census tract (PCT) is that of a permanent, small, urban and/or rural neighbourhood-like or community-like area outside those census metropolitan areas (CMAs) and census agglomerations (CAs) having a census tract (CT) program. Taken together, CTs and PCTs cover all of Canada. Provincial census tracts are delineated to encompass populations between 3,000 and 8,000, with a preferred average of 5,000. Boundaries, as much as possible, follow permanent physical features. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971* Rules and Operational Procedures: When originally delineated, PCTs in some provinces were based on geographical units or boundaries suggested by provincial authorities. Since that time: - PCTs have been subdivided to reflect population growth; - boundaries have been altered where required to meet Statistics Canada's operational requirements; and - boundaries have been altered or PCTs replaced as the extent of CMAs and CAs with census tracts has expanded or CAs have become eligible for a census tract program. Because PCTs are intended to be permanent areas that permit the historical comparability of data, every effort has been made to minimize both the volume and geographical extent of boundary changes. For the same reason, PCT boundaries do not necessarily respect the boundaries of census subdivisions (CSDs), i.e. municipalities. Nevertheless, PCTs always respect provincial boundaries and the external boundaries of those CMAs and CAs having a census tract program. PCTs are numbered by province in a serpentine manner starting from the southeast corner. PCTs are numbered using a minimum of four digits (e.g., 0001) and a maximum of six digits (e.g., 0001.01). A range of PCT numbers is applied for each province (i.e. 0001 is not the first PCT in each province). Gaps exist in the numbering of PCTs. This results from two factors: initially, PCTs included CTs; however, the decision was made to restrict PCTs to those areas not included in the census tract program, and PCTs are retired as the census tract coverage is expanded. Not all PCT numbers in each range are currently used. PCT numbering is stable from one census to the next in order to facilitate easy historical comparability. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: For the 1991 Census: - PCTs have not been subdivided to reflect population growth since 1981; - the boundaries of PCTs on the edge of the Edmonton and Victoria CMAs have been adjusted to reflect changes in the boundaries of these two CMAs; and - the 1986 PCTs in the Red Deer, Alta. and Matsqui, B.C. CAs have been replaced by 1991 CT programs. PCTs should be used with caution for non-statistical activities. PCTs are designed to allow for national and historical statistical comparisons. A conversion table showing the relationship between 1991 and 1986 provincial census tracts is available on request from the Geography Division. The terms PCT number and PCT code are not synonymous. The former is the numerical name used to identify PCTs on maps and in data products whereas the code is a four-digit non-geographic numeric identifier used to access a PCT on census digital databases. The number of PCTs by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. PCTs are useful in the same wide range of applications open to census tract users. However, users must remember that PCTs do not usually aggregate (roll-up) to municipalities or census agglomerations. Remarks: * Were called "Area Aggregate" in 1971. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 _________________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6032 QUERY AREA An area for which census data can be retrieved and tabulated. There are two types: standard and user-defined query areas. A standard query area corresponds to one of the geographic areas predefined by the census. (See the definition Geographic Area.) A user-defined query area (such as a traffic zone or school district) is an area for which census data are requested and that is not equivalent to a standard geographic area. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Rules and Operational Procedures: User-defined query areas may be defined in a variety of ways including: boundaries drawn on an acceptable base map, a written description of features bounding the area, an area along a street between two specified intersections, an area within a fixed distance or range of distances from a specified point on the earth, regular grid areas of specified size and location, or as an aggregation of standard geographic areas. Once the user-defined query areas are converted to a machine- readable form, the geocoding system is used to select the households which correspond to each query area. This is achieved by grouping block-faces (where there is full Area Master File [AMF] coverage) or enumeration areas (outside AMF coverage areas) or both (where there is partial AMF coverage) within the query area. A query area set refers to one group of user-specified query areas created for a client. These query areas are stored on the computer in a Query Area Library (QAL). There is one QAL for standard query areas and another QAL for user-defined query areas. Special Notes, Quality Statements, Applications and Limitations: (1) For accuracy of data tabulations, it is preferable that query areas not split block-faces in AMF areas or enumeration areas elsewhere. If a query area does not respect this constraint, an approximation of the user-specified area will be constructed from the building blocks (i.e. the block-faces or enumeration areas) based on the location of the corresponding centroids. (2) For accuracy of data tabulations, there must be adequate positional accuracy, consistency and control on any base maps utilized for specifying the query areas. It is preferable that base maps be agreed upon in advance. (3) Data will be suppressed when individual confidentiality may potentially be at risk. This normally corresponds to requiring a minimum population size depending on the variable for which data are to be retrieved (minimum of 100 persons) before any tabulation can be released. Hence, query areas should contain a population larger than this threshold. 6033 REFERENCE MAPS Reference maps are maps which show the locations and boundaries of the geographic areas for which census data are tabulated and published. The main information depicted on reference maps includes the boundaries, names and codes of census geographic areas, and major cultural and physical features such as streets, roads, railways, rivers and lakes. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Rules and Operational Procedures: Boundary and name information for census geographic areas is obtained from the Geocartographic Frame Database (GFDB). Base map information of cultural and physical features is obtained from many sources, including the Department of Energy, Mines and Resources, provincial mapping agencies, and municipal and regional authorities. Some of this information is received in the form of paper maps, and some as computer files. The information is compiled and drafted by Statistics Canada using a variety of manual and automated processes. Most of the reference map information is published in the form of paper maps but some can also be produced on a custom basis in a variety of media, including transparent film and computer files (see CARTLIB [Cartographic Library] definition). Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: With reference maps, users can relate published census data to actual locations on the ground. Statistics Canada provides reference maps for most of the geographic areas for which census data are published, including census divisions and census subdivisions, census metropolitan areas and census agglomerations, census tracts and federal electoral districts. Several other series of reference maps are also available to users on demand. Most maps in these series identify and locate enumeration areas within larger census geographic areas. Note that no reference maps are available for provincial census tracts, or for urban areas outside census metropolitan areas and census agglomerations. A complete list of the various reference map series can be found in the 1991 Census Catalogue (Catalogue No. 92-302E). The information used to compile base maps depicting cultural and physical features comes from many sources with varying degrees of accuracy and currency. Base map information on some reference maps and some parts of individual reference maps may therefore be inaccurate or out of date. Boundary and name information for census geographic areas, on the other hand, is current as of the geographic reference date for the census (January 1, 1991), while census data are current as of Census Day (June 4, 1991). 6034 RURAL AREA The general concept of a rural area is that of a sparsely populated area. Statistics Canada defines rural areas as those areas of Canada lying outside urban areas. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 Rules and Operational Procedures: See "Rules and Operational Procedures" under the Urban Area (UA) definition. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: See "Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications" under the Urban Area (UA) definition. In addition to the above, within the area of Canada defined as rural, population densities and living conditions can vary greatly. Included in rural areas are: - small towns, villages and other populated places under 1,000 population according to the previous census; - rural fringe areas of census metropolitan areas and census agglomerations which may contain estate lots and other non-farm land uses, as well as intensive agricultural land uses; - agricultural areas; - remote and wilderness areas. 6035 STANDARD GEOGRAPHICAL CLASSIFICATION (SGC) The Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) is Statistics Canada's official classification of geographic areas in Canada. The SGC provides unique numeric identification for three types of geographic areas. These are: - provinces and territories; - census divisions (CDs); - census subdivisions (CSDs). The three geographic areas are hierarchically related. Census subdivisions (CSDs) aggregate to census divisions (CDs), which in turn aggregate to a province or a territory. This relationship is reflected in the seven-digit code: Province/territory Census division Census subdivision XX XX XXX 2 digits 2 digits 3 digits Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976,* 1971,* 1966,** 1961** Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Additional SGC information can be found in the Standard Geographical Classification Manual published by Statistics Canada (Catalogue Nos. 12-571, -572, -573). Remarks: Since 1981, the Standard Geographical Classification has been the sole official geographical classification system used for dissemination purposes. * In 1976 and 1971, both SGC and census codes were used to disseminate census data. ** In 1966 and 1961, only census codes were used to disseminate census data. 6036 SUBPROVINCIAL REGION (SPR) Refers to a subprovincial geographical unit smaller than a province (with the exception of Prince Edward Island and the Territories) made up of groupings of complete census divisions. The subprovincial regions were created in response to the requirement for a geographical unit suitable for the analysis of regional economic activity. Such a unit is small enough to permit regional analysis, yet large enough to include a sufficient number of respondents, such that, after confidential data are suppressed, a broad range of statistics can still be released. The regions are based upon work by Camu, Weeks and Sametz in the 1950s with minor adjustments over the years to accommodate changes in census division boundaries and the views of provincial officials. Subprovincial regions may be economic, administrative or planning regions. In some provinces, these regions are designated by law. In other provinces, the regions were created by agreement between Statistics Canada and the province or territories concerned. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971 Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: The number of subprovincial regions varies extensively between provinces. For example, in Ontario there are five SPRs, compared to 16 SPRs in the province of Quebec. The entire province of Prince Edward Island, the Yukon and the Northwest Territories consist of one subprovincial region each. Subprovincial regions are used mainly in the dissemination of statistics on building permits, income tax data, manufacturing industries and employment data. The census respects these regions in order to provide data for comparative geographies. Remarks: There are 68 subprovincial regions in all of Canada. The number of SPRs by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. The 1991 SPRs coincide with the Labour Force Survey (LFS) economic regions, except in British Columbia. For British Columbia, SPRs respect British Columbia's development regions. These regions are defined by B.C.'s Ministry of Regional and Economic Development to promote economic growth and to ensure access to government services in all regions of the province. In Quebec, the 1991 SPRs respect Quebec's "r‚gions administratives" defined by Quebec to serve as a basis for the production of statistics by government departments as well as the establishment of regional and local offices. In all the other provinces, they have been delineated in co-operation with the provinces and respect LFS regions. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6037 TERRITORY Refers to two major political divisions of Canada, namely Yukon and Northwest Territories. From a statistical point of view, these territories are equivalent to provinces, i.e. a basic unit for which data are tabulated and cross-classified. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966, 1961 6038 THEMATIC MAP A thematic map is the representation of statistical data on a map. Thematic maps summarize statistical data, relate them to actual locations on the ground, and reveal geographic patterns or relationships. Two of the more commonly used maps at Statistics Canada are choropleth maps, where different shades or colours are used to represent data classification (e.g., percentage population change censuses), and dot maps, where each dot represents a certain number of occurrences (e.g., one dot = 100 households). Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976, 1971, 1966,* 1961* Rules and Operational Procedures: Geographical information systems (GISs), computer mapping software and specialized plotting hardware are brought together to produce thematic maps. Typically, separate digital files are merged to form the essential base map elements. The limits of census geographic areas are merged with digital representations of shorelines, rivers and lakes. Any inconsistencies such as boundary limits in water and polygon "slivers" are then eliminated. At Statistics Canada, these operations are performed using the Arc /Info GIS. Computer mapping programs are then used to produce the maps, the legend, histograms, scatter diagrams, text, dot charts and bar charts. The maps can be produced on various output devices. At Statistics Canada, a high-speed drum plotter is most often used. This device uses a special photohead assembly in which a focused beam of light passes over a sheet of photographic film mounted on the drum. Maps are normally plotted at a final printing size in the form of colour separation overlays, which can be subsequently used for standard lithographic printing. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Note: The dot distribution mapping software used by Statistics Canada randomly disperses the number of dots over the plottable area of the geographical unit. It does not position dots to any specific location in the plotted area. Quality Statement Issues: (1) Confidentiality, Random Rounding and Data Suppression All census data are subjected to a confidentiality procedure known as "random rounding" prior to publication, to prevent the possibility of associating small figures with any identifiable individual. In addition to random rounding, procedures have been adopted to further protect the confidentiality of individual responses, such as area suppression: - if data are tabulated from the 100% sample, suppression is based upon the total population; - if data are tabulated from the 20% sample, suppression is based upon the non-institutional population; - if the data are published at the postal code level or contain an income distribution, those areas with populations below 250 persons are suppressed; otherwise areas with a population of less than 40 persons are suppressed. (2) Sampling and Weighting Some census data are based on a sample of the population, and then weighted to provide estimates for the entire population. For selected geographic areas, these weighted estimates may not exactly reflect the data for the entire population. (3) Coverage Errors Census data contain coverage errors, which occur whenever a person or household is missed completely, incorrectly included, or counted more than once. Applications: Thematic maps are used to portray spatial patterns of population, income, etc. These maps are useful for policy and decision making or descriptive purposes. Remarks: * Prior to 1971, thematic maps were created using manual cartographic methods. Since 1971, computer- assisted cartographic tools have been employed. 6039 TOWNSHIP, RANGE AND MERIDIAN Township, range and meridian identifies location according to a regular and systematic partitioning of the Prairie provinces into easily discernible rectangular parcels. Townships are numbered in a northerly direction from the international boundary. Ranges are numbered in an easterly direction from the first meridian and in a westerly direction from the first, second, third, fourth, fifth and sixth meridians. Each township/range is divided into 36 sections, which are further divided into four quarter sections (see Figure 24 in the User Documentation or Figure 24 in publication 92-301E, page 211). Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1971, 1966, 1961 Special Notes and Applications: A township, range and meridian location is identified for most unincorporated places in the Prairies. 6040 UNINCORPORATED PLACE (UP) The concept of unincorporated place (UP) is that of a cluster of dwellings (i.e. a settlement) lacking legal limits or local government. A UP is defined as any cluster of five or more occupied dwellings in rural areas, locally known by a specific name, but not having a local government or legal limits. A UP has the same Standard Geographical Classification (SGC) code as the census subdivision (CSD) in which it is located. However, UPs are distinct from CSDs in that a UP has no legal status or limit. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981,* 1971,* 1966,* 1961* Rules and Operational Procedures: The census of Canada reports only those UPs identified by census representatives (CRs) during the census field collection operation. There can be more than one UP within a CSD, and a UP can be located in more than one CSD. UPs are not reported if located in areas defined by the census as being urban. In order to ensure as uniform a method as possible for the identification and reporting of UPs, CRs are instructed to identify all clusters of five or more occupied dwellings locally known under a specific name but not having a local government. To assist them in their work, each CR is provided with a list of UPs that were in his/her enumeration area (EA) at the time of the last census. Unincorporated places are added to or deleted from this list by the CR according to what he/she finds during the enumeration process. UPs are not reported in those areas defined by the census as being urban. This is because urban areas, as defined by the census, are themselves reported as geographic areas in census publications. Furthermore, because urban areas are continuously built-up areas and UPs are clusters of dwellings, it is difficult to segregate one unincorporated place from another. Special Notes: While not a standard geographic area, population counts and locational information have been presented for census UPs for many censuses. Because census unincorporated places by definition are a group of dwellings and lack legal or official boundaries, they are identified primarily by census representatives (CRs) during the census collection phase and this requires a degree of individual judgement. Therefore, comparing UPs and their population counts from one census to another is not recommended. UPs and their population and dwelling counts are a reflection of the CR's judgement of what is locally known as an unincorporated place. Because census UP names are identified by the CR, they may or may not correspond to names officially recognized and approved by provincial or territorial names authorities or the Canadian Permanent Committee on Geographical Names. For 1991, there are approximately 28,000 place names on the Statistics Canada place name file. It is expected that approximately 12,000 will be reported as UPs. Remarks: * Since 1986, the reporting of UPs has been more restrictive compared to that of previous censuses, that is, UPs are now reported in rural areas only. 6041 URBAN AREA (UA) The general concept of an urban area (UA) is that of an area containing a dense concentration of population. Statistics Canada defines an urban area as an area which has attained a population concentration of at least 1,000, and a population density of at least 400 per square kilometre, at the previous census. All territory lying outside urban areas is considered rural. Taken together, urban and rural areas cover all of Canada. Urban areas separated by gaps of less than two kilometres are combined to form a single urban area. Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981, 1976,* 1971,**1966,**1961** Rules and Operational Procedures: The delineation of urban areas is based primarily on an analysis of population concentration and population density. The population data used to delineate urban areas can be analysed at various geographic levels of precision. For reasons of operational efficiency, urban areas are formed in a building-block fashion, beginning with large geographical units and subsequently refining the delineation with smaller units. The geographical units used as building blocks of urban areas are examined in the following order: (a) census subdivisions (CSDs), according to their current census limits; (b) enumeration areas (EAs), according to their limits from the previous census; (c) parts of EAs. Statistics Canada applies the following rules and procedures, in the order shown, when delineating urban areas: (1) CSDs with a population of at least 1,000 and an overall population density of at least 400 per square kilometre at the previous census are delineated as entirely urban. (2) EAs are then added to the urban area if they are adjacent to an urban CSD and if they, or parts of them, have a population density of at least 400 per square kilometre at the previous census. (3) In other areas, contiguous EAs or parts of EAs which, when combined, have a population of at least 1,000 and an overall population density of at least 400 per square kilometre at the previous census are delineated as urban. (4) Other land uses which are considered urban (e.g., commercial and industrial districts, railway yards, parks and cemeteries) are then added to the areas containing the concentrations of population. (5) In order that they can be readily identified, urban area limits are then adjusted to follow recognizable features on the ground such as streets, roads, railways, rivers or lakes. (6) For purposes of confidentiality and operational efficiency, if the difference between the land area of a CSD and that of an urban area contained within it is less than 10 square kilometres, then the urban area is enlarged to include the entire CSD. (7) Gaps between urban areas are then measured and, if less than two kilometres separates two or more urban areas, they are combined to form a single urban area. Urban area names are assigned according to the following rules: (8) If the principal CSD in the urban area is a city, town or village, and the urban area population within the CSD is at least 75% of the CSD population, then the CSD name is assigned to the urban area. (9) If the urban area population is less than 75% of the CSD population, or if the principal CSD is not a city, town or village, then an appropriate place name is assigned to the urban area. (10) A compound name is assigned to the urban area if it contains two or more principal CSDs. Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: Because of the above rules and procedures, the boundaries of urban areas may not conform precisely with the limits of their densely populated areas. In general, this is felt to have little impact on the total population considered as urban, but may have a significant impact on the land area considered as urban in specific cases. This would affect any programs or research based on precise distance or land area measurements related to individual urban areas. While all urban areas contain a population concentration of at least 1,000 with a population density of at least 400 per square kilometre, the application of rules (4), (5), (6) and (7) results in some urban areas having an overall population density of less than 400 per square kilometre. Population data used to delineate urban areas are obtained from the previous census. In areas where significant population growth or decline has occurred since the previous census, the designation of an area as urban or rural may no longer reflect its current population or population density, and its delineation may no longer conform to the current limits of the densely populated area. Remarks: The number of urban areas by province and territory appears in Figure 23A at the end of this definition. Refer to Figure 23A in the User Documentation or to Figure 23A in publication 92-301E, page 173, to view this figure in its original format. In 1991, five urban areas straddled provincial boundaries. They included Campbellton (New Brunswick-Quebec), Hawkesbury (Quebec-Ontario), Ottawa-Hull (Quebec-Ontario), Flin Flon (Manitoba- Saskatchewan) and Lloydminster (Saskatchewan- Alberta). * For the 1976 Census, urban areas contained a population concentration of at least 1,000 and a population density of at least 1,000 per square mile (386 per square kilometre). Urban areas were combined if they were separated by gaps of less than one mile (1.6 kilometres). ** For the 1971, 1966 and 1961 Censuses, urban areas included: (1) all incorporated cities, towns and villages with a population of 1,000 or over; (2) all unincorporated places having a population of 1,000 or over and a population density of at least 1,000 per square mile; and (3) the urbanized fringe of (1) and (2) where a minimum population of 1,000 and a density of at least 1,000 persons per square mile existed. ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census Total Nfld. P.E.I. N.S. N.B. Que. Federal electoral 295 7 4 11 10 75 district Subprovincial region 68 4 1 5 5 16 Census division 290 10 3 18 15 99 Division (census) 74 10 - - - 4 Communaut‚ urbaine 3 - - - - 3 County 60 - 3 18 15 - District 10 - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ 92 - - - - 92 Region 7 - - - - - Regional district 29 - - - - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 2,630 87 69 54 150 1,153 Census subdivision 6,006 404 126 118 287 1,637 Agricultural region*** 76 3 - 5 4 12 Census metropolitan area 25 1 - 1 1 6* Census agglomeration 115 4 2 4 5* 28* Primary census metropolitan area 13 1 - - - 3* Primary census agglomeration 21 1 - 2 - 4 Census tract 4,068 40 - 75 67 1,052 Provincial census tract 1,815 84 26 117 98 491 Urban area 893 42 7 38 36* 222* Enumeration area** 45,749 1,156 250 1,438 1,263 10,871 Area master file 342 2 - 3 16 116 Block-face 763,626 4,345 - 9,096 15,353 175,929 Forward sortation area 1,384 28 7 51 34 363 Postal code 640,963 6,826 2,666 17,871 13,172 163,971 ____________________________________________________________ Figure 23A. Census Geographic Areas by Province and Territory, 1991 Census - Concluded Ont. Man. Sask. Alta. B.C. Y.T. N.W.T. Federal electoral district 99 14 14 26 32 1 2 Subprovincial region 5 8 6 8 8 1 1 Census division 49 23 18 19 30 1 5 Division (census) - 23 18 19 - - - Communaut‚ urbaine - - - - - - - County 24 - - - - - - District 10 - - - - - - District municipality 1 - - - - - - Metropolitan municipality 1 - - - - - - Municipalit‚ r‚gionale de comt‚ - - - - - - - Region - - - - 1 1 5 Regional district - - - - 29 - - Regional municipality 10 - - - - - - United counties 3 - - - - - - Census consolidated subdivision 526 127 302 73 83 1 5 Census subdivision 951 293 953 438 691 36 72 Agricultural region*** 5 12 20 7 8 - - Census metropolitan area 10* 1 2 2 2 - - Census agglomeration 32* 4* 8* 9* 22 1 1 Primary census metropolitan area 6* - - 2 1 - - Primary census agglomeration 8 - - 3 3 - - Census tract 1,731 156 98 385 464 - - Provincial census tract 410 91 146 161 179 5 7 Urban area 246* 42* 69* 99* 92 1 4 Enumeration area** 14,990 2,028 2,787 4,604 6,111 97 154 Area master file 113 9 5 4 74 - - Block-face 312,280 32,766 21,003 73,085 119,769 - - Forward sortation area 503 55 44 118 173 3 5 Postal code 235,949 22,007 20,487 58,616 98,091 781 526 ________________ * CMAs/CAs, PCMAs/PCAs and urban areas crossing provincial limits are counted in both provinces. ** As of November 8, 1991. *** As of November 12, 1991. 6042 URBAN POPULATION SIZE GROUP Urban population size group refers to the classification used in tabulations where urban areas are distributed according to the following size groups, based on their 1991 population: Under - 1,000 1,000 - 2,499 2,500 - 4,999 5,000 - 9,999 10,000 - 24,999 25,000 - 49,999 50,000 - 99,999 100,000 - 249,999 250,000 - 499,999 500,000 - 999,999 1,000,000 and over Censuses: 1991, 1986, 1981,* 1976,* 1971,** 1966,** 1961** Special Notes, Quality Statements and Applications: While census publications tabulate data according to the above standard population size groups, the census database has the capability of tabulating data according to any user-defined population size group. Statistics Canada defines urban as an area with a concentration of population of at least 1,000, and a population density of at least 400 per square kilometre, at the previous census. In areas where population decline has subsequently occurred, this can result in some urban areas having a population of less than 1,000 according to the current census. Remarks: * Prior to the 1986 Census, the following population size groups were used: 1,000 - 2,499 2,500 - 4,999 5,000 - 9,999 10,000 - 29,999 30,000 - 99,999 100,000 - 499,999 500,000 and over The census database has been organized in such a way that tabulations according to these pre-1986 Census population size groups can be made on request. ** Prior to the 1976 Census, the term "Municipal Size Group" was used to describe the same concept. Statistics Canada (c). Cat. 92-301D E. 1991 Census Electronic Dictionary.